Omron CPM2C-S100C-DRT, CPM2C-S110C Operation Manual

PDF

Document

Cat. No. W377-E1-04

SYSMAC

CPM2C-S

CPM2C-S100C/S110C/S100C-DRT/S110C-DRT

Programmable Controller

OPERATION MANUAL

CPM2C-S Programmable Controller

Operation Manual

Revised September 2009

Notice:

OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.

The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.

!DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

!WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

!Caution

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.

The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means

“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.

The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else.

Visual Aids

The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information.

Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.

1,2,3...

Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.

 OMRON, 2000

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of

OMRON.

No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication. v

PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-tier Communications with CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi xvi

xviii xviii

xxi

SECTION 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1-1 CPM2C-S Features and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1-2 System Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3 CPM2C-S Structure and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4 Functions Listed by Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5 Comparison with the CPM2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6 Preparation for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

Unit Components and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2-1 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2-2 Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

SECTION 3

Installation and Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

3-1 Design Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

3-2 Selecting an Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3 Installing the CPM2C-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4 Wiring and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

4-1 Allocation of Word and Bit Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

4-2 I/O Allocation for CPM2C-S PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3 I/O Allocation to CompoBus/S Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-4 SR Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-5 AR Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-6 PC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7 Basic PC Operation and I/O Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-8 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

105

110

SECTION 5

Exchanging Data with CompoBus/S Slaves . . . . . . . . . . 111

5-1 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

5-2 Remote I/O Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3 Communications Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

113

115

vii

SECTION 6

Exchanging Data with a DeviceNet Master . . . . . . . . . . 117

6-1 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

6-2 Remote I/O Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3 Explicit Message Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4 Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118

121

135

SECTION 7

Cycle Time and I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

7-1 Cycle Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

7-2 I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3 Interrupt Processing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-4 One-to-one PC Link I/O Response Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

153

155

156

SECTION 8

Using Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

8-1 Using a Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

8-2 Programming Console Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-3 Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

166

193

SECTION 9

Test Runs and Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

9-1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

9-2 Self-diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

9-3 Programming Console Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-4 Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-5 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-6 Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-7 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 10

Expansion Memory Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

10-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

10-2 Specifications and Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-3 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

221

222

Appendices

A Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

235

237

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

viii

About this Manual:

The CPM2C-S is a compact, high-speed Programmable Controller (PC) designed for control operations in systems requiring from 10 to 106 I/O points per PC. There are two manuals describing the setup and operation of the CPM2C-S: The CPM2C-S Operation Manual (this manual) and the CPM1/

CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programming Manual (W353). (The CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/

CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programming Manual is referred to as simply the Programming Manual in this manual.)

This manual describes the system configuration and installation of the CPM2C-S and provides a basic explanation of operating procedures for the Programming Consoles. It also introduces the capabilities of the SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) and SYSMAC-CPT Support Software. Read this manual first to acquaint yourself with the CPM2C-S.

Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual (W356) for descriptions of the specifications and installation of Expansion I/O Units and refer to the CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/

SRM1(-V2) Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W353) for descriptions of the specifications and installation of Expansion Units.

The SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals: Basics and C-series PCs (W247 and W248) provide descriptions of SSS operations for the CPM2C-S and other SYSMAC C-series PCs. The SYS-

MAC-CPT Support Software Quick Start Guide (W332) and User Manual (W333) provide descriptions of ladder diagram operations in the Windows environment. The CX-Programmer User Manual (W361) and the CX-Server User Manual (W362) provide details of operations for the WS02-CXPC1-E CX-Programmer.

Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate the CPM2C-S.

Section 1 describes the special features and functions of the CPM2C-S, shows the possible system configurations, and outlines the steps required before operation. Read this section first when using the

CPM2C-S for the first time.

Section 2 provides the technical specifications of the CPM2C-S CPU Unit, Adapter Units, and AC

Power Supply Unit and describes the main components of these Units.

Section 3 provides information on installing and wiring a CPM2C-S PC. Be sure to follow the directions and precautions in this section when installing the CPM2C-S in a panel or cabinet, wiring the power supply, or wiring I/O.

Section 4 describes the structure of the CPM2C-S’ memory areas and explains how to use them.

Section 5 explains how to exchange data with CompoBus/S Slaves when using the CPM2C-S as a

CompoBus/S Master.

Section 6 explains how to exchange data with a CPM2C-S100C-DRT or CPM2C-S110C-DRT

DeviceNet Master.

Section 7 explains the cycle time and I/O response time in CPM2C-S PCs. Refer to this section when writing the user program to improve operation and reduce response delays.

Section 8 outlines the operations possible with the Programming Consoles.

Section 9 describes procedures for test runs of CPM2C-S operation, self-diagnosis functions, and error processing to identify and correct the hardware and software errors that can occur during PC operation.

Section 10 describes how to use the CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit. Follow the handling precautions and procedures to properly use the Unit.

Appendix A provides tables of CPM2C-S Units and related products.

Appendix B provides the dimensions of CPM2C-S CPU Units.

Appendix C provides the support software limitations and precautions.

!WARNING

Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.

Read and Understand this Manual

Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments.

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

WARRANTY

OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.

OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-

INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE

PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS

DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR

INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,

LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,

WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT

LIABILITY.

In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted.

IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS

REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS

WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO

CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR. xi

Application Considerations

SUITABILITY FOR USE

OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.

At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use.

The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products:

• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual.

• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.

• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.

Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.

NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR

PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO

ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND

INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS

OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof.

xii

Disclaimers

CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS

Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons.

It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown.

PERFORMANCE DATA

Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and

Limitations of Liability.

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.

xiii

xiv

PRECAUTIONS

This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.

The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable

Controller. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC system.

Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating Environment Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-tier Communications with CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi xvi xvi

xviii xviii

xxi

Intended Audience

1 Intended Audience

This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).

• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.

• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.

• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.

2

3 General Precautions

The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.

Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative.

Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.

This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.

!WARNING

It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PC System to the above-mentioned applications.

Safety Precautions

!WARNING

Connect the ground terminal of the Power Supply Unit (CPM2C-PA201) to a ground or 100 Ω or less. Not doing so may result in electric shock.

!WARNING

Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.

!WARNING

Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.

!WARNING

Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.

!WARNING

Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable

Controller), including the following items, in order to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents. xvi

Safety Precautions 3

• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits.

• The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.

As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.

• The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.

• If the 24-VDC output (service power supply) of the Power Supply Unit

(CPM2C-PA201) is overloaded or shorted, the voltage may drop causing outputs to turn OFF. External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system in such an event.

!WARNING

When handling the Memory Backup Battery, never drop, disassemble, distort, short-circuit, recharge, heat to a temperature exceeding 100

C, or throw into fire. Otherwise the Battery may explode, catch fire, or leak fluid.

!WARNING

When transferring programs to other nodes, or when making changes to I/O memory, confirm the safety of the destination node before transfer. Not doing so may result in injury.

!Caution

Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.

!Caution

Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the Power Supply Unit (CPM2C-

PA201) to a torque of 0.74 to 0.9 N•m. Loose screws may result in burning or malfunction.

!Caution

Do not connect the 24-VDC output (service power supply) or the Power Supply Unit (CPM2C-PA201) to an AC power supply. Connecting it to an AC power supply will damage the internal circuit.

!Caution

When connecting a personal computer or other peripheral device to the

CPM2C-S, either ground the 0 V side of the CPM2C-S or do not ground at all.

Depending on the method of grounding, the 24-V power supply may short-circuit; do not ground the 24-V side as shown in the following diagram.

Example: Connections where 24-V Power Supply Will Short-circuit

24 V

Non-isolated DC power supply

0 V

CPM2C-S

0 V

Peripheral device

FG xvii

Operating Environment Precautions

4

5 Operating Environment Precautions

!Caution

Do not operate the control system in the following places:

• Locations subject to direct sunlight.

• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications.

• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.

• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.

• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.

• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.

• Locations subject to shock or vibration.

!Caution

Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations:

• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.

• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.

• Locations close to power supplies.

!Caution

The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC

System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.

Application Precautions

Observe the following precautions when using the PC System.

!WARNING

Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.

• Always connect to a ground such that the grounding resistance does not exceed 100 Ω when installing the Units. Not connecting to the correct ground may result in electric shock.

• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock.

• Assembling the Units.

• Connecting or disconnecting the Expansion I/O Units or Expansion

Units.

• Connecting or wiring the cables.

• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.

• Setting DIP switches.

• Replacing the battery xviii

Application Precautions 5

!Caution

Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the PC or the system, or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these precautions.

• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.

• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits.

• Construct a control circuit so that power supply for the I/O circuits does not come ON before power supply for the Unit. If power supply for the I/O circuits comes ON before power supply for the Unit, normal operation may be temporarily interrupted.

• If the operating mode is changed from RUN or MONITOR mode to PRO-

GRAM mode, with the IOM Hold Bit ON, the output will hold the most recent status. In such a case, ensure that the external load does not exceed specifications. (If operation is stopped because of an operation error (including FALS instructions), the values in the internal memory of the CPU Unit will be saved, but the outputs will all turn OFF.)

• Install the CPM2C-S and Expansion I/O Units properly so that they will not fall off.

• Be sure that the terminal blocks and other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking may result in malfunction.

• Be sure that terminal blocks and connectors are connected in the specified direction with the correct polarity. Not doing so may result in malfunction.

• Use the Unit with the battery housing cover in place to prevent dust or foreign matter from entering inside the Unit. Not doing so may result in malfunction.

• Install the expansion I/O connector cover to the last Unit (Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit) to prevent dust or foreign matter from entering inside the Unit. Not doing so may result in malfunction.

• Be sure to attach the labels supplied with the CPM2C-S or provide other protective covers when wiring in order to prevent dust or wiring cuttings from entering the Unit.

• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.

• Use round crimp terminals for wiring the Power Supply Unit (CPM2C-

PA201). Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning.

• Be sure to perform wiring in accordance with the CPM2C-S Operation

Manual. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.

• Do not apply voltages to the input terminals in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages may result in burning.

• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the output terminals in excess of the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning.

• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.

• Always use the power supply voltage specified in the operation manuals.

An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.

xix

EC Directives

6 6-1

6-2

• In areas with an unreliable power supply, install devices that will ensure a reliable power supply within the rated voltage and frequency ranges.

• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.

• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply. Incorrect wiring or switch settings may result in burning.

• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.

• Changing the operating mode of the PC.

• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.

• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.

• Before touching the Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.

• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.

Doing either of these may break the cables.

• Do not apply forces exceeding 50 N to connector sections.

• Do not place objects on top of the cables. Doing so may break the cables.

• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of the DM and HR Areas required for resuming operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.

• When handling the battery, never short-circuit, recharge, disassemble, heat excessively, incinerate, or subject the battery to excessive force.

Subjecting the battery to excessive forces such as dropping the battery on the floor can cause the battery to leak.

• Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual. Improper installation of the Unit may result in malfunction.

• When transporting the Units, use special packing boxes. Be careful not to apply excessive vibration or shock during transportation and not to drop the product.

• Store the Units within the following temperature and humidity ranges:

Storage temperature: –20 to 75 ° C, storage humidity: 10% to 90% (with no icing or condensation)

EC Directives

Applicable Directives

• EMC Directives

• Low Voltage Directive

Concepts

EMC Directives

OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related

EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to

EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by the customer.

EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.

3-tier Communications with CX-Programmer

6-3

The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.

Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:

EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61131-2

EMI (Electromagnetic Interference): EN61000-6-4

(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)

Low Voltage Directive

Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75 to 1,500 VDC meet the required safety standards for the PC (EN61131-2).

Conformance to EC Directives

1,2,3...

The CPM2C-S PCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the machine or device in which the CPM2C-S PC is used complies with EC Directives, the PC must be installed as follows:

The CPM2C-S PC must be installed within a control panel.

Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power supplies used for the communications and I/O power supplies.

CPM2C-S PCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common

Emission Standard (EN61000-6-4). Radiated emission characteristics (10m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives.

7 3-tier Communications with CX-Programmer

Communication between CX-Programmer and the CPM2C-S is possible over a maximum of three network tiers, with the following limitation.

xxi

3-tier Communications with CX-Programmer 7

CPM2C-S CPU Unit Limitation

For CPM2C-S CPU Units, the above feature is supported for all CPU Units manufactured on 11 September 2001 or later. The manufacturing number for these CPU Units is 1191O or later. Confirm the manufacturing number before attempting to use this feature.

Reading Manufacturing Numbers

@@@@@

Factory code (A to Z or blank)

Year (For example 2000 = 0, 2001 = 1, and 2002 = 2)

Month (January to September = 1 to 9, October to December = X, Y, and Z)

Day of month (01 to 31)

Supported Communications

DeviceNet systems (A CS/CJ-series DeviceNet Unit must be mounted on CS/

CJ-series CPU Racks connected to the CPM2C-S.)

FA networks (Controller Link, SYSMAC LINK)

Office networks, Ethernet

Reference

FINS commands, such as CMND, SEND, and RECV, cannot be sent to or received from the CPM2C-S.

xxii

SECTION 1 Introduction

This section describes the special features and functions of the CPM2C-S, shows the possible system configurations, and outlines the steps required before operation. Read this section first when using the CPM2C-S for the first time.

Refer to the CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programming Manual (W353) for details on programming operations.

1-1 CPM2C-S Features and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1-1 CPM2C-S Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1-2 Overview of CPM2C-S Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2 System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2-1 CPU Units and AC Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2-2 CompoBus/S Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2-3 CPU Unit, Expansion Units, and Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . .

1-2-4 DeviceNet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2-5 Adapter Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3 CPM2C-S Structure and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3-1 CPM2C-S Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3-2 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3-3 Operating Mode at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3-4 PC Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3-5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4 Functions Listed by Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5 Comparison with the CPM2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6 Preparation for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CPM2C-S Features and Functions Section 1-1

1-1 CPM2C-S Features and Functions

1-1-1 CPM2C-S Features

The CPM2C-S PCs are compact CPM2C PCs that have been equipped with the functions of a CompoBus/S Master. The CPM2C-S incorporates a variety of special features just like the CPM2C, including synchronized pulse control, interrupt inputs, pulse outputs, and a clock function.

• The standard CompoBus/S interface increases the PC’s I/O capacity, reduces wiring, and saves space.

CompoBus/S Slaves

• The CPM2C-S is a compact Unit, so it can be incorporated into almost any machine. Furthermore, the CPM2C-S CPU Unit can be mounted in any direction.

• The CPM2C-S100C-DRT and CPM2C-S110C-DRT are also equipped with DeviceNet Slave functions to provide distributed control through a

DeviceNet connection with a host PC.

• The CPM2C-S itself can handle a wide range of machine control applications. In addition, the CPM2C-S is capable of communications with devices such as personal computers and OMRON Programmable Terminals so it is ideal to use to expand or upgrade existing systems.

CPM2C-S100C

CPM2C-S110C

CPM2C-S100C-DRT

CPM2C-S110C-DRT

Communications port

CompoBus/S interface

I/O connector

DeviceNet interface

• The CPM2C-S CPU Unit has a total of 10 I/O points: 6 inputs and 4 transistor outputs. Up to 3 CPM2C-series Expansion I/O Units can be connected for a maximum I/O capacity of 106 I/O points with three 32-point

Expansion I/O Units. It is possible to connect up to 362 I/O points by adding Slaves through the CompoBus/S system.

• The communications port can be used simultaneously as two ports:

Peripheral and RS-232C. The peripheral port supports Programming

Devices, Host Link, and no-protocol communications. The RS-232C port

CPM2C-S Features and Functions Section 1-1

CompoBus/S Master

Functions supports Host Link, no-protocol (serial), 1:1 Link, and 1:1 NT Link communications.

• Connect up to 3 Expansion Units such as CPM2C-series Analog I/O

Units, Temperature Sensor Units, or CompoBus/S I/O Link Units for CompoBus/S Slave functions.

Up to 32 CompoBus/S Slaves can be connected to create a Remote I/O Link with up to 256 I/O points. It is easy to build an efficient, long-range distributed system with less wiring by connecting CompoBus/S I/O Terminals, Analog

Terminals, Sensor Terminals, and Bit Chain Terminals.

Example System Configuration

CS1, C200HX/HE/HG,

CVM1, or CV-series PC

DeviceNet Unit (Master)

DeviceNet Slave

CPM2C-S

DeviceNet transmission line

As a DeviceNet Slave, the

CPM2C-S supports remote I/O communications with up to 32 input words and 32 output words as well as explicit message communications.

Expansion (I/O) Unit (3 max.)

DeviceNet Slave

I/O control, interrupt inputs, high-speed counters, pulse outputs, synchronized pulse control, and analog I/O

DeviceNet Slave

Functions

As a CompoBus/S

Master, the CPM2C-S can control remote

I/O (up to 256 points) on Slaves.

(-DRT Models Only)

CompoBus/S transmission line

I/O control and analog I/O

CompoBus/S Slaves

When the CPM2C-S is used as a DeviceNet Slave, an I/O Link of up to 1,024 points (512 inputs and 512 outputs) can be created with the Master. The input and output areas used in the I/O Link can be allocated independently and the data areas, starting addresses, and size of these Read/Write areas can be specified freely. (The Read/Write areas can be set in the PC Setup or using the DeviceNet Configurator.)

Explicit message communications can be initiated from the Master to read or write data in any data area in the CPM2C-S.

CPM2C-S Features and Functions Section 1-1

Basic Functions

CPU Unit Variations

Expansion I/O Units and

CompoBus/S Slaves

Share Programming

Devices

The CPM2C-S PCs are one-piece PCs with 10 I/O points (6 inputs and 4 outputs) in a built-in connector. There are 2 types of outputs available (sinking transistor outputs, and sourcing transistor outputs). All CPM2C-S PCs require a 24-VDC power supply.

CompoBus/S Slaves and up to 3 Expansion I/O Units can be connected to the

CPU Unit to increase the PC’s I/O capacity to a maximum of 362 I/O points.

There are 23 different Expansion I/O Units available, including Units with 32

I/O points, 24 I/O points, 20 I/O points, 10 I/O points, 8 input points, 8 output points, 16 inputs points, and 16 output points. The maximum I/O capacity of

106 I/O points is achieved by connecting three 32-point Expansion I/O Units to the CPU Unit.

The CompoBus/S Master functions allow I/O Slaves to be connected providing an additional capacity of up to 256 I/O points (128 inputs and 128 outputs.)

Either a Programming Console or the CX-Programmer (version 2.1 or later) can be used to program and monitor the CPM2C-S. Programs created on the

SYSMAC-CPT or SYSMAC Support Software can also be used.

Built-in Motor Control Capability

Synchronized Pulse

Control

Synchronized pulse control provides an easy way to synchronize the operation of a peripheral piece of equipment with the main equipment. The output pulse frequency can be controlled as some multiple of the input pulse frequency, allowing the speed of a peripheral piece of equipment (such as a supply conveyor) to be synchronized with the speed of the main piece of equipment.

CPM2C-S

Encoder

Motor driver Motor

High-speed Counters and

Interrupts

Pulses are output as a fixed multiple of the input frequency.

The CPM2C-S has a two kinds of high-speed counter inputs. The high-speed counter input has a response frequency of 20 kHz/5 kHz and the interrupt inputs (in counter mode) have a response frequency of 2 kHz.

• The single high-speed counter can be used in any one of the four input modes: differential phase mode (5 kHz), pulse plus direction input mode

(20 kHz), up/down pulse mode (20 kHz), or increment mode (20 kHz).

Interrupts can be triggered when the count matches a set value or falls within a specified range.

One high-speed counter can be used.

• The interrupt inputs (counter mode) can be used for incrementing counters or decrementing counters (2 kHz) and trigger an interrupt (executing the interrupt program) when the count matches the target value.

Two interrupt inputs can be used.

CPM2C-S Features and Functions Section 1-1

Easy Position Control with

Pulse Outputs

CPM2C-S PCs have two outputs that can produce 10 Hz to 10 kHz pulses

(single-phase outputs).

• When used as single-phase pulse outputs, there can be two outputs with a frequency range of 10 Hz to 10 kHz with a fixed duty ratio or 0.1 to

999.9 Hz with a variable duty ratio (0 to 100% duty ratio).

• When used as pulse plus direction or up/down pulse outputs, there can be just one output with a frequency range of 10 Hz to 10 kHz.

High-speed Input Capabilities for Machine Control

High-speed Interrupt Input

Function

The CPU Units have 2 inputs that can be used as interrupt inputs. These inputs are shared with quick-response inputs and interrupt inputs in counter mode and have a minimum input signal width of 50

µ s and response time of

0.3 ms. When an interrupt input goes ON, the main program is stopped and the interrupt program is executed.

Quick-response Input

Function

The CPU Units have 2 inputs that can be used as quick-response inputs to reliably read inputs with a signal width as short as 50 µ s regardless of the cycle time. These inputs are shared with interrupt inputs and interrupt inputs in counter mode.

Stabilizing Input Filter

Function

The input time constant for all inputs can be set to 1 ms, 2 ms, 3 ms, 5 ms,

10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, or 80 ms. The effects of chattering and external noise can be reduced by increasing the input time constant.

Analog I/O Supported by Expansion Units and CompoBus/S Master Functions

Analog I/O Units Up to 3 optional Analog I/O Units can be connected to the CPM2C-S. For each Analog I/O Unit mounted to the Unit, 2 analog input points and 1 analog output point are available. By mounting 3 Analog I/O Units, a maximum of 6 analog input points and 3 analog output points can be made available. (By using a combination of the PID(––) instruction and PWM(––) instruction, time proportional control is possible.)

• The ranges supported for analog input signals are 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA, and the resolution is 1/6000 (full scale). The averaging function and power interruption detection function can be used.

• The ranges supported for analog output signals are 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V,

–10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA, and the resolution is 1/6000 (full scale).

Analog I/O Terminals

Temperature Sensor Units

Up to 8 analog inputs and 8 analog outputs can be connected through a CompoBus/S Analog I/O Terminal.

Up to 3 optional Temperature Sensor Units can be mounted to the CPM2C-S.

There are 2 models of Temperature Sensor Unit: One for input from a thermocouple sensor and one for input from a platinum resistance thermometer sensor. There are 2 input points on each Temperature Sensor Unit.

• Thermocouple inputs (and measurement ranges): K (–200 to 1,300

C), K

(0.0 to 500.0

C), J (-100 to 850

C), and J (0.0 to 400.0

C).

• Platinum resistance thermometer inputs (and measurement ranges):

Pt100 (–200.0 to 650.0

C), JPt100 (–200.0 to 650.0

C).

CPM2C-S Features and Functions

Other Functions

Interval Timer Interrupts

Calendar/Clock

Long-term Timer

Expansion Memory Unit

Section 1-1

The interval timer can be set between 0.5 and 319,968 ms and can be set to generate just one interrupt (one-shot mode) or periodic interrupts (scheduled interrupt mode).

The clock (accuracy within 1 minute/month) can be read from the program to show the current year, month, day, day of the week, and time. The clock can be set from a Programming Device (such as a Programming Console) or the time can be adjusted by rounding up or down to the nearest minute.

TIML(––) is a long-term timer that accommodates set values up to 99,990 seconds (27 hours, 46 minutes, 30 seconds). When combined with the SEC-

ONDS TO HOURS conversion instruction (HMS(––)), the long-term timer provides an easy way to control equipment scheduling.

The CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit is a program loader for smallsize or micro PCs. Using the CPM1-EMU01-V1, simple on-site transfer of user programs and data memory (DM 6144 to DM 6655) is possible with PCs.

CPM2C-S

CPM2C-CN111

Expansion Memory Unit

EEPROM

Indicator

UPLOAD+DM Button UPLOAD Button

CS1W-CN114

CPM2C-S

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

CPM2C-S Features and Functions Section 1-1

Complete Communications Capabilities

Host Link A Host Link connection can be made through the PC’s communications port used as a RS-232C or peripheral port. A personal computer or Programmable

Terminal connected in Host Link mode can be used for operations such as reading/writing data in the PC’s I/O memory or reading/changing the PC’s operating mode.

1:1 Host Link Communications 1:N Host Link Communications

No-protocol

Communications

(Up to 32 PCs can be connected.)

The TXD(48) and RXD(47) instructions can be used in no-protocol mode to exchange data with standard serial devices. For example, data can be received from a bar code reader or transmitted to a serial printer. The serial devices can be connected to the communications port as a RS-232C or peripheral port.

Inputting data from a bar code reader

Bar code reader

Outputting data to a serial printer

Serial printer

High-speed 1:1 NT Link

Communications

In a 1:1 NT Link, an OMRON Programmable Terminal (PT) can be connected directly to the CPM2C-S. The PT must be connected to the communications port as an RS-232C port (not as a peripheral port).

OMRON PT

CPM2C-S Features and Functions

One-to-one PC Link

Section 1-1

A CPM2C-S can be linked directly to another CPM2C-S, CQM1, CPM1,

CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1(-V2), C200HS, or C200HX/HG/HE PC. The

1:1 PC Link allows automatic data link connections. The PC must be connected to the communications port as an RS-232C port (not as a peripheral port).

1-1-2 Overview of CPM2C-S Functions

Main function

CompoBus/S Master functions

DeviceNet Slave functions

Interrupts

High-speed counters

Variations/Details

• Remote I/O devices can be allocated up to 256 I/O points (128 inputs and 128 outputs) in input area IR 020 to IR 027 and output area IR 030 to IR 037.

• The node numbers can be set to 0 to 7 (128-point mode) or 0 to 15 (256-point mode).

• The communications mode can be set to high-speed mode (max. length 100 m) or long-distance mode (max. length 500 m).

• Up to 64 words (32 input words and 32 output words) can be allocated to the DeviceNet

Master’s I/O. The Master’s I/O can be allocated to the following data areas.

IR 000 to IR 049

IR 200 to IR 227

DM 0000 to DM 2047

LR 00 to LR 15

HR 00 to HR 19

AR 00 to AR 23 (CPM2C

→

Master; read-only)

TC 000 to TC 255

• Explicit message communications are supported. Any CPM2C-S data area can be accessed from the DeviceNet Master.

•

The communications speed can be set to 500 kbps (total network length 100 m max.),

250 kbps (total network length 250 m max.), or 125 kbps (total network length 500 m max.).

Interrupt inputs

2 inputs

Response time: 50 µ s

Interval timer interrupts

1 input

Set value: 0.5 to 319,968 ms

Precision: 0.1 ms

High-speed counter

1 input, see note 1.

Differential phase mode (5 kHz)

Pulse plus direction input mode (20 kHz)

Up/down input mode (20 kHz)

Increment mode (20 kHz)

Interrupt inputs (counter mode)

2 inputs

Incrementing counter (2 kHz)

Decrementing counter (2 kHz)

Scheduled interrupts

One-shot interrupt

No interrupt

Count-check interrupt

(An interrupt can be generated when the count equals the set value or the count lies within a preset range.)

No interrupt

Count-up interrupt

CPM2C-S Features and Functions Section 1-1

Main function

Pulse outputs

Synchronized pulse control

Variations/Details

• 2 outputs:

Single-phase pulse output without acceleration/deceleration (See note 2.)

10 Hz to 10 kHz

• 2 outputs:

Variable duty ratio pulse output (See note 2.)

0.1 to 999.9 Hz, duty ratio 0 to 100%

• 1 output:

Pulse output with trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration (See note 2.)

Pulse plus direction output, up/down pulse output, 10 Hz to 10 kHz

1 point, see notes 1 and 2.

Input frequency range: 10 to 500 Hz, 20 Hz to 1 kHz, or 300 Hz to 20 kHz

Output frequency range: 10 Hz to 10 kHz

Quick-response input 2 inputs in CPU Units with 10 I/O points, 4 inputs in CPU Units with 20 I/O points

Minimum input signal width: 50 µ s

Determines the input time constant for all inputs. (Settings: 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 40, or 80 ms) Input time constant

Calendar/Clock Shows the current year, month, day of the week, day of the month, hour, minute, and second.

Expansion Unit functions Analog I/O functions using CPM2C-MAD11 Analog I/O Unit

•

Two analog inputs: Input range of 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA

• One analog output: Output range of 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA

Temperature sensing functions using CPM2C-TS001/101 Temperature Sensor Unit

• Thermocouple input (measurement range): K ( − 200 to 1,300 ° C)

K (0.0 to 500.0

° C)

J (–100 to 850 ° C)

J (0.0 to 400.0

° C)

• Platinum resistance thermometer (measurement range): Pt100 (–200.0 to 650.0

° C)

JPt100 (–200.0 to 650.0

° C)

CompoBus/S Slave functions using CPM2C-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit

Data exchange with the Master Unit via 8 inputs and 8 outputs.

Note 1.

This input is shared by the high-speed counter and synchronized pulse control functions.

This output is shared by the pulse output and synchronized pulse control functions.

System Configurations

1-2 System Configurations

1-2-1 CPU Units and AC Power Supply Units

CPM2C-S CPU Units

CPM2C-S100C

CPM2C-S110C

CPM2C-S100C-DRT

CPM2C-S110C-DRT

Section 1-2

Name

CPU Unit with CompoBus/S Master

Functions

CPU Unit with CompoBus/S Master and DeviceNet Slave Functions

AC Power Supply Unit (Optional)

Inputs

6 24-VDC inputs

Outputs

4 sinking transistor outputs

4 sourcing transistor outputs

4 sinking transistor outputs

4 sourcing transistor outputs

Model

CPM2C-S100C

CPM2C-S110C

CPM2C-S100C-DRT

CPM2C-S110C-DRT

AC Power Supply Unit

Name

AC Power Supply Unit

Ratings

100 to 240 VAC input

24 VDC, 600 mA output

CPM2C-PA201

Model

Note General-purpose power supplies such as the S82J-series and S82K-series

Power Supplies can also be used.

System Configurations Section 1-2

1-2-2 CompoBus/S Interface

The standard built-in CompoBus/S interface increases the PC’s I/O capacity, reduces wiring, and saves space. Up to 32 CompoBus/S Slaves can be connected to create a Remote I/O Link with up to 256 I/O points. It is easy to build an efficient, long-range distributed system with less wiring by connecting

CompoBus/S I/O Terminals, Analog Terminals, Sensor Terminals, and Bit

Chain Terminals.

CompoBus/S transmission line

Terminator

Slave Slave

32 or 16 Slaves max. (selectable)

Slave

• The max. number of Slaves that can be connected through CompoBus/S can be set to 16 or 32 Slaves. The following tables show how the max.

number of Slaves and communications mode settings affect the communications response time as well as the communications distance and communications speed.

CompoBus/S Communications Response Time

Communications mode Max. number of Slaves

High-speed mode

Long-distance mode

Communications response time

0.5 ms

0.8 ms

4.0 ms

6.0 ms

Communications Distance

Cable

2-conductor

VCTF cable

4-conductor

VCTF cable

Mode

High-speed Communications Mode

Long-distance Communications Mode

High-speed Communications Mode

Long-distance Communications Mode

Main line length

Branch line length

Total branch line length

100 m max. 3 m max.

50 m max.

500 m max. 6 m max.

120 m max.

30 m max.

(See note.)

3 m max.

(See note.)

30 m max.

(See note.)

Flexibly branched, provided that the total length of cable is a maximum of

200 m.

System Configurations Section 1-2

Cable

Special Flat

Cable

Mode

High-speed Communications Mode

Long-distance Communications Mode

Main line length

Branch line length

Total branch line length

30 m max.

(See note.)

3 m max.

(See note.)

30 m max.

(See note.)

Flexibly branched, provided that the total length of cable is a maximum of

200 m.

Note When 4-conductor VCTF cable or Special Flat Cable is used to connect fewer than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to 100 m long and the total branch line length can be up to 50 m in High-speed Communications Mode. (These are the same conditions as when 2-conductor VCTF cable is used.)

• Refer to

5-2 Remote I/O Communications

for a list of compatible Slaves.

1-2-3 CPU Unit, Expansion Units, and Expansion I/O Units

A series of up to 3 Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units can be connected to the expansion I/O connector on the CPU Unit.

There are three types of Expansion Units available: Analog I/O Unit, Temperature Sensor Unit, and CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit.

CPU Unit

Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit

Expansion I/O Units

Expansion I/O Connector

(output side, no cover)

Expansion I/O Connector

(with cover)

Expansion I/O Connector

(input side)

A PC with 106 I/O points (the maximum) can be assembled by connecting three 32-point Expansion I/O Units to a CPU Unit.

CPM2C-S100C-DRT

(6 inputs, 4 outputs)

1 Unit

CPM2C-32EDTC

(16 inputs, 16 outputs)

3 Units 54 inputs, 52 outputs

Units with Relay Outputs (via Terminal Block)

10 I/O Points 20 I/O Points 8 Output Points

Unit I/O

10 I/O points

20 I/O points

8 output points

Inputs Outputs

6 inputs (24 VDC) 4 relay outputs

12 inputs (24 VDC) 8 relay outputs

--8 relay outputs

Model

CPM2C-10EDR

CPM2C-20EDR

CPM2C-8ER

System Configurations

24 I/O Points

Section 1-2

Units with Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu-compatible Connector

32 I/O Points 8 Input Points 8 Output Points 16 Input Points 16 Output Points

Unit I/O

24 I/O points

32 I/O points

8 input points

16 input points

8 output points ---

---

16 output points ---

---

Inputs Outputs

16 inputs (24 VDC) 8 transistor outputs (sinking)

8 transistor outputs (sourcing)

Model

CPM2C-24EDTC

CPM2C-24EDT1C

16 inputs (24 VDC) 16 transistor outputs (sinking) CPM2C-32EDTC

16 transistor outputs (sourcing) CPM2C-32EDT1C

8 inputs (24 VDC) ---

16 inputs (24 VDC) ---

CPM2C-8EDC

CPM2C-16EDC

8 transistor outputs (sinking)

8 transistor outputs (sourcing)

16 transistor outputs (sinking)

16 transistor outputs (sourcing)

CPM2C-8ETC

CPM2C-8ET1C

CPM2C-16ETC

CPM2C-16ET1C

24 I/O Points

Units with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector

32 I/O Points 8 Input or

8 Output Points

16 Input or

16 Output Points

Unit I/O

24 I/O points

32 I/O points

8 input points

16 input points

8 output points ---

---

16 output points ---

---

Inputs Outputs

16 inputs (24 VDC) 8 transistor outputs (sinking)

8 transistor outputs (sourcing)

Model

CPM2C-24EDTM

CPM2C-24EDT1M

16 inputs (24 VDC) 16 transistor outputs (sinking) CPM2C-32EDTM

16 transistor outputs (sourcing) CPM2C-32EDT1M

8 inputs (24 VDC) ---

16 inputs (24 VDC) ---

CPM2C-8EDM

CPM2C-16EDM

8 transistor outputs (sinking)

8 transistor outputs (sourcing)

16 transistor outputs (sinking)

16 transistor outputs (sourcing)

CPM2C-8ETM

CPM2C-8ET1M

CPM2C-16ETM

CPM2C-16ET1M

System Configurations

Expansion Units

Section 1-2

CPM2C-MAD11

Analog I/O Unit

CPM2C-TS001/101

Temperature Sensor Unit

CPM2C-SRT21

CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit

Analog I/O Unit

Temperature Sensor Unit

CompoBus/S I/O

Link Unit

Unit

2 analog inputs

1 analog output

2 thermocouple inputs

2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs

8 input points and 8 output points for the built-in outputs and inputs of the

Master Unit

Max. number of Units

Inputs

2 points, 2 words allocated

4 2 points, 2 words allocated

2 points, 2 words allocated

8 points, 1 word allocated

(Inputs from the

Master)

1 point, 1 word allocated

---

CPM2C-MAD11

CPM2C-TS001

---

Outputs

8 points, 1 word allocated

(Outputs to the

Master)

Model

CPM2C-TS101

CPM2C-SRT21

System Configurations Section 1-2

1-2-4 DeviceNet Interface

A CPM2C-S100C-DRT or CPM2C-S110C-DRT can be used as a DeviceNet

Slaves to create an I/O Link of up to 1,024 points (512 inputs and 512 outputs) with the DeviceNet Master. The input and output areas used in the I/O Link can be allocated independently and the data areas, starting addresses, and size of these Read/Write areas can be specified freely. (The Read/Write areas can be set in the PC Setup or using the DeviceNet Configurator.)

Explicit message communications can be initiated from the Master to read or write data in any data area in the CPM2C-S.

CS1, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z),

CVM1, or CV-series PC

DeviceNet Unit (Master)

DeviceNet Slave

DeviceNet transmission line

As a DeviceNet Slave, the

CPM2C-S supports remote I/O communications with up to 32 input words and 32 output words as well as explicit message communications.

Expansion (I/O) Units (3 max.)

DeviceNet Slave

CompoBus/S transmission line

CompoBus/S Slaves

Note Refer to the DeviceNet Masters Operation Manual (W379) for more details on

OMRON DeviceNet Masters.

System Configurations

1-2-5 Adapter Units

Peripheral/RS-232C Adapter Unit

Section 1-2

RS-422/RS-232C Adapter Unit

Unit

Peripheral/RS-232C Adapter Unit

RS-422/RS-232C Adapter Unit

Note

Conversion

CPU Unit’s communications port →

Peripheral port + RS-232C port

CPU Unit’s communications port →

RS422 port + RS-232C port

Model

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

CPM2C-CIF11

The CPM2C-CIF01-V1 cannot be used with any PC model other than a

CPM2C or CPM2C-S.

Although a CPM2C-CN111 can be connected to a CPM2C-CIF01-V1, it is not possible to use the peripheral port and the RS-232C port on the

CPM2C-CN111 simultaneously. If an attempt is made to use both ports simultaneously, it may be impossible to communicate normally and equipment malfunction may result.

CPM2C-S Structure and Operation Section 1-3

1-3 CPM2C-S Structure and Operation

1-3-1 CPM2C-S Structure

The following diagram shows the internal structure of the CPU Unit.

DeviceNet

Master

CompoBus/S

Slaves

I/O memory

External input devices

Program

PC Setup

Settings

External output devices

I/O Memory

Program

PC Setup

Communications

Switches

Communications port

Settings

Communications switches

The program reads and writes data in this memory area during execution.

Part of the I/O memory contains the bits that reflect the status of the PC’s inputs and outputs. Parts of the I/O memory are cleared when the power is turned ON and other parts are retained.

Note Refer to

SECTION 4 Memory Areas for more details on I/O memory.

This is the program written by the user. The CPM2C-S executes the program cyclically. (Refer to

1-3-5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts for details.)

The program can be divided broadly into two parts: the “main program” that is executed cyclically and the “interrupt programs” that are executed only when the corresponding interrupt is generated.

The PC Setup contains various startup and operating parameters. The PC

Setup parameters can be changed from a Programming Device only; they cannot be changed from the program.

Some parameters are accessed only when PC’s power supply is turned ON and others are accessed regularly while the power is ON. It will be necessary to turn the power OFF and then ON again to enable a new setting if the parameter is accessed only when the power is turned ON.

Note Refer to

4-6 PC Setup

for details on the PC Setup.

The Communications Switches determine whether the peripheral port and

RS-232C port connected through the communications port operate with the

CPM2C-S Structure and Operation Section 1-3 standard communications settings or the communications settings in the PC

Setup.

1-3-2 Operating Modes

CPM2C-S CPU Units have 3 operating modes: PROGRAM, MONITOR, and

RUN.

PROGRAM Mode The program cannot be executed in PROGRAM mode. This mode is used to perform the following operations in preparation for program execution.

• Changing initial/operating parameters such as those in the PC Setup

• Writing, transferring, or checking the program

• Checking wiring by force-setting and force-resetting I/O bits

!Caution

The PC continues to refresh I/O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points may operate unexpectedly if the corresponding output bit is turned ON by transferring I/O memory or force-setting output bits from a Programming Device.

When output bits are allocated to the DeviceNet I/O Link Write Area, data written to the output bits through DeviceNet is effective immediately and the output bits may go ON even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode. Do not change the status of output bits from a Programming Device or DeviceNet unless it is safe to do so.

MONITOR Mode

RUN Mode

The program is executed in MONITOR mode and the following operations can be performed from a Programming Device. In general, MONITOR mode is used to debug the program, test operation, and make adjustments.

• Online editing

• Monitoring I/O memory during operation

• Force-setting/force-resetting I/O bits, changing set values, and changing present values during operation

The program is executed at normal speed in RUN mode. Operations such as online editing, force-setting/force-resetting I/O bits, and changing set values/ present values cannot be performed in RUN mode, but the status of I/O bits can be monitored.

1-3-3 Operating Mode at Startup

The operating mode of the CPM2C-S when the power is turned ON depends upon the setting of pin 4 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPM2C-S, the

PC Setup settings in DM 6600, and the Programming Console’s mode switch setting if a Programming Console is connected.

PC Setup setting Operating mode

Word Bits Setting

DM 6600 08 to 15 00 (Hex) See note 1.

01 (Hex) Startup mode is the same as the operating mode before power was interrupted.

02 (Hex) Startup mode is determined by bits 00 to 07.

00 to 07 00 (Hex) PROGRAM mode

01 (Hex) MONITOR mode

02 (Hex) RUN mode

CPM2C-S Structure and Operation Section 1-3

Note 1.

The operating mode at startup depends upon the setting of DIP switch pin

4 and the Programming Device connected to the communications port (peripheral port).

Programming Device

None

Programming Console

Other device

Pin 4 OFF Pin 4 ON

PROGRAM mode RUN mode

Operating mode set on the Programming Console’s mode switch

PROGRAM mode

The default setting for bits 08 to 15 of DM 6600 is 00. If this default setting is used and pin 4 is OFF, the CPM2C-S will automatically start operating in RUN mode when the power is turned ON.

If pin 4 is OFF and only an RS-232C cable is connected to the communications port (i.e., there is no peripheral port connection), the CPM2C-S will automatically start operating in RUN mode when the power is turned ON.

Example Cable Connections:

CS1W-CN118 and XW2Z-200S/500S

CS1W-CN118 and XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V

CPM2C-CN111 and XW2Z-200S/500S (no peripheral port connection)

CPM2C-CN111 and XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V (no peripheral port connection)

1-3-4 PC Operation at Startup

Time Required for

Initialization

Power OFF Operation

The time required for startup initialization depends on several factors, such as the operating conditions (including power supply voltage, system configuration, and ambient temperature) and the program contents.

Minimum Power Supply Voltage

The PC will stop and all outputs will be turned OFF if the power supply voltage falls below 85% of the rated value.

Momentary Power Interruption

A power interruption will not be detected and CPU Unit operation will continue if the power interruption lasts less than 2 ms.

A power interruption may or may not be detected for power interruptions somewhat longer than 2 ms.

When a power interruption is detected, the CPU Unit will stop operating and all outputs will be turned OFF.

Automatic Reset

Operation will restart automatically when the power supply voltage is restored to more than 85% of the rated voltage.

Timing Chart of Power OFF Operation

The power interruption detection time is the time required for a power interruption to be detected after the power supply voltage drops below 85% of the rated value.

1,2,3...

Minimum power interruption detection time

Power interruptions that are shorter than 2 ms will not be detected.

CPM2C-S Structure and Operation Section 1-3

Undetermined additional time

Power interruptions only slightly longer than the minimum power interruption time may not be detected.

85% of rated voltage po

Detection of we r interruption

1. Minimum time 2. Additional time

Program execution Executing Stopped

CPU reset signal

CPU Unit operation will continue if voltage is restored in this region.

CPU Unit operation may continue if voltage is restored in this region.

Note If the power supply voltage fluctuates around 85% of the PC’s rated voltage,

PC operation may stop and restart repeatedly. When repeated stopping and starting will cause problems with the controlled system, set up a protective circuit such as a circuit that shuts OFF the power supply to sensitive equipment until the power supply voltage returns to the rated value.

CPM2C-S Structure and Operation Section 1-3

1-3-5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts

Basic CPU Operation Initialization processing is performed when the power is turned ON. If there are no initialization errors, the overseeing processes, program execution, I/O refreshing, and communications port servicing are performed repeatedly

(cyclically).

Startup initialization

Overseeing processes

CompoBus/S input refreshing

•

Check hardware.

•

Check memory.

•

Read data from flash memory (program, read-only DM data, and PC Setup settings).

• Check for battery error.

•

Preset the watch (maximum) cycle time.

•

Check program memory.

•

Refresh bits for expansion functions.

•

Read input data from CompoBus/S remote I/O Slaves.

Program execution

Cycle time calculation

CompoBus/S output refreshing

•

Execute the program.

(Refer to the Programming Manual (W353) for details on cycle time and I/O response times.)

• Wait for minimum cycle time if a minimum cycle time has been set in the PC Setup

(DM 6619).

•

Calculate cycle time.

•

Write output data to CompoBus/S remote I/O Slaves.

I/O refreshing

DeviceNet

I/O refreshing

DeviceNet message communications

RS-232C port servicing

Peripheral port servicing

•

Read input data from input bits.

•

Write output data to output bits.

•

Exchange I/O data with the DeviceNet Master.

(-DRT versions only)

•

Perform explicit message communications with the DeviceNet Master.

(-DRT versions only)

• Perform RS-232C port communications processing. (Can be changed in DM 6616.)

•

Perform peripheral port communications processing. (Can be changed in DM 6617.)

The cycle time can be read from a Programming Device.

AR 14 contains the maximum cycle time and AR 15 contains the present cycle time in multiples of 0.1 ms.

CPM2C-S Structure and Operation Section 1-3

Program Execution in

Cyclic Operation

The cycle time will vary slightly depending on the processing being performed in each cycle, so the calculated cycle time will not always match the actual cycle time.

The following diagram shows the cyclic operation of the CPM2C-S when the program is being executed normally.

Normally, the results of program execution are transferred to I/O memory just after program execution (during I/O refreshing), but IORF(97) can be used to refresh a specified range of I/O words during program execution. The specified range of I/O words will be refreshed when IORF(97) is executed.

The cycle time is the sum of the time required for program execution, I/O refreshing, and communications port servicing.

A minimum cycle time (1 to 9,999 ms) can be set in the PC Setup (DM 6619).

When a minimum cycle time has been set, CPU operation is paused after program execution until the minimum cycle time is reached. CPU operation will not be paused if the actual cycle time is longer than the minimum cycle time set in DM 6619.

Note A fatal error will occur and PC operation will stop if a maximum cycle time has been set in the PC Setup (DM 6618) and the actual cycle time exceeds that setting.

The default settings for RS-232C and peripheral port servicing are 5% each of the cycle time, but these settings can be changed (between 0% and 99%) in the PC Setup. The RS-232C port’s setting is in DM 6616 and the peripheral port’s setting is in DM 6617.

Refer to

SECTION 7 Cycle Time and I/O Response Time

for more details and precautions on the cycle time.

Overseeing processes

Main program

Cycle time

I/O refreshing

RS-232C port servicing

Peripheral port servicing

If a minimum cycle time has been set in DM 6619, CPU operation is paused until the minimum cycle time is reached.

The servicing time can be set in DM 6616.

The servicing time can be set in DM 6617.

CPM2C-S Structure and Operation

Interrupt Program

Execution

Section 1-3

When an interrupt is generated during execution of the main program, main program execution is interrupted immediately and the interrupt program is executed. The following diagram shows the cyclic operation of the CPM2C-S when an interrupt program is executed.

Normally, the results of interrupt program execution are transferred to I/O memory just after program execution (during I/O refreshing), but IORF(97) can be used to refresh a specified range of I/O words during execution of the interrupt program. The specified range of I/O words will be refreshed when

IORF(97) is executed.

The normal cycle time is extended by the time required for execution of the interrupt program.

Refer to

SECTION 7 Cycle Time and I/O Response Time

for more details and precautions on the cycle time.

Overseeing processes

Main program

Interrupt generated.

Interrupt program

Cycle time

I/O refreshing

RS-232C port servicing

Peripheral port servicing

!Caution

Although IORF(97) can be used in interrupt subroutines, you must be careful of the interval between IORF(97) executions. If IORF(97) is executed too frequently, a fatal system error may occur (FALS 9F), stopping operation. The interval between executions of IORF(97) should be at least 1.3 ms + total execution time of the interrupt subroutine.

CPM2C-S Structure and Operation

Immediate Refreshing

Section 1-3

IORF(97) can be executed in the program to refresh a specified range of I/O words. The specified I/O words will be refreshed when IORF(97) is executed.

IORF(97) can be used to refresh I/O from the main program or the interrupt program.

When IORF(97) is used, the cycle time is extended by the time required to refresh the specified I/O words.

Overseeing processes

Main program

Cycle time

IORF(97) executed.

Immediate refreshing

I/O refreshing

RS-232C port servicing

Peripheral port servicing

Functions Listed by Usage Section 1-4

1-4 Functions Listed by Usage

Machine Control Functions

Usage

Reduce wiring, save space, and minimize PC load by controlling equipment with a few low-capacity PCs dispersed near each piece of equipment rather than a single centralized PC.

Use remote I/O to save resources and space.

Function

Distributed control using DeviceNet

Refer to

Page

117

Receive high-speed count inputs

(For example, calculating length or position with an encoder).

Max. count frequency of 2 kHz (single-phase)

Max. count frequency of 5 kHz (differential phase) or 20 kHz (single-phase)

Generate a pulse output based on a multiple of an input pulse to synchronize control of a peripheral process with the main process.

The multiple for the peripheral process (such as tool feed rate) can be changed during operation by calculating the multiple from another input value (such as an encoder) in the peripheral process.

This method can be used to change the process for different products or models without stopping the equipment.

Reliably receive input pulses with an ON-time shorter than the cycle time (such as inputs from a photomicrosensor).

Interrupt functions Execute a special process very quickly when an input goes ON.

(For example, operating a cutter when an interrupt input is received from a Proximity Switch or

Photoelectric Switch.)

Count input ON pulses and execute a special process very quickly when the count reaches the preset value.

(For example, stopping the supply feed when a preset number of workpieces have passed through the system.)

Execute a special process at a preset count value.

(For example, cutting material very precisely at a given length.)

Execute a special process when the count is within a preset range.

(For example, sorting material very quickly when it is within a given length range.)

Execute a special process when a timer times out.

(For example, stopping a conveyor at very precise time (independent of the cycle time) after the workpiece is detected.)

Repeat a special process at regular intervals.

(For example, the speed of a sheet feeder can be monitored by measuring the input signal from an encoder at regular intervals and calculating the speed.)

Perform simple positioning by outputting pulses to a motor driver that accepts pulse-train inputs.

Receive an analog input and output an analog output.

Receive temperature sensor input directly at the PC.

Use CompoBus/S Remote Terminals.

Use interrupt input (counter mode) to read the present value without interrupts.

Use high-speed counter to read the present value without interrupts.

Pulse synchronization

Quick-response input function

Interrupt input (interrupt input mode)

Interrupt input (counter mode)

High-speed counter interrupt generated when the count matches the set value.

High-speed counter interrupt generated when the count is within the set range.

Interval timer interrupt

(One-shot mode)

Interval timer interrupt

(Scheduled interrupt mode)

Pulse output function

Analog I/O Unit

(Connect the Analog I/O Unit to the CPU

Unit.)

Temperature Sensor Unit

(Connect the Temperature Sensor Unit to the CPU Unit.)

Page

111

W353

Functions Listed by Usage Section 1-4

Basic Functions

Usage Function

Set the cycle time to a fixed interval.

Stop PC operation when the cycle time exceeds a maximum setting.

Keep all outputs ON when PC operation stops.

Set a minimum (fixed) cycle time in the PC Setup.

Set a maximum (watch) cycle time in the PC Setup.

Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit (SR 25212).

Retain the contents of I/O memory when starting operation.

Retain the contents of I/O memory when the PC is turned ON.

Eliminate effects from chattering and external noise.

Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit (SR 25212) and set the PC

Setup (DM 6601) so that the status of the IOM Hold Bit is maintained at startup.

Set a longer input time constant in the PC Setup.

Refer to

Maintenance Functions

Usage

Record data with time-stamp.

Establish user-defined errors for desired input conditions. (Fatal and non-fatal errors can be defined.)

Read the number of power interruptions.

Set the startup operating mode.

Clock/calendar function

Function

FAL(06) defines non-fatal errors. (PC operation continues.)

FALS(07) defines fatal errors. (PC operation stops.)

The number of power interruptions is stored in AR 23.

Set the startup operating mode in the PC Setup

(DM 6600).

Refer to

Page

W353

Page

100

Communications Functions

Usage Function

Read/write I/O memory data and change the operating mode from a host computer.

Connect to a serial device such as a bar code reader or serial printer.

Make a high-speed connection with an OMRON Programmable Terminal.

Make a PC-PC data link connection with another

CPM2C, or a CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, SRM1, CQM1,

C200HS, or C200HX/HG/HE PC.

Connect a Programming Console.

Connect a personal computer running SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) or SYSMAC-CPT Support Software.

Monitor equipment with a Programmable Terminal and program the PC with a Programming Device.

Host Link communications (Set the communications mode to Host Link in the PC Setup.)

No-protocol communications (Set the communications mode to no-protocol in the PC Setup.)

1:1 NT Link (Set the communications mode to 1:1 NT

Link in the PC Setup.)

1:1 PC Link (Set the communications mode to 1:1 PC

Link in the PC Setup.)

Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port via the communications port. (Turn OFF Communications Switch 2.)

The computer can be connected to the peripheral port or RS-232C port via the communications port.

The RS-232C port and peripheral port can be used simultaneously via the communications port.

Refer to

W353

W353

Comparison with the CPM2C Section 1-5

1-5 Comparison with the CPM2C

Item

Instruction set Basic instructions

Special instructions

Instruction execution times

Basic instructions

Special instructions

Program capacity

Maximum number of I/O points

Stand-alone CPU Unit

CPU Unit with Expansion I/O

Units

CPM2C-S

105 instructions, 185 variations

LD: 0.64 µ s

MOV(21): 7.8 µ s

4,096 words

10 points

362 points max.

CPM2C

105 instructions, 185 variations

LD: 0.64 µ s

MOV(21): 7.8 µ s

4,096 words

10, 20, or 32 points

170, 180, or 192 points max.

Expansion Units and Expansion

I/O Units

I/O memory

Maximum number of Units

Available models

A maximum of 3 Units.

Expansion I/O Units, Analog I/O

Unit, Temperature Sensor Unit, and

CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit

IR 00000 to IR 00915

IR 01000 to IR 01915

A maximum of 5 Units can be connected to any of the CPU Units.

Expansion I/O Units, Analog I/O

Unit, Temperature Sensor Unit, and

CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit

IR 00000 to IR 00915

IR 01000 to IR 01915

Input bits

Output bits

Work bits

SR (Special Relay) area

672 bits:

IR 02800 to IR 02915,

IR 03800 to IR 04915,

IR 20000 to IR 22715

448 bits:

SR 22800 to SR 25515

TR (Temporary Relay) area 8 bits: TR0 to TR7

HR (Holding Relay) area 320 bits:

HR 0000 to HR 1915

AR (Auxiliary Relay) area

LR (Link Relay) area

Timer/Counter area

DM (Data

Memory) area

Read/write area

Read-only area

PC Setup

Memory backup Program area, read-only DM area (including PC Setup)

Read/write DM area, HR area, AR area, and counters

384 bits:

AR 0000 to AR 2315

256 bits:

LR 0000 to LR 1515

256 bits:

TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 255

2,048 words

(DM 0000 to DM 2047)

456 words

(DM 6144 to DM 6599)

56 words

(DM 6600 to DM 6655)

Flash memory backup

928 bits:

IR 02000 to IR 04915,

IR 20000 to IR 22715

448 bits:

SR 22800 to SR 25515

8 bits: TR0 to TR7

320 bits:

HR 0000 to HR 1915

384 bits:

AR 0000 to AR 2315

256 bits:

LR 0000 to LR 1515

256 bits:

TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 255

2,048 words

(DM 0000 to DM 2047)

456 words

(DM 6144 to DM 6599)

56 words

(DM 6600 to DM 6655)

Flash memory backup

CompoBus/S Master Functions

DeviceNet Slave Functions

Internal battery backup (2-year lifetime at 25 ° C, replaceable)

Up to 32 Slaves can be connected and up to 256 I/O points can be controlled.

DeviceNet Remote I/O Link

Use up to 1,024 I/O points in the

I/O Link.

Explicit Message Communications

Any PC data area can be accessed from the Master.

CPU Unit with clock:

Internal battery backup (2-year lifetime at 25 ° C, replaceable)

CPU Unit without clock: Capacitor backup (10-day backup at 25 ° C) or optional battery backup (2 years at 25 ° C, replaceable)

---

Comparison with the CPM2C Section 1-5

Interrupt inputs

(counter mode)

Interval timer

Item

Interrupt inputs (interrupt input mode)

Counter mode

Counter upper limit

SR 244 to SR 247

Method(s) to read counter

Method to change counter

One-shot mode

Scheduled interrupt mode

CPM2C-S

Incrementing counter

Decrementing counter

2 kHz

Contains counter PV.

Read SR 244 to SR 247.

Execute PRV(62).

Execute INI(61).

Yes

CPM2C

4 (20-point CPU Unit),

2 (10-point CPU Unit)

Incrementing counter

Decrementing counter

2 kHz

Contains counter PV.

Read SR 244 to SR 247.

Execute PRV(62).

Execute INI(61).

Yes

Quick-response inputs

High-speed counter

Item

Setting the quick-response function

INT(89) (Mask)

INT(89) (Read mask)

INT(89) (Clear)

Minimum pulse width

Count mode

Max. counter frequency

Counter PV range

PC Setup

CPM2C-S

Check when registering target value match table

Method used to reference the target value match interrupt table

Reading range-comparison results

Reading status

Pulse synchronization

Same direction, same SV not possible

Comparison of all values in the table, regardless of order of appearance in table

Check AR 1100 to AR 1107 or execute PRV(62).

Check AR 1108 (comparison in progress), check AR 1109

(high-speed counter PV overflow/ underflow), or execute PRV(62).

Supported.

PC Setup

CPM2C/CPM2A

Not supported (ignored)

Reads mask status.

Not supported (ignored)

µ s min.

Differential-phase (up/down) mode

Pulse plus direction mode

Up/down pulse mode

Increment mode

5 kHz in differential-phase

(up/down) mode

20 kHz in pulse plus direction mode, up/down pulse mode, and increment mode

–8,388,608 to 8,388,607 in differential-phase (up/down) mode, pulse plus direction mode, and up/down pulse mode

0 to 16,777,215 in increment mode

Not supported (ignored)

Reads mask status.

Not supported (ignored)

µ s min.

Differential-phase (up/down) mode

Pulse plus direction mode

Up/down pulse mode

Increment mode

5 kHz in differential-phase

(up/down) mode

20 kHz in pulse plus direction mode, up/down pulse mode, and increment mode

–8,388,608 to 8,388,607 in differential-phase (up/down) mode, pulse plus direction mode, and up/down pulse mode

0 to 16,777,215 in increment mode

Same direction, same SV not possible

Comparison of all values in the table, regardless of order of appearance in table

Check AR 1100 to AR 1107 or execute PRV(62).

Check AR 1108 (comparison in progress), check AR 1109

(high-speed counter PV overflow/ underflow), or execute PRV(62).

Supported.

Comparison with the CPM2C Section 1-5

Pulse output control

Item

Trapezoidal acceleration/ deceleration

PWM(––) output

Number of simultaneous pulse outputs

Maximum frequency

Minimum frequency

Pulse output quantity

Direction control

Positioning to absolute positions

Bit status while pulses are being output

Reading PV

Resetting PV

Status outputs

CPM2C-S

Supported with ACC(––). The initial frequency can be set.

Supported.

2 max.

10 kHz max.

10 Hz

–16,777,215 to 16,777,215

Supported.

No effect

Read SR 228 through SR 231 or execute PRV(62).

Supported.

Accelerating/decelerating

PV overflow/underflow

Pulse quantity set

Pulse output completed

Pulse output status

CPM2C/CPM2A

Supported with ACC(––). The initial frequency can be set.

Supported.

2 max.

10 kHz max.

10 Hz

–16,777,215 to 16,777,215

Supported.

No effect

Read SR 228 through SR 231 or execute PRV(62).

Supported.

Accelerating/decelerating

PV overflow/underflow

Pulse quantity set

Pulse output completed

Pulse output status

Item

Analog controls

Clock function

Words containing time info.

Analog I/O

Temperature monitoring

CPM2C-S

None

Internal

AR 17 to AR 21

CompoBus/S communications

Communications switch

None

Internal or none

AR 17 to AR 21

CPM2C

Analog I/O Units can be connected.

The CPU Unit can receive temperature sensor input from either thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers.

A CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit can be connected to provide CompoBus/S

Slave functions.

CompoBus/S Master functions are standard in all CPU Units.

This switch determines whether communications are governed by the standard settings or PC Setup settings. Also sets the Programming

Device connection.

Analog I/O Units can be connected.

The CPU Unit can receive temperature sensor input from either thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers.

A CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit can be connected to provide CompoBus/S

Slave functions.

This switch determines whether communications are governed by the standard settings or PC Setup settings. Also sets the Programming

Device connection.

Comparison with the CPM2C Section 1-5

Battery

Item

Battery

CPM2C-S

Internal lithium battery backup CPU Unit with clock:

Internal lithium battery backup

CPU Unit without clock: Capacitor backup or optional lithium battery backup

Possible

CPM2C

Battery replacement

Life expectancy/ backup time

Possible

2-year lifetime at 25 ° C

Communications

(in CPU Unit)

Input time constant

Battery error detection

Peripheral port (via communications port)

RS-232C port (via communications port)

Supported.

Programming Console

(Set with Communications Switch.)

Peripheral bus

(Set with Communications Switch.)

Host Link (with Slave-initiated communications)

No-protocol

Peripheral bus (Set with

Communications Switch.)

Host Link

No-protocol

1:1 PC LInk

1:1 NT Link

Can be set to 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 40, or

80 ms. (Default: 10 ms)

CPU Unit with clock: 2-year lifetime at

25 ° C

CPU Unit without clock (capacitor): 10day backup at 25 ° C

CPU Unit without clock (lithium battery): 5-year lifetime at 25 ° C

Supported.

Programming Console

(Set with Communications Switch.)

Peripheral bus

(Set with Communications Switch.)

Host Link (with Slave-initiated communications)

No-protocol

Peripheral bus (Set with

Communications Switch.)

Host Link

No-protocol

1:1 PC LInk

1:1 NT Link

Can be set to 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 40, or

80 ms. (Default: 10 ms)

Differences in I/O Memory

IR Area Differences

Function

CompoBus/S input bits

CompoBus/S output bits

Work bits

CPM2C-S

IR 020 to IR 027

IR 030 to IR 037

672 bits:

IR 028 to IR 029

IR 038 to IR 049

IR 200 to IR 227

---

CPM2C

928 bits:

IR 028 to IR 049

IR 200 to IR 227

AR Area Differences

Function

DeviceNet Status AR 00

CPM2C-S

CompoBus/S Active Slave Flags and Communications Error Flags

AR 04 to AR 07

CompoBus/S Master ASIC Error AR 1315

---

CPM2C

Preparation for Operation Section 1-6

PC Setup Differences

Function

Maximum number of CompoBus/S nodes

CompoBus/S communications mode

DeviceNet Read/Write area

(Default or DM 6606 to DM 6609)

DeviceNet I/O Link Write Area data area

CPM2C-S

DM 6603 bits 00 to 03 ---

DM 6603 bits 04 to 07

DM 6605 bits 00 to 03

DM 6606 bits 00 to 07

DeviceNet I/O Link Write Area number of bytes

DeviceNet I/O Link Write Area starting address

DeviceNet I/O Link Read Area data area

DeviceNet I/O Link Read Area number of bytes

DeviceNet I/O Link Read Area starting address

DM 6606 bits 08 to 15

DM 6607 bits 00 to 15

DM 6608 bits 00 to 07

DM 6608 bits 08 to 15

DM 6609 bits 00 to 15

CPM2C

1-6 Preparation for Operation

Follow the steps listed below when setting up a CPM2C-S system.

1,2,3...

System Design

• Select a CPM2C-S CPU Unit, Expansion Units, and Expansion I/O

Units with the specifications required in the controlled system.

• Design external fail-safe circuits such as interlock circuits and limit circuits.

Refer to

2-1 Specifications and

3-1 Design Precautions

for details.

Installation

• Connect the Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units.

• Install the CPU Unit. (DIN-track installation)

Refer to

3-3 Installing the CPM2C-S

and

3-4 Wiring and Connections

for details.

Wiring

• Wire the power supply and I/O devices.

• Wire the DeviceNet transmission line.

• Wire the CompoBus/S transmission line.

• Connect communications devices if necessary.

• Connect the Programming Console.

Refer to

3-4 Wiring and Connections, 8-1 Using a Programming Console,

for details.

Initial Settings

• Set the DeviceNet node number and communications speed with the rotary and DIP switches on the front of the CPU Unit.

• Set the Communications Switches on the front of the CPU Unit, if necessary. (The switches must be set when a device other than the Programming Console is connected or the standard communications settings are not used.)

Preparation for Operation Section 1-6

• Connect the Programming Console, set the mode switch to PRO-

GRAM mode, and turn ON the PC.

• Check the CPU Unit’s LED indicators and the Programming Console’s display.

• Clear the PC’s memory. (All Clear)

• Make PC Setup settings.

Refer to

3-3 Installing the CPM2C-S

and

8-1-4 Preparation for Operation

for details.

Create Ladder Program

• Create a ladder program to control the system.

Refer to

SECTION 8 Using Programming Devices and the

Programming

Manual for details.

Write Ladder Program in PC

• Write the ladder program in the PC with the Programming Console or transfer the program to the PC from the Support Software.

Refer to

SECTION 8 Using Programming Devices

Test Run

• Check I/O wiring in PROGRAM mode.

• Check and debug program execution in MONITOR mode.

Refer to

SECTION 9 Test Runs and Error Processing

for details.

SECTION 2 Unit Components and Specifications

This section provides the technical specifications of the CPM2C-S CPU Unit, Adapter Units, and AC Power Supply

Unit and describes the main components of these Units.

Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual (W356) for descriptions of the specifications and installation of Expansion I/O Units and refer to the CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programmable

Controllers Programming Manual (W353) for descriptions of the specifications and installation of Expansion Units.

2-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-2 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-3 I/O Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-4 AC Power Supply Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2 Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-1 CPU Unit Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-2 Expansion I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-3 AC Power Supply Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-4 CPM2C-CIF01-V1 Peripheral/RS-232C Adapter Unit . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-5 CPM2C-CIF11 RS-422/RS-232C Adapter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications Section 2-1

2-1 Specifications

2-1-1 General Specifications

Item

Internal power supply voltage

Communications power supply voltage

Power consumption

Internal power supply

4 W max. (See note.)

Specifications

CPM2C-S100C-DRT

CPM2C-S110C-DRT

20.4 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC − 15% to 10%)

11 to 25 VDC (supplied by communications connector)

---

CPM2C-S100C

CPM2C-S110C

3 W max. (See note.)

Inrush current

Insulation resistance

Dielectric strength

Communications power supply

Noise immunity

Vibration resistance

30 mA max.

---

25 A max.

20 M Ω min. (at 500 VDC) between insulated circuits

2,300 VAC for 1 min (between insulated circuits)

Shock resistance

Ambient temperature

Humidity

Atmosphere

Power interrupt time

Conforms to IEC61000-4-4; 2 kV (power lines)

10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm double amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s tor 10 = total time 80 minutes)

in X,

Y, and Z directions for 80 minutes each (Time coefficient; 8 minutes × coefficient fac-

147 m/s

three times each in X, Y, and Z directions

Operating: 0 to 55

Storage: –20 to 75 ° C (except for the battery)

10% to 90% (with no condensation)

Must be free from corrosive gas

2 ms min.

Note The above figure for power consumption includes the power consumption of the Programming Console and Adapter Unit (CIF @@ ).

2-1-2 Characteristics

Item

Control method

I/O control method

Programming language

Instruction length

Specifications

Stored program method

Cyclic scan with direct output (Immediate refreshing can be performed with IORF(97).)

Ladder diagram

1 step per instruction, 1 to 5 words per instruction

Instructions

Execution time

Program capacity

Maximum I/O capacity

Basic instructions: 14

Special instructions: 105 instructions, 185 variations

Basic instructions: 0.64 µ s (LD instruction)

Special instructions: 7.8 µ s (MOV instruction)

4,096 words

362 points

CPU Unit only: 10 points

Expanded system: + 96 points (three 32-point Expansion I/O Units)

CompoBus/S: + 256 points

160 bits: IR 00000 to IR 00915 (Bits not used for input bits can be used for work bits.)

160 bits: IR 01000 to IR 01915 (Bits not used for output bits can be used for work bits.)

Input bits

Output bits

CompoBus/S input bits 128 bits: IR 02000 to IR 02715 (Bits not used for CompoBus/S input bits can be used for work bits.)

CompoBus/S output bits 128 bits: IR 03000 to IR 03715 (Bits not used for CompoBus/S output bits can be used for work bits.)

Work bits 672 bits: IR 02800 to IR 02915, IR 03800 to IR 04915, and IR 20000 to IR 22715

Specifications Section 2-1

Item

Special bits (SR area) 448 bits: SR 22800 to SR 25515

Temporary bits (TR area) 8 bits (TR0 to TR7)

Holding bits (HR area)

Specifications

320 bits: HR 0000 to HR 1915 (Words HR 00 to HR 19)

Auxiliary bits (AR area)

Link bits (LR area)

Timers/Counters

384 bits: AR 0000 to AR 2315 (Words AR 00 to AR 23)

256 bits: LR 0000 to LR 1515 (Words LR 00 to LR 15)

256 timers/counters (TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 255)

1-ms timers: TMHH(––)

10-ms timers: TIMH(15)

100-ms timers: TIM

1-s/10-s timers: TIML(––)

Decrementing counters: CNT

Reversible counters: CNTR(12)

CompoBus/S Master functions

Up to 32 Slaves can be connected and up to 256 I/O points can be controlled.

DeviceNet Slave functions DeviceNet Remote I/O Link

Use up to 1,024 I/O points in the I/O Link.

Explicit Message Communications

Any PC data area can be accessed from the Master.

Data memory

Interrupt processing

Interval timer interrupts

High-speed counter

Interrupt Inputs

(Counter mode)

Pulse output

Synchronized pulse control

Read/Write: 2,048 words (DM 0000 to DM 2047)*

Read-only: 456 words (DM 6144 to DM 6599)

PC Setup: 56 words (DM 6600 to DM 6655)

*The Error Log is contained in DM 2000 to DM 2021.

2 interrupts

Shared by the external interrupt inputs (counter mode) and the quick-response inputs.

1 (Scheduled Interrupt Mode or Single Interrupt Mode)

One high-speed counter: 20 kHz single-phase or 5 kHz two-phase (linear count method)

Counter interrupt: 1 (set value comparison or set-value range comparison)

2 inputs

Shared by the external interrupt inputs and the quick-response inputs.

2 points with no acceleration/deceleration, 10 Hz to 10 kHz each, and no direction control.

One point with trapezoid acceleration/deceleration, 10 Hz to 10 kHz, and direction control.

Two points with variable duty-ratio outputs.

(Pulse outputs can be used with transistor outputs only, they cannot be used with relay outputs.)

1 point:

A pulse output can be created by combining the high-speed counter with pulse outputs and multiplying the frequency of the input pulses from the high-speed counter by a fixed factor.

(This output is possible with transistor outputs only, it cannot be used with relay outputs.)

Quick-response inputs

Input time constant

(ON response time =

OFF response time)

Clock function

2 inputs

Shared by the external interrupt inputs and the interrupt inputs (counter mode).

Min. input pulse width: 50

µ s max.

Can be set for all input points.

(1 ms, 2 ms, 3 ms, 5 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, or 80 ms)

Shows the year, month, day of the week, day, hour, minute, and second. (Battery backup)

Communications functions A Connecting Cable (CPM2C-CN111, CS1W-CN114, or CS1W-CN118) or Adapter Unit

(CPM2C-CIF01 or CPM2C-CIF11) is required to connect to the CPM2C-S’ communications port. The communications port can be used as both a peripheral and RS-232C port.

Peripheral port:

Supports Host Link, peripheral bus, no-protocol, or Programming Console connections.

RS-232C port:

Supports Host Link, no-protocol, 1:1 Slave Unit Link, 1:1 Master Unit Link, or 1:1 NT Link connections.

Memory protection

(See notes 1 and 2.)

HR area, AR area, program contents, read/write DM area contents, and counter values maintained during power interruptions.

Specifications Section 2-1

Item Specifications

Memory backup

(See notes 1 and 2.)

Flash memory:

Program, read-only DM area, and PC Setup

Memory backup:

The read/write DM area, HR area, AR area, and counter values are backed up. (The battery has a 2-year lifetime at 25 ° C and it is replaceable.)

Self-diagnostic functions CPU Unit failure (watchdog timer), I/O bus error, battery error, and memory failure

Program checks No END instruction, programming errors (checked when operation is started)

Note 1.

The DM area, HR area, AR area, and counter values are backed up. If the backup battery or capacitor is discharged, the contents of these areas will be lost and the data values will revert to the defaults.

The contents of the program area, read-only DM area (DM 6144 to

DM 6599), and PC Setup (DM 6600 to DM 6655) are stored in flash memory. The contents of these areas will be read from flash memory the next time the power is turned ON, even if the backup battery or capacitor is discharged.

When data has been changed in any of these areas, write the new values to flash memory by switching the CPM2C-S to MONITOR or RUN mode, or by turning the power OFF and then ON again.

Changes made while in MONITOR mode using, for example, online editing, are written to flash memory in real-time.

Specifications

2-1-3 I/O Specifications

CPU Unit Input Specifications

Item

Input voltage

Input impedance

Input current

Inputs

All 24 VDC

+10%

–15%

IN00000 to IN00001 2.7 k Ω

IN00002 to IN00004 3.9 k Ω

IN00005 4.7 k Ω

IN00000 to IN00001 8 mA typical

IN00002 to IN00004 6 mA typical

IN00005 5 mA typical

Specification

ON voltage/current IN00000 to IN00001 17 VDC min., 5 mA

IN00002 and up 14.4 VDC min., 3.5 mA

OFF voltage/current All

ON delay All

5.0 VDC max., 1.1 mA

1 to 80 ms max. Default: 10 ms (See note.)

OFF delay All

Circuit configuration IN00000 to IN00001

1 to 80 ms max. Default: 10 ms (See note.)

2.7 k Ω

0.01

1 k

Ω

COM

Input LED

IN00002 to IN00004

3.9 k Ω

820

Ω

Section 2-1

COM

Input LED

IN00005

4.7 k

Ω

750 Ω

COM

Input LED

Note The input time constant can be set to 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 40, or 80 ms in the PC

Setup.

Specifications Section 2-1

Input

IN00000

IN00001

IN00002

High-speed Counter Inputs

The following CPU Unit input bits can be used as high-speed counter inputs.

The maximum count frequency is 5 kHz in differential phase mode and

20 kHz in the other modes.

Differential phase mode Pulse plus direction input mode

Function

Up/down input mode

A-phase pulse input

B-phase pulse input

Pulse input

Direction input

Increment pulse input

Decrement pulse input

Increment mode

Increment pulse input

Normal input

Z-phase pulse input or hardware reset input

(IN00002 can be used as a normal input when it is not used as a high-speed counter input.)

The minimum pulse widths for inputs IN00000 (A-phase input) and IN00001

(B-phase input) are as follows:

Pulse plus direction input mode, Up/down input mode, Increment mode

µ s min.

Differential phase mode

100

µ s min.

Phase A

12.5

µ s min.

12.5

µ s min.

Phase B

: 12.5

µ s min.

The minimum pulse width for input IN00002 (Z-phase input) is as follows:

µ s min.

Phase Z

500

µ s min.

Interrupt Inputs

CPM2C-S PCs are equipped with inputs that can be used as interrupt inputs

(interrupt input mode or counter mode) and quick-response inputs. The minimum pulse width for these inputs is 50 µ s.

Inputs IN00003 and IN00004 can be used as interrupt inputs.

Specifications Section 2-1

CPU Unit Output Specifications

Transistor Outputs (Sinking or Sourcing)

Item

Max. switching capacity

(See note)

Min. switching capacity

Max. inrush current

Leakage current

Residual voltage

ON delay

OFF delay

Fuse

Specification

OUT01000 to OUT01005: 40 mA/4.5 VDC to 300 mA/20.4 VDC,

300 mA (20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC)

When using OUT01000 or OUT01001 as a pulse output, connect a dummy resistor as required to bring the load current between 10 and 150 mA. If the load current is below 10 mA, the ON/OFF response time will be longer and high-speed pulses will not be output.

The transistor will heat if used at 150 mA or higher, possibly damaging elements.

0.5 mA

0.9 A for 10 ms (charging and discharging waveform)

0.1 mA max.

0.8 V max.

OUT01000 and OUT01001: 20 µ s max.

OUT01002 and up: 0.1 ms max.

OUT01000 and OUT01001: 40 µ s max. 10 to 300 mA

0.1 ms max. 0.5 to 10 mA

OUT01002 and up: 1 ms max.

1 fuse for each 2outputs (cannot be replaced by user)

Specifications

Item

Circuit configuration

Sinking Outputs

Specification

Output LED

24 VDC

OUT

Load

OUT

Load

1 A

OUT

Load

OUT

Load

COM ( )

1 A

Section 2-1

Sourcing Outputs

1 A

COM (+)

OUT

Load

OUT

Load

1 A

OUT

Load

OUT

Load

0 VDC

Output LED

Specifications

Note The following graph shows the maximum switching capacity.

Output current

(mA)

300

Section 2-1

4.5

20.4

26.4

Output voltage

(V)

!Caution

Do not apply voltage in excess of the maximum switching capacity to an output terminal. It may result in damage to the product or fire.

!Caution

Check that wiring has been performed correctly before supplying power. Supplying power with incorrect wiring may result in damage to internal circuits.

Expansion I/O Unit I/O Specifications

Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual (W356) for the I/O specifications of the Expansion I/O Units.

Specifications Section 2-1

2-1-4 AC Power Supply Unit Specifications

Rating

Efficiency

Input conditions

Item

Rated voltage

24 VDC, 600 mA

75% min. (at rated output)

100 to 240 VAC

Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Allowable voltage range 85 to 264 VAC

Current 100 V 0.4 A

200 V 0.2 A

Specification

Output characteristics

Load fluctuation 4% max.

Temperature fluctuation 0.05%/ ° C max.

Startup time 300 ms max. (at input voltage of 100 VAC or 200 VAC and the rated output)

Output hold time 10 ms (at input voltage of 100 VAC or 200 VAC and the rated output)

Overcurrent protection Self-resetting, operates at 105% to 350% of the rated current, suspended and independent operation

Overvoltage protection

Ambient operating temperature

Ambient storage temperature

Ambient operating humidity

Dielectric strength

Insulation resistance

Vibration resistance

Shock resistance

Leakage current 100 V 0.5 mA max. (at rated output)

Inrush current

200 V 1 mA max. (at rated output)

100 V 15 A (at 25 ° C cold start)

200 V 30 A (at 25 ° C cold start)

Output voltage accuracy 10%/–15% (including input, load, and temperature fluctuations)

Minimum output current 30 mA

Ripple noise voltage 2% (p-p) max.

Input fluctuation 0.75% max.

Noise terminal voltage

None

0 to 55 ° C

–20 to 75 ° C

10% to 90% (no condensation)

2,000 V for 1 min between all inputs and GR

Leakage current: 10 mA

3,000 V for 1 min between all inputs and all outputs

Leakage current: 10 mA

1,000 V for 1 min between all outputs and GR

Leakage current: 10 mA

100 M Ω min. at 500 VDC between all outputs and any input, and between all outputs and GR

10 to 57 Hz, amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s

in X, Y, and Z directions for 80 minutes according

(Time coefficient: 8 minutes × coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 min.)

147 m/s

3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions

FCC class A

Unit Components

2-2 Unit Components

2-2-1 CPU Unit Components

CPU Unit Component Names

Front View: CPM2C-S100C and CPM2C-S110C

9. DIP switch

8. Communications port

5. PC status indicators

3. CompoBus/S terminal block

6. Input indicators

7. Output indicators

2. I/O connector

Right Side View

Section 2-2

Front View: CPM2C-S100C-DRT and CPM2C-S110C-DRT

9. DIP switch

8. Communications port

10. Rotary switches

3. CompoBus/S terminal block

4. DeviceNet communications connector

5. PC status indicators

6. Input indicators

7. Output indicators

2. I/O connector

Top View

11. Battery

Bottom View

13. Expansion I/O connector

(output connector)

12. Low battery detection switch 1. Power supply connector

CPU Unit Component Descriptions

1,2,3...

Power Supply Connector

Connect the power supply (24 VDC) to this connector.

Connect the provided power supply cable’s red lead to +24 VDC and its black lead to 0 VDC.

I/O Connector

Connects the CPU Unit to external input and output devices.

CompoBus/S Terminal Block

Connects the CPU Unit to the CompoBus/S transmission line.

DeviceNet Communications Connector

Unit Components Section 2-2

Connects the CPU Unit to the DeviceNet transmission line. Use the connector included with the CPU Unit or an equivalent connector to connect to the DeviceNet transmission line.

PC Status Indicators

The following indicators show the operating status of the PC.

Indicator

PWR

(green)

RUN

(green)

ERR/ALM

(red)

(yellow)

ERC

(red)

COMM

(yellow)

Status

OFF

Meaning

Power is being supplied to the PC.

Power isn’t being supplied to the PC.

The PC is operating in RUN or MONITOR mode.

The PC is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal error has occurred.

ON A fatal error has occurred. (PC operation stops.)

Flashing A non-fatal error has occurred. (PC operation continues.)

OFF Indicates normal operation.

Flashing Data is being transmitted via CompoBus/S.

OFF Data isn’t being transmitted via CompoBus/S.

Flashing Data is being received via CompoBus/S.

OFF Data isn’t being received via CompoBus/S.

Flashing A CompoBus/S communications error occurred.

OFF A CompoBus/S communications error hasn’t occurred.

Flashing Data is being transferred via the communications port

(peripheral or RS-232C).

OFF Data isn’t being transferred via communications port.

The following indicators show the status DeviceNet communications and appear on the CPM2C-S100C-DRT and CPM2C-S110C-DRT only.

Indicator Color Status

MS Green ON

Normal status

Meaning

Red

Flashing Incomplete settings (reading switch settings)

ON Fatal hardware error (watchdog timer error)

---

Flashing Non-fatal error such as incorrect switch settings

OFF • Power is not being supplied.

• Waiting for initialization to start

• Reset in progress

Green ON Online/Communications established

(Normal network status when communications have been established)

Red

Flashing Online/Communications not established

(Normal network status when communications haven’t been established)

ON Fatal communications error (The Unit detected an error indicating that network communications are disabled.)

•

Node number duplication

• Bus off error detected

Flashing Non-fatal communications error

(Communications timeout)

--OFF Offline/Power supply OFF

Waiting for completion of the node number duplication check in the Master.

• Incorrect switch settings

•

Power supply OFF

Unit Components Section 2-2

Input Indicators

The input indicators are lit when the corresponding input terminal is ON.

The status of an input indicator will reflect the status of the input even when that input is being used for a high-speed counter.

Note a) When interrupt inputs are used in interrupt input mode, the indicator may not light even when the interrupt condition is met if the input is not ON long enough.

b) Input indicators will reflect the status of the corresponding inputs even when the PC is stopped, but the corresponding input bits will not be refreshed.

Output Indicators

The output indicators are lit when the corresponding output terminal is ON.

The indicators are lit during I/O refreshing. The status of an output indicator will also reflect the status of the corresponding output when the output is being used as a pulse output.

Communications Port

Connects the PC to a Programming Device (including Programming Consoles), host computer, or standard external device. Use a proper Connecting Cable (CPM2C-CN111, CS1W-CN114, or CS1W-CN118).

Note a) A CQM1H-PRO01-E Programming Console can be connected directly to the PC.

b) A C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console can be connected directly to the PC with a CS1W-CN224/CN624 Connecting Cable.

c) Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114 Connecting Cable to connect to the communications port as a peripheral port. The communications port can be used simultaneously as both a peripheral port and RS-232C port by using the CPM2C-CN111 Connecting

Cable.

d) Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable to connect to the communications port as a RS-232C port. The communications port can be used simultaneously as both a peripheral port and RS-232C port by using the CPM2C-CN111 Connecting

Cable

DIP Switch

The DIP switch settings determine the DeviceNet communications speed and control the communications settings for the communications port (peripheral port and RS-232C port).

• DeviceNet communications speed

Pin 1 Pin 2 Speed

OFF OFF 125 kbps

ON OFF 250 kbps

OFF ON

ON ON

500 kbps

Not used (invalid setting)

Max. transmission line length (see note)

500 m max.

250 m max.

100 m max.

Note Pins 1 and 2 are not used in the CPM2C-S100C/S110C. Leave pins

1 and 2 OFF in those CPU Units.

Unit Components Section 2-2

• RS-232C and Peripheral Port Settings

Pin 3 Effective port settings

OFF The ports operate according to the settings in the PC Setup.

RS-232C port settings: DM 6645 to DM 6649

Peripheral port settings: DM 6650 to DM 6654

ON The ports operate with the standard communications settings.

• Operating Mode at Startup

Pin 4 determines the operating mode at startup only if there isn’t a Programming Device connected to the peripheral port.

Programming Device connected

None

Programming Console

Other device

Startup mode with pin 4 OFF

PROGRAM mode

Startup mode with pin 4 ON

RUN mode

Operating mode set on the Programming

Console’s mode switch

PROGRAM mode

10. Rotary Switches (-DRT versions only)

The rotary switches set the PC’s node number in the DeviceNet network.

The allowed setting range is 00 to 63. (Settings 64 to 99 are not allowed.)

Disabled

11. Battery

This battery backs up memory in the CPU Unit. The battery is connected when the Unit is shipped.

12. Low Battery Detection Switch

This switch enables or disables the detection of a low-battery error. When a battery is not connected, disable low-battery detection by sliding the switch back (toward the battery).

Switch position Low-battery detection

Forward (away from battery) Error detection enabled

Back (toward battery) Error detection disabled

Enabled

Note CPU Units without a clock are set by default to not detect a low battery. If the

PLC Setup is cleared, the default setting will be changed so that a low battery is detected. If you connect the optional CPM2C-BAT01 Battery, also be sure to change the setting to detect a low battery.

13. Expansion I/O Connector

Connects the PC’s CPU Unit to an Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit.

Up to 3 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a

CPU Unit. A cover for the expansion I/O connector is included with the

CPU Unit.

Unit Components

I/O Connector Pin Allocation

CPM2C-S

CPM2C-S with sinking outputs

I/O pin allocation

CPM2C-S with sourcing outputs

Section 2-2

CompoBus/S Terminal Block Configuration

DeviceNet Communications Connector Configuration

V −

CAN L

Shield

CAN H

V+

XW4B-05C1-H1-D DeviceNet

Communications Connector

(included with the CPM2C-S)

Unit Components Section 2-2

2-2-2 Expansion I/O Units

Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual (W356) for descriptions of the main components of the Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units.

2-2-3 AC Power Supply Unit

Front View Bottom Side

1. Terminal block

2. LED indicator 3. CPU Unit power supply connector

1,2,3...

Terminal Block

Terminals for AC power supply input and service power supply (24 VDC).

LED Indicator

Lights when power is supplied.

CPU Unit Power Supply Connector

Use the connecting cable provided as an accessory to connect this connector to the power supply connector on the CPU Unit (24 VDC).

Note The ratings for the CPM2C-PA201 AC Power Supply Unit are 100 to

240 VAC input; 24 VDC/600 mA output. The maximum current that can be supplied via the CPU Unit power supply connector and the service power supply terminals on the terminal block is 600 mA.

2-2-4 CPM2C-CIF01-V1 Peripheral/RS-232C Adapter Unit

Front View

1. Peripheral port

2. Cable switch (SW1)

3. RS-232C port

Do not use the CPM2C-CIF01-V1 with any PC other than the

CPM2C. Do not connect another CPM2C-CIF01-V1 or the

CPM2C-CIF11 to the CPM2C-CIF01-V1. The CPM2C-CN111 can be connected to the CPM2C-CIF01, but the peripheral port and the RS-232C port of the CPM2C-CN111 cannot be used simultaneously. If an attempt to use these ports simultaneously is made, communications will not be performed properly, and this may result in malfunction of equipment.

*: The CPM2C-CIF01 does not have a cable switch (SW1).

4. Connector

1,2,3...

Peripheral Port

Used to connect to Programming Devices (including Programming Consoles), host computers, or general-purpose external devices. Use a special connecting cable (CS1W-CN114, CS1W-CN118) for connections.

With the CPM2C-CIF01-V1, the cable switch (SW1) can be turned ON to

Unit Components Section 2-2 enable connecting to a personal computer with a CS1W-CN226/CN626

Connecting Cable.

Note a) The C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console can be connected directly to the CPM2C’s CPU Unit using a special connecting cable

(CS1W-CN224/624).

b) Use the CS1W-CN114 when using the port as a peripheral port.

c) Use the CS1W-CN118 when using the port as a RS-232C port.

Cable Switch (SW1, CPM2C-CIF01-V1 Only)

Turn ON SW1 to use a CS1W-CN226/CN626 Connecting Cable to connect to a personal computer. Turn OFF SW1 to use any other cable.

SW1

OFF

RS-232C Port

Used to connect to the RS-232C interface of a personal computer or Programmable Terminal (operator interface).

Connector Pin Allocation

Internal Configuration

CPM2C-CIF01(-V1)

Peripheral port

(CMOS/RS-232C)

RS-232C port

(D-sub connector)

CMOS level

RS-232C conversion

CPM2C-S CPU Unit

Peripheral port

(CMOS level)

RS-232C port

(RS-232C)

Peripheral port on

CPM2C-CIF01-

Signal conversion

Function

RS-232C port on

CPM2C-CIF01-

Signal conversion

Function

Outputs signals from the CPU Unit’s CMOS interface without conversion, or converts CMOS level (CPU Unit side) to RS-232C (connected device side).

Host Link, peripheral bus, no-protocol, or

Programming Console connections.

Outputs signals from the CPU Unit’s CMOS interface without conversion.

Host Link, no-protocol, 1:1 Link, or 1:1 NT Link connections.

Connector

Connects to the communications port on the CPU Unit.

Unit Components

2-2-5 CPM2C-CIF11 RS-422/RS-232C Adapter Unit

Front View Right Side

1. RS-422/485 port

3. Terminating resistance switch

2. RS-232C port

Section 2-2

4. RS-485 interface switch

5. Connector

Note Do not use the CPM2C-CIF11 with any PC other than a CPM2C or CPM2C-S.

1,2,3...

RS-422/485 Port

Used to connect to host computers, or standard external devices.

Terminal Arrangement

RDA −

RDB+

SDA −

SDB+

Receive data (input)

Send data (output)

Note The maximum line length is 500 m.

RS-232C Port

Used to connect to the RS-232C interface of a personal computer or Programmable Terminal (operator interface).

Connector Pin Arrangement

Unit Components

RS-422/485 Connection Example

Section 2-2

Shield

Internal Configuration

RS-422/485 port

(terminal block)

RS-232C port

(D-sub connector)

CPM2C-CIF11

CMOS level →

RS-422 conversion

Connector hood

CPM2C-S CPU Unit

Peripheral port

(CMOS level)

RS-232C port

(RS-232C)

RS-422/485 port on

CPM2C-

CIF11

RS-232C port on

CPM2C-

CIF11

Signal conversion

Function

Signal conversion

Function

Converts CMOS level (CPU Unit side) to

RS-422 (connected device side).

RS-422 (externally connected device) insulated using DC/DC converter or photocoupler.

Host Link, peripheral bus, or no-protocol connections.

Outputs signals from the CPU Unit’s CMOS interface without conversion.

Host Link, no-protocol, 1:1 Link, or 1:1 NT Link connections.

Terminating Resistance Switch

Set this switch to ON only for double-ended connection to a Host Link network. This switch is factory-set to OFF.

SW1

Unit Components Section 2-2

RS-485 Interface Switch

Used to switch to the RS-485 interface, and to enable or disable RS/CS control when performing RS-485 communications.

SW2

SW2

SW2-1

SW2-2

Status

SW2-2 OFF

OFF

SW2-1

4-wire communications

Setting not possible

2-wire communications

SW2

Factory setting

OFF

SW2-3

SW2-4

SW2-4 OFF

OFF

Setting not possible

SW2-3

Data can be received at any time

RS control possible for

CPU Unit

Setting not possible

Note Do not set both SW2-3 and SW2-4 to ON. Doing so may result in damage to internal circuitry. Set SW2-3 to OFF and SW2-4 to OFF when performing RS-

485 2-wire communications.

Connector

Connects to the communications port on the CPU Unit.

RS-422 Interface Block Diagram

SECTION 3 Installation and Wiring

This section provides information on installing and wiring a CPM2C-S PC. Be sure to follow the directions and precautions in this section when installing the CPM2C-S in a panel or cabinet, wiring the power supply, or wiring I/O.

Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual (W356) for information on wiring Expansion I/O

Units and Expansion Units.

3-1 Design Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-1 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-2 Power Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-3 Interlock and Limit Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2 Selecting an Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2-1 Installation Site Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2-2 Panel/Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3 Installing the CPM2C-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3-1 Connecting Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3-2 CPM2C-S Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4 Wiring and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-1 General Precautions for Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-2 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-3 Using the AC Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-4 Removing and Wiring I/O Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-5 Using Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-6 Connecting I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-7 Wiring CompoBus/S Transmission Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-8 Wiring DeviceNet Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-9 Programming Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-10 No-Protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-11 OMRON PT Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-12 One-to-one PC Link Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Design Precautions Section 3-1

3-1 Design Precautions

Observe the following precautions when designing a system incorporating a

CPM2C-S PC.

3-1-1 Power Supply Wiring

Separate the power supply wiring from the control system, CPM2C-S system, and DC I/O system wiring. Separate the control circuits that supply power to the main Unit from the main circuits using dedicated circuit protectors and fuses.

3-1-2 Power Supply Voltage

!Caution

Use the power supply voltages indicated in

SECTION 2 Unit Components and

Specifications

. Failure to adhere to the specifications may result in fire.

If the power supply voltage falls below 85% of the rated voltage, the CPM2C-

S will stop and all outputs will be turned OFF. If low voltage affects the equipment, etc., provide a protection circuit which shuts OFF the output until the supply voltage returns to the rated value.

In places where power supply conditions are poor, take steps to ensure that power is supplied at the rated voltage. Be sure to adhere to safety precautions, such as providing breakers to prevent short circuits in external wiring.

When conducting any of the following operations, turn OFF the power to the

PC. Electrocution, product damage and malfunction may result.

• Connecting or disconnecting Expansion I/O Units, Expansion Units, and

CPU Units.

• Assembling Units.

• Connecting cables and wiring.

• Connecting or disconnecting connectors.

• Replacing the battery.

3-1-3 Interlock and Limit Circuits

!WARNING

Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation. Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents.

The following diagram shows an example of an interlock circuit.

CPM2C-S

01005

Interlock Circuit

MC2

MC1

Motor forward

01006

MC1

MC2

Motor reverse

In the interlock circuit above, MC1 and MC2 can’t be ON at the same time even if CPM2C-S outputs 01005 and 01006 are both ON (an incorrect PC operation).

Selecting an Installation Site Section 3-2

3-2 Selecting an Installation Site

The CPM2C-S is resistant to harsh conditions and highly reliable, but installing the PC in a favorable site will maximize its reliability and operating lifetime.

!Caution

Be sure to install the CPM2C-S correctly, as outlined in this manual. Failure to do so may result in Unit malfunction.

3-2-1 Installation Site Conditions

Note Do not install the CPM2C-S under any of the following conditions.

• Locations subject to direct sunlight.

• Locations subject to a temperature below 0

C or over 55

• Locations subject to a humidity below 10% or over 90%.

• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.

• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.

• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.

• Locations subject to shock or vibration.

• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.

Be sure that the conditions at the installation site conform to the CPM2C-S’ general specifications. Refer to

2-1-1 General Specifications for details.

Note Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations:

• Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise.

• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.

• Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation.

• Locations near to power supply lines.

3-2-2 Panel/Cabinet Installation

Overheating

Consider PC operation, maintenance, and surrounding conditions when installing the CPM2C-S in a panel or cabinet.

The operating temperature range for the CPM2C-S is 0 to 55

C. Be sure that there is adequate ventilation for cooling.

• Allow enough space for air circulation.

• Do not install the CPM2C-S above equipment that generates a large amount of heat, such as heaters, transformers, or large resistors.

• Install a cooling fan or system when the ambient temperature exceeds

Control panel

Fan

Air vent

CPM2C-S

Selecting an Installation Site Section 3-2

• The CPM2C-S CPU Unit itself can be installed in any orientation, but when the CPU Unit is combined with a Power Supply Unit, Expansion I/O

Unit, or Expansion Unit the mounting orientation of the PC is restricted in the way described below.

• When a PC is installed as shown in the following diagram, Power Supply Units, Expansion I/O Units, and Expansion Units can be mounted.

The ambient operating temperature range is 0 to 55

Top

Bottom

• When a PC is installed as shown in the following diagram, Power Supply Units, Expansion I/O Units, and Expansion Units cannot be mounted. The ambient operating temperature range is 0 to 55 ° C.

Top

Electrical Noise

Accessibility

Bottom

• When a PC is installed in any other way, Power Supply Units, Expansion I/O Units, and Expansion Units cannot be mounted and the ambient operating temperature range is 0 to 50 ° C.

Power lines and high-voltage equipment can cause electrical noise in the PC.

• Do not install the CPM2C-S in a panel or cabinet with high-voltage equipment.

• Allow at least 200 mm between the CPM2C-S and nearby power lines.

200 mm min.

CPM2C-S

200 mm min.

Ensure that the CPM2C-S can be accessed for normal operation and maintenance.

• Provide a clear path to the CPM2C-S for operation and maintenance.

High-voltage equipment or power lines could be dangerous if they are in the way during routine operations.

Installing the CPM2C-S Section 3-3

• Separate the CPM2C-S by at least 100 mm from other devices.

Other device

100 mm min.

3-3 Installing the CPM2C-S

This section describes how to install the CPM2C-S and connect Expansion

Units and Expansion I/O Units. Refer to Appendix B for diagrams showing the dimensions of the CPM2C-S CPU Units.

Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual for dimensions of the Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units.

3-3-1 Connecting Units

Up to 3 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a

CPM2C-S CPU Unit. Use the following procedure when connecting an

Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit.

1,2,3...

Remove the cover from the CPU Unit’s or the last Expansion I/O Unit’s or

Expansion Unit’s expansion I/O connector. If the cover is difficult to remove, use a flat-blade screwdriver to pry the cover from the expansion I/O connector.

Expansion I/O connector cover

Installing the CPM2C-S Section 3-3

Align the Unit and CPU Unit (or previous Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion

Unit) so that the catches (top and bottom) on the connectors fit together.

Press the Units together to connect them.

Slide to lock

Units together.

Lock the Units together by closing the locks (top and bottom) on the CPU

Unit (or previous Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit). Place the cover

(included with the CPU Unit) on the last Unit’s expansion I/O connector.

Expansion I/O connector cover

3-3-2 CPM2C-S Installation

The CPM2C-S can be installed on a 35-mm DIN track.

End Plates

(PFP-M)

DIN Track

PFP-100N (1 m)

PFP-50N (50 cm)

PFP-100N2 (1 m)

Installing the CPM2C-S Section 3-3

Installation

Lower the CPM2C-S so that the notch on the back of the PC catches the top of the DIN Track. Push the PC forward until the lock snaps into place.

2) Insert onto track.

3) Push in on the Unit.

1) Pull down.

4) Lock

!Caution

Be sure that the DIN Track is installed horizontally. Installing the Track vertically will inhibit the airflow that cools the CPM2C-S and could cause overheating.

Removal

Pry the lock down with a flat-blade screwdriver and pivot the PC upward to remove it.

Screwdriver

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

3-4 Wiring and Connections

This section provides basic information on wiring the CPU Unit and Power

Supply Unit, and on connecting Programming Devices.

3-4-1 General Precautions for Wiring

!Caution

Leave the protective label in place while wiring. The Unit may malfunction if strands of wire get inside the Unit. After completing wiring be sure to remove the label to avoid overheating.

Protective label

I/O Line Noise Do not run CPM2C-S I/O lines in the same duct or conduit as power lines.

!Caution

If flat cables are connected for more than one CompoBus/S network, interference between the flat cables can cause unstable operation. If you are using more than one network, be sure the flat cables are separated by at least

5 mm.

Hanging Ducts

Leave at least 300 mm between the power cables and the I/O or control wiring, as shown in the following diagram.

CompoBus/S and DeviceNet communications cables

CPM2C-S I/O lines

Control cables and

CPM2C-S power lines

Power cables

300 mm min.

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

Floor Ducts

Leave at least 200 mm between the wiring and the top of the duct, as shown in the following diagram.

CompoBus/S and DeviceNet communications cables

CPM2C-S

I/O lines

Control cables and

CPM2C-S power lines

Power cables

Metal plate (iron)

200 mm min.

Conduits

Separate the CPM2C-S I/O lines, power and control lines, and power cables, as shown in the following diagram.

CompoBus/S and

DeviceNet communications cables

CPM2C-S

I/O lines

Control cables and CPM2C-S power lines

Power cables

3-4-2 Power Supply Wiring

The following procedure explains how to connect the CPU Unit to the AC

Power Supply Unit (CPM2C-PA201) with the power supply connector

(included) to provide a 24-VDC power supply.

Power supply connector

(included with the Unit)

Wiring and Connections

1,2,3...

Section 3-4

Align the power supply connector with the socket on the bottom of the

CPM2C-S and insert the connector.

Red lead: +24 VDC

Black lead: 0 VDC

Note

To remove the power supply connector, grasp the power supply connector

(not the wires), release the lock tab on the connector, and remove the connector.

The CPM2C-PA201 is the recommended Power Supply Unit, but a general-purpose power supply such as a S82J-series or S82K-series Power

Supply can also be used. When using other power supplies, be sure to use a DC power supply with sufficient capacity and low ripple.

Do not perform a voltage withstand test on the DC power supply terminals on the CPU Unit. The test might damage the PC’s internal components.

When the equipment must conform to the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), use a power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation.

3-4-3 Using the AC Power Supply Unit

Crimp Terminals Use round crimp terminals for wiring AC power supply to the AC Power Supply Unit (CPM2C-PA201). Use either crimp terminals or solid wires for wiring to the ground terminal or the service power supply terminals. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.

• Use M3.5 terminal screws.

• Tighten the terminal screws securely to a torque of 0.74 to 0.9 N·m.

Use round terminals of the dimensions shown below.

Round Terminal

Grounding

6.2 mm max.

Recommended wire diameter when using solid wires: 0.6 to 1.6 mm (AWG 22 to 14).

To prevent electric shock resulting from malfunction due to factors such as noise, connect to a ground of 100

Ω

or less. When grounding, use a wire at least 1.25 mm

thick.

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

!WARNING

Connect the ground terminal of the Power Supply Unit to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Unit. Not connecting to a ground of 100

Ω

or less may result in electric shock.

Ground of 100

Ω

or less

Power Supply Wiring • To prevent voltage drops caused by startup currents and inrush currents from other devices, wire the power supply circuits of the CPM2C-S separately from power line circuits.

• When using several CPM2C-S PCs together, it is recommended that circuits are wired separately in order to prevent circuit-breaker malfunctions and voltage drops due to inrush current.

• Twist power supply lines to prevent noise from the power supply lines.

Noise can further be prevented by wiring via a 1:1 isolation transformer.

• Use wires at least 1.25 mm

thick in order to allow for voltage drops and to keep the current within the allowable level.

100 to 240 VAC

!WARNING

Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to a torque of 0.74 to 0.9 N·m. Loose screws may result in burning or malfunction.

The 24-VDC service power supply terminals on the terminal block can be used for input power supply.

24 VDC

Can be used for input power supply.

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

Use the following to obtain the capacity of the service power supply that can be used.

Example: CPU Unit + 3 Expansion I/O Units

Power consumption = 4 W (the CPU Unit’s power consumption)

+ 1 W (the Expansion I/O Unit’s power consumption)

3 (No. of Expansion I/O Units) = 7 W

Service power supply current = (14.4 W (CPM2C-PA201’s rated capacity)

– 7 W (power consumption))

24 (V) = 308 (mA)

!WARNING

If the 24-VDC output (either the service power supply or the power supply to the CPU Unit) is overloaded, or is short-circuited, the voltage will drop, and the output will turn OFF. Take external countermeasures to ensure the safety of the system in such an event. Failure to do so may result in a serious accident.

!WARNING

Do not connect a power supply to the service power supply terminals. If an AC power supply is mistakenly connected to these terminals, the internal circuitry will be damaged.

3-4-4 Removing and Wiring I/O Connectors

The following tables provide specifications of compatible I/O connectors.

I/O connectors

Compatible Connector Specifications (OMRON)

Connector

24-pin soldered connector and cover

24-pin crimp connector and cover

24-pin pressure connector

Specifications

Connector: Fujitsu FCN-361J024-AU equivalent

Cover: Fujitsu FCN-360C024-J2 equivalent

Housing: Fujitsu FCN-363J024 equivalent

Contacts: Fujitsu FCN-363J-AU equivalent

Cover: Fujitsu FCN-360C024-J2 equivalent

Connector: Fujitsu FCN-367J024-AU/F equivalent

Connector Specifications (Fujitsu)

Item

Soldered jack

Crimp connector

Crimp jack housing

Crimp contacts

Hand crimp tool

Contact removal tool

Specifications

24-pin gold-plated terminals

24-pin

For wire gauges 24 AWG to 28 AWG

---

Model number

C500-CE241

C500-CE242

C500-CE243

Model number

FCN-361J024-AU

FCN-363J024

FCN-363J-AU

FCN-363T-T005/H

FCN-360T-T001/H

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

Pressure connector

Item

Pressure jack with closed end cover

Pressure jack with open end cover

Specifications

24-pin gold-plated terminals

24-pin silver-plated terminals

24-pin gold-plated terminals

Pressing tools

Hand press

Cable cutter

Locator plate

24-pin silver-plated terminals

General purpose

For the 360-series connectors

Connector cover

(Not compatible with the closed-end cover pressure jack.)

Thin slanted cover for 24-pin connector

With slotted screws for 24-pin connector

(Can be turned by hand.)

With Phillips-head screws for 24-pin connector

With intermediate Phillips-head screws for 24-pin connector

Model number

FCN-367J024-AU/F

FCN-367J024-AG/F

FCN-367J024-AU/H

FCN-367J024-AG/H

FCN-707T-T101/H

FCN-707T-T001/H

FCN-367T-T012/H

FCN-360C024-J2

FCN-360C024E

FCN-360C024B

FCN-360C024C

Use the following procedure when connecting a pressure connector.

Connecting I/O

Connectors

(Pressure Connectors)

1,2,3...

Align the connector and insert it into the Unit.

Use a flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the connector’s fastening screws.

Connecting I/O

Connectors

(Soldered Connectors)

Flat-blade screwdriver

Use the following procedure when connecting a soldered connector.

Wiring and Connections

1,2,3...

Align the connector and insert it into the Unit.

Section 3-4

Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the connector’s fastening screws.

Assembling Soldered

Connectors

1,2,3...

Phillips screwdriver

Use the following procedure when wiring and assembling a soldered connector (OMRON C500-CE241).

Slide heat-shrink tubing over the power supply wires and solder the wires to the appropriate pins on the socket.

Heat-shrink tubing

Power supply wires

Connector

After soldering all of the pins, slide the heat-shrink tubing over the soldered power supply pins and shrink the tubing by heating it with a heat gun.

Heat-shrink tubing

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

Assemble the socket and connector as shown in the following diagram.

Connector cover

Small screws (3)

Small screws (2)

Cable clamp

Socket

Nuts (3)

Connector screws

Nuts (2)

3-4-5 Using Terminal Blocks

We recommend using the following Terminal Blocks to wire devices to the

CPM2C-S’ I/O connector. Refer to 3-4-6 Connecting I/O Devices

for details on

I/O wiring.

I/O

XW2Z-

(((

A Cable

Terminal Blocks

XW2B-20G4 (M3 screws)

XW2B-20G5 (M3.5 screws)

XW2D-20G6 (Thin version)

Note The allowable current for the XW2Z@@@ A is 1 A. Do not allow the current on the common terminal to exceed 1 A.

3-4-6 Connecting I/O Devices

Wire inputs and outputs to the CPM2C-S’ CPU Unit as shown in the following diagrams.

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

!WARNING

The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposits on or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system. Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents.

I/O Configuration

Note When equipment must conform to the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), use a power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation.

!Caution

Check that wiring has been performed correctly before supplying power. Supplying power with incorrect wiring may result in damage to internal circuits.

The following diagrams show the I/O configurations.

CPM2C-S100C and CPM2C-S100C-DRT (Sinking Transistor Outputs)

I/O connector

24 VDC

Load

24 VDC

Don’t exceed the output capacity or the maximum common current for transistor outputs shown in the following table.

Item

Output capacity

Maximum common current capacity

Specification

300 mA at 24 VDC

1.2 A/common

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

CPM2C-S110C and CPM2C-S110C-DRT (Sourcing Transistor Outputs)

I/O connector

24 VDC

Load

24 VDC

Don’t exceed the output capacity or the maximum common current for transistor outputs shown in the following table.

Item

Output capacity

Maximum common current capacity

Specification

300 mA at 24 VDC

1.2 A/common

Wiring the CPM2C-S to an

Input Terminal

Wire the inputs as shown in the following diagram when using an Input Terminal. Use an XW2B-20G4 or XW2B-20G5 Terminal Block and an XW2Z-

@@@ A Connecting Cable.

Sinking Sourcing

01003

24 VDC

01003

24 VDC

Wiring and Connections

Input Devices

Device

Relay output

The following table shows how to connect various input devices.

Circuit diagram

Section 3-4

CPM2C-S

5 mA/6 mA/8 mA

COM (+)

NPN open collector

Sensor power supply

Output

5 mA/6 mA/8 mA

0 V

COM (+)

CPM2C-S

NPN current output

Use the same power supply for the input and sensor.

Constant current circuit

Output

5 mA/6 mA/8 mA

0 V

COM (+)

CPM2C-S

PNP current output

Sensor power supply

5 mA/6 mA/8 mA

Output

0 V

COM ( − )

CPM2C-S

Voltage output

Output

0 V

COM (+)

IN CPM2C-S

Sensor power supply

Note Do not use the following wiring with voltage-output devices:

Incorrect Wiring

Sensor power supply

Output

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

High-speed Counter Inputs

Differential Phase Mode

(Count frequency: 5 kHz)

Using IR 00000 to IR 00002 as High-speed Counter Inputs

In these examples, Encoders with an external 24-VDC open-collector output are connected.

Pulse Plus Direction Input Mode

(Count frequency: 20 kHz)

Encoder 00000 A-phase input Encoder

00001 B-phase input

Sensor or switch

00002 Z-phase input Sensor or switch

00000 Pulse input

00001 Direction input

00002 Reset input

24 VDC

Up/Down Mode

(Count frequency: 20 kHz)

COM

Sensor

Sensor or switch

00000 CW input*

00001 CCW input*

00002 Reset input

COM

24 VDC

Increment Mode

(Count frequency: 20 kHz)

Encoder

00000 Pulse input

00001 Normal input

00002 Normal input

COM COM

24 VDC 24 VDC

Note *CW is clockwise and CCW is counter-clockwise.

Using IR 00003 to IR 00006 as Interrupt Inputs (Counter Mode)

In these examples, an Encoder with an external 24-VDC open-collector output is connected.

Increment or decrement

(Count frequency: 2 kHz)

Encoder

Input (00003 to 00006)

24 VDC

COM

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

PC Setup Settings The input bits shown in the following tables can operate as normal inputs or they can be assigned special functions in the PC Setup.

Special functions for input bits IR 00000 through IR 00002 are set in

DM 6642:

Bit address

PC Setup setting (DM 6642 bits 08 to15)

IR 00000 Used as normal

IR 00001 inputs.

IR 00002

Used as high-speed counter inputs.

02, 03, or 04

Used as inputs for synchronized pulse control.

Used as a normal input.

Special functions for input bits IR 00003 through IR 00006 are set in

DM 6628:

Bit address

Bits in

DM 6628

PC Setup setting (in DM 6628)

0 (Hex)

IR 00003 00 to 03 Used as normal inputs.

IR 00004 04 to 07

1 (Hex)

Used as interrupt inputs (including counter mode).

2 (Hex)

Used as quickresponse inputs.

High-speed Counter Input Connection Examples

Differential Phase Mode

(Count frequency: 5 kHz)

E6B2-CWZ6C

Encoder

(NPN open-collector output)

Black

White

00000 A-phase input

00001 B-phase input

Pulse Plus Direction Input mode

(Count frequency: 20 kHz)

E6A2-CS5C

Encoder 00000 Pulse input

00001 Direction input

Orange

Brown

Blue

24 VDC

00002 Z-phase input

COM

Sensor or switch

Sensor power

24 VDC

00002 Reset input

COM

Wiring and Connections

Leakage Current

Section 3-4

A leakage current can cause false inputs when using 2-wire sensors (proximity switches or photoelectric switches) or limit switches with LEDs. False inputs won’t occur if the leakage current is less than 1.0 mA. If the leakage current exceeds these values, insert a bleeder resistor in the circuit to reduce the input impedance, as shown in the following diagram.

Input power supply

Inductive Loads

1,2,3...

Bleeder resistor

R CPM2C-S

2-wire sensor, etc.

I: Device's leakage current (mA)

R: Bleeder resistance (k

Ω

)

W: Bleeder resistor's power rating (W)

R =

5.0

−

5.0

Ω max.

: CPM2C-S' input impedance (k

: CPM2C-S' input current (mA)

2.3

W min.

Ω

)

: CPM2C-S' OFF voltage (V) = 5.0 V

W =

The equations above were derived from the following equations:

Input voltage (24)

Input current (I

)

≤ OFF voltage (E

: 5.0)

R +

Input voltage (24)

Input current (I

)

≥

Input voltage (24)

Input voltage

× tolerance (4)

Refer to

for details on the values L

, I

, and E

The input impedance, input current, and OFF voltage may vary depending on the input being used. (IN00000 through IN00002 have different values.)

When connecting an inductive load to an input, connect a diode in parallel with the load. The diode should satisfy the following requirements:

Peak reverse-breakdown voltage must be at least 3 times the load voltage.

Average rectified current must be 1 A.

Diode

CPM2C-S

COM

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

Using Pulse Outputs

Pulse output 0:

01000

The following diagrams show example applications of sink-type transistor outputs using output bits IR 01000 and IR 01001. Use the PULS(65), SPED(––),

ACC(––), PWM(––), and SYNC(––) instructions to produce pulse outputs

(rather than normal outputs) from output bits IR 01000 and IR 01001.

Single-phase pulse output

(Fixed duty ratio)

CPM2C-S

Motor driver

CPM2C-S

Single-phase pulse output

(Variable duty ratio)

Relay

Pulse output 0:

01000

Relay

Pulse output 1:

01001

COM

24 V

Motor driver

Pulse output 1:

01001

COM

24 V

Pulse plus direction output

CPM2C-S

Pulse output 0:

01000

Motor driver

CPM2C-S

Increment pulse output

Motor driver

CW* pulse output:

01000

CW input

Direction output:

01001

COM

24 V

Direction input

CCW* pulse output:

01001

COM

24 V

CCW input

Note *CW is clockwise and CCW is counter-clockwise.

Output Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions to protect the PC’s internal components.

Output Short Protection

The output or internal circuitry might be damaged when the load connected to an output is short-circuited, so it is recommended to install a protective fuse in each output circuit.

Inductive Loads

When connecting an inductive load to an input, connect a surge protector or diode in parallel with the load.

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

The surge protector’s components should have the following ratings:

Transistor Output

(Sinking)

OUT

CPM2C-S

COM

Diode

Transistor Output

(Sourcing)

OUT

CPM2C-S

COM

Diode

The diode should satisfy the following requirements:

Peak reverse-breakdown voltage must be at least 3 times the load voltage.

Average rectified current must be 1 A.

Inrush Current Considerations

When a CPM2C-S transistor output is used to switch a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent lamp, suppress the inrush current as shown below.

Countermeasure 1

OUT OUT

Countermeasure 2

COM COM

Providing a dark current of approx. one-third of the rated value through an incandescent lamp

Providing a limiting resistor

Fuse Insertion

The CPM2C-S with transistor output may burn if the load is short-circuited, therefore, insert a protective fuse in series to the load.

3-4-7 Wiring CompoBus/S Transmission Lines

Use special flat cable or VCTF cable for the transmission lines that connect the nodes in the CompoBus/S I/O Link. (Special flat cables, 2-core VCTF cables, and 4-core VCTF cables cannot be used in the same system. Use only one type of cable in the same system.)

Name Model number

Special Flat cable SCA1-4F10

VCTF cable ---

Specifications

Special flat cable, 0.75 mm

2 × 4 cores

VCTF cable according to JIS C3306,

0.75 mm

2 ×

2 cores or 0.75 mm

2 ×

4 cores

Use the following procedure to wire the CompoBus/S communications cables.

1,2,3...

Strip off the length of wire insulation recommended for the crimp connectors being used and tightly twist the bare wire strands together.

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

Note When VCTF cable is being used, cover the end of the cable sheathing with electrical tape or heat-shrink tubing as shown in the following diagram.

Secure the cable sheathing with electrical tape or heat-shrink tubing.

Crimp pin terminals on the stripped ends of the communications cable and secure the terminal and wire with electrical tape or heat-shrink tubing.

Note a) We recommend the following pin terminals.

Weidmüller

046290 Sleeve

Signal wire b) We recommend the following crimper:

Weidmüller PZ1.5 Crimper (part number 900599) c) The Weidmüller 901851 Sleeve cannot be used.

Insert the pin terminals into the CompoBus/S terminal block on the front of the CPM2C-S and tighten the locking screw.

Maximum Transmission

Line Length

The maximum lengths of the trunk line, branch lines, and total transmission line length depend on the communications mode and the kind of transmission line (flat cable or VCTF cable) being used. The maximum lengths are further restricted if flat cable is being used with more than 16 Slaves.

Trunk line length

Terminator

Slave Slave Slave

Master

Branch line length

Slave Slave Slave Slave

Total branch line length = L

+ L

Item cable

Max. length in high-speed mode

2-core VCTF Flat cable or 4-core VCTF cable

Up to 16 Slaves 17 to 32 Slaves

100 m max.

30 m max.

Trunk line length

Branch line length 3 m max.

Total branch line length 50 m max.

3 m max.

50 m max.

3 m max.

30 m max.

Max. length in long-distance mode

2-core VCTF cable

Flat cable or 4-core

VCTF cable

500 m max.

Free branching

6 m max.

120 m max.

Total wire length:

200 m max.

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

3-4-8 Wiring DeviceNet Communications Cables

Wire the DeviceNet communications cables as shown in the following diagram.

XW4B-05C1-H1-D Connector included with the CPM2C-S

−

(black)

CAN L (blue)

Shield

CAN H (white)

V+ (red)

XW4B-05C4-TF-D

Multi-drop Connector

DeviceNet Connectors

Use the DeviceNet connectors shown in the following table.

Appearance Connector

OMRON XW4B-05C1-H1-D Connector with securing screws

(included with the CPM2C-S)

OMRON XW4B-05C4-TF-D Connector for multi-drop connections (see note 1)

Note 1.

Use the XW4B-05C4-T1-D Connector when wiring multi-drop connections with thick cable.

Phoenix Contact connectors can be purchased through OMRON Tsufo

Service Company.

Use the following OMRON screwdriver when wiring DeviceNet connectors.

XW4Z-00C

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

3-4-9 Programming Device Connections

Programming Console Use one of the connecting cables shown in the following diagram to connect a

Programming Console to the CPM2C-S.

Main cable (2 m)

Peripheral port

CPM2C-S

CQM1H-PRO01-E

(with attached 2-m cable)

CPM2C-CN111 (0.15 m)

CQM1-PRO01-E

(with attached 2-m cable)

C200H-PRO27-E

One-to-one Computer

Connection

Main cable (2 m)

CS1W-CN114 (0.05 m)

C200H-CN222 (2 m)

C200H-CN422 (4 m)

CS1W-CN224 (2 m)

CS1W-CN624 (6 m)

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

Use one of the connecting cables shown in the following diagram to connect a personal computer with Support Software to the CPM2C-S’ RS-232C port for

1:1 Host Link communications or no-protocol (serial) communications.

Wiring and Connections

IBM PC/AT or compatible computer

Section 3-4

RS-232C Port Connection

A personal computer can be connected to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port with an XW2Z@ 00S or XW2Z@ 00S-V Connecting Cable. The XW2Z@ 00S

Cables have a D-sub 25-pin connector and the XW2Z@ 00S-V Cables have a

D-sub 9-pin connector.

Connecting Cable

XW2Z-200S-V (2 m)

XW2Z-500S-V (5 m)

RS-232C port (D-sub 9-pin)

CPM2C-CN111 (0.15 m)

CS1W-CN118 (0.1 m)

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

IBM PC/AT or compatible computer

CPM2C-CIF11

Peripheral Port Connection

A personal computer can be connected to the CPU Unit’s communications port through a CQM1-CIF02 RS-232C Adapter. The CQM1-CIF02 RS-232C

Adapter has a 9-pin connector.

Peripheral port

CQM1-CIF02 (3.3 m)

CPM2C-CN111 (0.15 m)

CS1W-CN114 (0.05 m)

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

One-to-N Host Link

Connection

Note 1.

The CS1W-CN226/626 Connecting Cables can be used, but the CS1W-

CN225/625 and CS1W-CN227/627 Connecting Cables cannot be used.

The CQM1-CIF11 Connecting Cable cannot be used. (If one is connected, the CPM2C-S will not recognize it; the PC will enter RUN mode at startup if pin 4 of the DIP switch is ON and the PC Setup (DM 6600) is set so that the Programming Console’s mode switch controls the startup mode.)

Refer to

SECTION 8 Using Programming Devices

for details on the Support Software that can be used with the CPM2C-S.

Up to 32 OMRON PCs, including CPM2C-S PCs, can be connected to a host computer.

IBM PC/AT or compatible computer

Connecting Cable

XW2Z-200S-V (2 m)

XW2Z-500S-V (5 m)

When using the port as a peripheral port

B500-AL004 or NT-AL001 (requires +5 V)

(See notes 1 and 2.)

RS-422 (Total length: 500 m max.)

CPM2C-S

CPU Unit

CPM2C-S

CPU Unit

CPM2C-S

CPU Unit

CPM2-CIF11 CPM2-CIF11 CPM2-CIF11

When using the port as an RS-232C port

NT-AL001

(See note 1.)

RS-232C port

CPM2C-S

CPU Unit

XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)

XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)

CPM2C-S

CPU Unit

NT-AL001

(See note 1.)

XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)

XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)

RS-232C port

CPM2C-S

CPU Unit

CPM2C-CN111

Connecting Cable

(0.15 m)

NT-AL001

(See note 1.)

XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)

XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)

RS-232C port

CSW1-CN118 Connecting Cable (0.1 m)

CPM2-CIF01-V1

Note

Up to 32 PCs

The NT-AL001 must be supplied externally with 5 VDC. When an NT-

AL001 is connected to a CPM2C-S PC, pin 6 of the CPM2C-S’ RS-232C port supplies +5 VDC and an external power supply is not necessary.

The B500-AL004 requires an external AC power supply (110 VAC or

220 VAC).

Be sure that the power supply requirements of the CPU Unit, Expansion

Units, and Expansion I/O Units do not exceed the available capacity. Also, take into account the power consumption of the NT-AL001 Adapter when an NT-AL001 Adapter is connected to the RS-232C port.

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

3-4-10 No-Protocol Communications

The TXD(48) and RXD(47) instructions can be used in no-protocol mode to exchange data with standard serial devices such as bar code readers and serial printers. For example, data can be received from a bar code reader or transmitted to a serial printer.

The serial devices can be connected to the communications port as a RS-

232C port or peripheral port, just like a one-to-one computer connection. See

One-to-one Computer Connections

on page 78 for diagrams showing the pos-

sible serial connections.

3-4-11 OMRON PT Connections

In a 1:1 NT Link, a CPM2C-S can be connected directly to a Programmable

Terminal. The direct connection with a Programmable Terminal is possible by using the communications as a RS-232C port only (not as a peripheral port).

A Programmable Terminal can also be connected by a Host Link connection.

Either the RS-232C port or peripheral port connection can be used for the

Host Link.

Connecting Cable

XW2Z-200T (2 m)

XW2Z-500T (5 m)

RS-232C port

(D-sub 9-pin)

RS-232C port

CPM2C-S CPU Unit

RS-232C connection

CPM2C-CN111 (0.15 m)

OMRON

Programmable

Terminal

RS-422 connection

CS1W-CN118 (0.1 m)

RS-232C

←

peripheral port

RS-232C port

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

RS-422

← peripheral port

NT-AL001

RS-232C Adapter

XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)

XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)

RS-232C port

CPM2C-CIF11

Note The Programmable Terminal cannot be connected using a peripheral port connection when communicating via an NT Link.

Wiring and Connections Section 3-4

3-4-12 One-to-one PC Link Connections

A CPM2C-S can be linked to another CPM2C-S, a CQM1H, CQM1, CPM1,

CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1(-V2), C200HS, or C200HX/HG/HE PC. The

PC must be connected using the communications port as an RS-232C port

(not as a peripheral port).

1:1 Link Master

CPM2C-S CPU Unit

RS-232C port (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C port (D-sub 9-pin) 1:1 Link Slave

CPM2C-S CPU Unit

CPM2C-CN111

(0.1 m)

CS1W-CN118

(0.1 m)

CPM2C-CN111 (0.1 m)

Connecting Cable

XW2Z-200T (2 m)

XW2Z-500T (5 m)

CS1W-CN118 (0.1 m)

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

CPM2C-CIF11

OMRON PC (CQM1H, CQM1, CPM1,

CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1(-V2),

C200HS, or C200HX/HG/HE)

OMRON PC (CQM1H, CQM1, CPM1,

CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1(-V2),

C200HS, or C200HX/HG/HE)

Note Even though the peripheral port on the CPM2C-CIF01 can output RS-232C, this port cannot be used for one-to-one link communications.

SECTION 4 Memory Areas

This section describes the structure of the CPM2C-S’ memory areas and explains how to use them.

4-1 Allocation of Word and Bit Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1-2 I/O Memory Area Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2 I/O Allocation for CPM2C-S PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2-2 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2-3 I/O Allocation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3 I/O Allocation to CompoBus/S Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-4 SR Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-5 AR Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-6 PC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-6-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-6-2 PC Setup Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7 Basic PC Operation and I/O Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7-1 Startup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7-2 Hold Bit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7-3 Program Memory Write-protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7-4 RS-232C Port Servicing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7-5 Peripheral Port Servicing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7-6 Cycle Monitor Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7-7 Minimum Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7-8 Input Time Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7-9 Error Log Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-8 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Allocation of Word and Bit Addresses Section 4-1

4-1 Allocation of Word and Bit Addresses

Except for the TR area and DM area, data in the PC’s I/O memory can be specified by bit addresses or word addresses. The TR area can be accessed only by bit addresses and the DM area can be accessed only by word addresses.

The following diagram shows how to specify I/O bits.

Bit number

Bit address

IR 000

IR 001

: :

IR 010

IR 011

: :

Word Bit number

The following memory areas can be used in the CPM2C-S.

IR area

Data area

SR area

TR area

HR area

AR area

LR area

Input area

Output area

CompoBus/S input area

CompoBus/S output area

Work area

Timer/Counter area

---

Words

IR 000 to IR 009

(10 words)

IR 010 to IR 019

(10 words)

IR 020 to IR 027

(8 words)

IR 030 to IR 037

(8 words)

IR 028 and IR 029,

IR 038 to IR 049,

IR 200 to IR 227

(42 words)

SR 228 to SR 255

(28 words)

HR 00 to HR 19

(20 words)

AR 00 to AR 23

(24 words)

Bits

IR 00000 to IR 00915

(160 bits)

IR 01000 to IR 01915

(160 bits)

IR 02000 to IR 02715

(128 bits)

IR 03000 to IR 03715

(128 bits)

IR 02800 to IR 02915,

IR 03800 to IR 04915,

IR 20000 to IR 22715

(672 bits)

SR 22800 to SR 25515

(448 bits)

TR 0 to TR 7

(8 bits)

HR 0000 to HR 1915

(320 bits)

AR 0000 to AR 2315

(384 bits)

LR 00 to LR 15

(16 words)

LR 0000 to LR 1515

(256 bits)

TC 000 to TC 255 (timer/counter numbers)

These bits are allocated to the external I/O terminals.

(Words not used as I/O words can be used as work words.)

These bits are allocated to CompoBus/S

Slaves.

(Words not used as I/O words can be used as work words.)

Work bits can be freely used within the program.

Function

These bits serve specific functions such as flags and control bits.

These bits are used to temporarily store

ON/OFF status at program branches.

These bits store data and retain their ON/

OFF status when power is turned OFF, or operation starts or stops. They are used in the same way as work bits.

These bits serve specific functions such as flags and control bits.

Used for a 1:1 PC Link with another PC.

Timers and counters use the TIM, TIMH(15),

CNT, CNTR(12), TMHH(––), and TIML(––) instructions. The same numbers are used for both timers and counters.

Allocation of Word and Bit Addresses Section 4-1

DM area

Data area

Read/write

Error log

Read-only

3,4

PC Setup

3,4

Words

DM 0000 to DM 1999

DM 2022 to DM 2047

(2,026 words)

---

DM 2000 to DM 2021

(22 words)

---

Bits Function

DM area data can be accessed in word units only. Word values are retained when the power is turned off, or operation started or stopped.

Read/write areas can be read and written freely within the program.

Used to store the time of occurrence and error code of errors that occur. These words can be used as ordinary read/write DM when the error log function isn’t being used.

Cannot be overwritten from program.

DM 6144 to DM 6599

(456 words)

DM 6600 to DM 6655

(56 words)

---

Note

Used to store various parameters that control PC operation.

The contents of the HR area, AR area, Counter area, and read/write DM area are backed up by the CPU Unit’s battery. If the battery is removed or fails, the contents of these areas will be lost and returned to default values.

When a TC numbers is used as a word operand, the timer or counter PV is accessed; when used as a bit operand, its Completion Flag is accessed.

Data in DM 6144 to DM 6655 cannot be overwritten from the program, but they can be changed from a Programming Device.

The program and data in DM 6144 to DM 6655 are stored in flash memory.

4-1-1 Functions

IR Area

Note

The functions of the IR area are explained below.

IR area bits from IR 00000 to IR 01915 are allocated to terminals on the CPU

Unit and Expansion I/O Units. IR words that are not allocated to inputs or outputs can be used as work words. Input words begin with IR 000 and output words begin with IR 010.

The input bits shown in the following tables can operate as normal inputs or they can be assigned special functions in the PC Setup.

Special functions for input bits IR 00000 through IR 00002 are set in

DM 6642:

Bit address

PC Setup setting (DM 6642 bits 08 to15)

IR 00000 Used as normal

IR 00001 inputs.

IR 00002

Used as high-speed counter inputs.

02, 03, or 04

Used as inputs for synchronized pulse control.

Used as a normal input.

Special functions for input bits IR 00003 and IR 00004 are set in DM 6628:

Bit address

Bits in

DM 6628

IR 00003 00 to 03 Used as normal

IR 00004 04 to 07 inputs.

PC Setup setting (in DM 6628)

Used as

1 interrupt inputs

(including counter mode).

Used as quick-response inputs.

Allocation of Word and Bit Addresses

CompoBus/S I/O Areas

Work Bits

SR Area

TR Area

HR Area

AR Area

LR Area

Timer/Counter Area

Section 4-1

Output bits IR 01000 and IR 01001 can operate as normal inputs or they can be used for pulse outputs with PULS(65), SYNC(––), or PWM(––).

(Use a CPU Unit with transistor outputs for the pulse output functions.)

Instruction

PULS(65)

SYNC(––)

PWM(––)

Function

With SPED(64):

Single-phase pulse output without acceleration or deceleration

With ACC(––):

Single-phase pulse output with trapezoidal acceleration and deceleration

Synchronized pulse control output

Variable duty-ratio pulse output

IR area bits from IR 02000 to IR 02715 (the input area) and IR 03000 to

IR 03715 (the output area) are allocated to CompoBus/S Slaves. IR words that are not allocated to CompoBus/S inputs or outputs can be used as work words.

The work bits can be used freely within the program. They can only be used within the program, however, and not for direct external I/O.

These bits mainly serve as flags to PC operation or contain present and set values for various functions. Words SR 253 to SR 255 are read-only. For details on the various bit functions, refer to

4-4 SR Area .

When a complex ladder diagram cannot be programmed in mnemonic code just as it is, these bits are used to temporarily store ON/OFF execution conditions at program branches. They are used only for mnemonic code. When programming directly with ladder diagrams using the SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) or the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software, TR bits are automatically processed for you.

The same TR bits cannot be used more than once within the same instruction block, but can be used again in different instruction blocks. The ON/OFF status of TR bits cannot be monitored from a Programming Device.

Examples showing the use of TR bits in programming are provided in the

CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programming Manual (W353).

These bits retain their ON/OFF status even after the PC power supply has been turned off or when operation begins or stops. They are used in the same way as work bits.

These bits mainly serve as flags related to PC operation. These bits retain their status even after the PC power supply has been turned off or when oper-

ation begins or stops. For details on the various bit functions, refer to 4-5 AR

Area .

These bits are used to exchange data when the CPM2C-S is linked 1:1 with another CPM2C-S or a CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1(-V2),

CQM1, CQM1H, C200HS, or C200HX/HG/HE PC.

This area is used to manage timers and counters created with TIM, TIMH(15),

TMHH(––)*, TIML(––)*, CNT, and CNTR(12). The same numbers are used for both timers and counters and each number can be used only once in the user program. Do not use the same TC number twice even for different instructions.

Use TC numbers 000 through 003 for TIMH(15) and TC numbers 004 to 007 for TMHH(––)*. When these timer numbers are used, timing is performed as an interrupt process and the cycle timer does not affect timer operation.

TC numbers are used to create timers and counters, as well as to access

Completion Flags and present values (PVs). If a TC number is designated for

Allocation of Word and Bit Addresses

DM Area

Section 4-1 word data, it will access the present value (PV); if it is used for bit data, it will access the Completion Flag for the timer/counter.

DM area data is accessed in word units only. The contents of the DM area are retained even after the PC power supply has been turned off or when operation begins or stops.

DM words DM 0000 through DM 1999 and DM 2022 through DM 2047 can be used freely in the program; other DM words are allocated specific functions, described below.

DM 2000 through DM 2021 contain the error log information. Refer to Section

9 Troubleshooting for details on the error log.

Note

DM 6600 through DM 6655 contain the PC Setup. Refer to 4-6 PC Setup for

details.

Allocation of Word and Bit Addresses Section 4-1

4-1-2 I/O Memory Area Attributes

Area

Input area

(IR 000 to IR 009)

Output area

(IR 010 to IR 019)

CompoBus/S input area

(IR 020 to IR 027)

CompoBus/S output area

(IR 030 to IR 037)

Work areas

(IR 028, IR 029,

IR 030 to IR 049,

IR 220 to IR 227)

SR area

(SR 228 to SR 255)

HR area

(HR 00 to HR 19)

AR area

(AR 00 to AR 23)

LR area

(LR 00 to LR 15)

Timer Completion Flags

(T000 to T255)

Timer PVs

(T000 to T255)

Counter Completion

Flags (C000 to C255)

Counter PVs

(C000 to C255)

DM area

Read/Write

(DM 0000 to DM 1999,

DM 2022 to DM 2047)

Error Log

(DM 2000 to DM 2021)

Read-only

(DM 6144 to DM 6599)

PC Setup

(DM 6600 to DM 6655)

Yes

External I/O allocation

Yes

Mode change

(to or from

PROGRAM)

IOM

Hold

Bit

OFF

IOM

Hold

Bit

FALS(07) Other cause Reset IOM

IOM

Hold

Bit

OFF

Fatal error

IOM

Hold

Bit

IOM

Hold

Bit

OFF

IOM

Hold

Bit

Startup (Power ON)

Hold Bit

IOM

Hold

Bit

OFF

IOM

Hold

Bit

Maintain IOM

Hold Bit

IOM

Hold

Bit

OFF

IOM

Hold

Bit

Force

Set,

Force

Reset

Clear Hold Hold Hold Clear Hold Clear Clear Clear Hold OK

Clear

Hold

Clear

Hold

Clear

Hold

Clear

Hold

Clear

Hold

Clear

Hold

Clear

Hold

Clear

Hold

Clear

Hold

Clear

Hold

Note 1.

The PC Setup setting in DM 6601 bits 08 to 11 determines whether the

IOM Hold Bit is reset (turned OFF) at startup.

Timer PVs and Completion Flags are maintained when the CPM2C-S is switched to PROGRAM mode from RUN mode or MONITOR mode, but cleared when the CPM2C-S is switched from PROGRAM mode to RUN mode or MONITOR mode.

I/O Allocation for CPM2C-S PCs Section 4-2

4-2 I/O Allocation for CPM2C-S PCs

This section shows how I/O bits are actually allocated to the input and output terminals on the CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Units. Bits in the words that are not allocated to I/O can be used as work bits.

4-2-1 CPU Units

Input bits are allocated starting from IR 00000 and output bits are allocated starting from IR 01000. In the following diagram, shaded areas indicate bits actually used for inputs or outputs.

6 inputs

IR 00000 to

IR 00005

4 outputs

IR 01000 to

IR 01003

Bits

Inputs IR 000

Outputs IR 010

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

Do not use

4-2-2 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units

Up to 3 Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units can be connected to a

CPM2C-S PC. Input bits and output bits are automatically allocated starting from the CPU Unit and continuing through Expansion Units and Expansion

I/O Units in the order in which they are connected. The input area consists of the 10 words from IR 000 to 009, and the output area consists of the 10 words from IR 010 to 019.

No. of I/O Model number

CPM2C-8ED @ 3

Max. No. of Units

CPM2C-16ED @

CPM2C-8ER

CPM2C-8ET @

CPM2C-8ET1 @

CPM2C-16ET @

CPM2C-16ET1 @

CPM2C-10EDR

CPM2C-20EDR

CPM2C-24EDT @

CPM2C-24EDT1 @

CPM2C-32EDT @

CPM2C-32EDT1 @

I/O Allocated bits

Input 8 inputs: Word (m+1), bits 00 to 07

Output ---

Input 16 inputs: Word (m+1), bits 00 to 15

Output ---

Input ---

Output 8 outputs: Word (n+1), bits 00 to 07

Input ---

Output 16 outputs: Word (n+1), bits 00 to 15

Input 6 inputs: Word (m+1), bits 00 to 05

Output 4 outputs: Word (n+1), bits 00 to 03

Input 12 inputs: Word (m+1), bits 00 to 11

Output 8 outputs: Word (n+1), bits 00 to 07

Input 16 inputs: Word (m+1), bits 00 to 15

Output 8 outputs: Word (n+1), bits 00 to 07

Input 16 inputs: Word (m+1), bits 00 to 15

Output 16 outputs: Word (n+1), bits 00 to 15

Note m: “m” denotes the last input word allocated to the CPU Unit, or to the previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit if one is already connected.

n: “n” denotes the last output word allocated to the CPU Unit, or to the previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit if one is already connected.

I/O Allocation for CPM2C-S PCs Section 4-2

4-2-3 I/O Allocation Examples

Example 1 The following examples shows the I/O bits allocated when one 24-point

Expansion I/O Unit is connected. Bits IR 00100 to IR 00115 are allocated to the Unit’s inputs and bits IR 011 00 to IR 01107 are allocated to the Unit’s outputs.

Bits

Inputs

IR 000

IR 001

Outputs

IR 010

IR 011

15 14 13 12 11 10 09

Do not use

08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

Example 2 The following examples shows the I/O bits allocated when an 8-point Input

Unit, 24-point Expansion I/O Unit, and 16-point Output Unit are connected.

Output bits are not allocated to the Input Unit and input bits are not allocated to the Output Unit.

CPU Unit

(10 I/O points)

Expansion I/O Unit

(8 input points)

Expansion I/O Unit

(24 I/O points)

Expansion I/O Unit

(16 output points)

0 inputs 6 inputs

IR 00000 to

IR 00005

4 outputs

IR 01000 to

IR 01003

8 inputs

IR 00100 to

IR 00107

0 outputs

16 inputs

IR 00200 to

IR 00215

8 outputs

IR 01100 to

IR 01107

16 outputs

IR 01200 to

IR 01215

Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual (W356) for more examples showing the bits allocated to Expansion I/O Units.

I/O Allocation to CompoBus/S Slaves Section 4-3

4-3 I/O Allocation to CompoBus/S Slaves

The CompoBus/S input area (IR 020 to IR 027) and CompoBus/S output area

(IR 030 to IR 037) are allocated for the CompoBus/S Terminal’s I/O. The following table shows the I/O allocation of the CompoBus/S Terminal (IN0 to

IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15.)

I/O

IR word

Input area

Output area 030

031

032

033

034

035

036

037

020

021

022

023

024

025

026

027

Bit address

Bit number

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

IN1

IN3

IN5

IN7

IN0

IN2

IN4

IN6

IN9

IN11

IN13

IN15

OUT1

OUT3

OUT5

IN8

IN10

IN12

IN14

OUT0

OUT2

OUT4

OUT7

OUT9

OUT11

OUT13

OUT15

OUT6

OUT8

OUT10

OUT12

OUT14

Note 1.

IN0 to IN15 are node numbers of Input Terminals and OUT0 to OUT15 are node numbers of Output Terminals.

When the maximum number of CompoBus/S nodes is set to 16, IN8 to

IN15 and OUT8 to OUT15 can be used as work bits.

CompoBus/S Terminals with 8 points or less are allocated I/O bits in byte units beginning from bit 00 or bit 08.

Only even addresses can be specified for 16-point CompoBus/S Terminals.

SR Area Section 4-4

4-4 SR Area

These bits mainly serve as flags related to CPM2C-S operation or contain present and set values for various functions. The functions of the SR area are explained in the following table.

Note “Read-only” words and bits can be read as status in controller PC operation, but they cannot be written from the ladder program. Bits and words that are

“Not used” are also read-only.

Word(s)

SR 228,

SR 229

SR 230,

SR 231

SR 232 to

SR 235

SR 236 to

SR 239

SR 240

SR 241

SR 242,

SR 243

SR 244

Bit(s) Function

00 to 15 Pulse Output PV 0

Contains the pulse output PV (–16,777,215 to 16,777,215). SR 22915 acts as the sign bit; a negative number is indicated when SR 22915 is ON.

(The same PV data can be read immediately with PRV(62).)

Only Pulse Output PV 0 is used for ACC(––).

00 to 15 Pulse Output PV 1

Contains the pulse output PV (–16,777,215 to 16,777,215). SR 23115 acts as the sign bit; a negative number is indicated when SR 23115 is ON.

(The same PV data can be read immediately with PRV(62).)

00 to 15 Macro Function Input Area

Contains the input operands for MCRO(99).

(Can be used as work bits when MCRO(99) is not used.)

00 to 15 Macro Function Output Area

Contains the output operands for MCRO(99).

(Can be used as work bits when MCRO(99) is not used.)

00 to 15 Interrupt Input 00003 Counter Mode SV

SV when interrupt input 00003 is used in counter mode (4 digits hexadecimal).

(Can be used as work bits when interrupt input 00003 is not used in counter mode.)

00 to 15 Interrupt Input 00004 Counter Mode SV

SV when interrupt input 00004 is used in counter mode (4 digits hexadecimal).

(Can be used as work bits when interrupt input 00004 is not used in counter mode.)

00 to 15 Not used.

Read/ write

Readonly

Read/ write

SR 245

00 to 15 Interrupt Input 00003 Counter Mode PV

Counter PV when interrupt input 00003 is used in counter mode (4 digits hexadecimal).

00 to 15 Interrupt Input 00004 Counter Mode PV

Counter PV when interrupt input 00004 is used in counter mode (4 digits hexadecimal).

00 to 15 Not used.

Readonly

SR 246,

SR 247

SR 248,

SR 249

SR 250,

SR 251

00 to 15

High-speed Counter PV Area

(Can be used as work bits when the high-speed counter is not used.)

Not used.

Readonly

SR Area Section 4-4

Word(s)

SR 252 00

Bit(s)

High-speed Counter Reset Bit

Function Read/ write

Read/ write

01 to 03 Not used.

04 Pulse Output 0 PV Reset Bit

Turn ON to clear the PV of pulse output 0.

05 Pulse Output 1 PV Reset Bit

Turn ON to clear the PV of pulse output 1.

06, 07

Not used.

Peripheral Port Reset Bit

Turn ON to reset the peripheral port. Automatically turns OFF when reset is complete.

RS-232C Port Reset Bit

Turn ON to reset the RS-232C port. Automatically turns OFF when reset is complete.

PC Setup Reset Bit

Turn ON to initialize PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655). Automatically turns OFF again when reset is complete. Only effective if the PC is in PROGRAM mode.

Forced Status Hold Bit (See note.)

OFF: The forced status of bits that are forced set/reset is cleared when switching between PROGRAM mode and MONITOR mode.

ON: The status of bits that are forced set/reset are maintained when switching between PROGRAM mode and MONITOR mode.

The PC Setup can be set to maintain the status of this bit when the PC is turned off.

I/O Hold Bit (See note.)

OFF: IR and LR bits are reset when starting or stopping operation.

ON: IR and LR bit status is maintained when starting or stopping operation.

The PC Setup can be set to maintain the status of this bit when the PC is turned off.

Not used.

Error Log Reset Bit

Turn ON to clear error log. Automatically turns OFF again when operation is complete.

Not used.

Read/ write

SR Area Section 4-4

Word(s)

SR 253

SR 254

SR 255

Bit(s) Function

00 to 07 FAL Error Code

The error code (a 2-digit number) is stored here when an error occurs. The FAL number is stored here when FAL(06) or FALS(07) is executed. This word is reset (to 00) by executing a FAL 00 instruction or by clearing the error from a Programming Device.

Battery Error Flag

Turns ON when the CPU Unit backup battery’s voltage is too low.

Cycle Time Overrun Flag

Turns ON when a cycle time overrun occurs (i.e., when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms).

10,11

Not used.

Changing RS-232C Setup Flag

Turns ON when the RS-232C port’s settings are being changed.

Always ON Flag

Always OFF Flag

First Cycle Flag

Turns ON for 1 cycle at the start of operation.

1-minute clock pulse (30 seconds ON; 30 seconds OFF)

0.02-second clock pulse (0.01 second ON; 0.01 second OFF)

Negative (N) Flag

Not used.

Overflow (OF) Flag

Turns ON when an overflow occurs in a signed binary calculation.

Underflow (UF) Flag

Turns ON when an underflow occurs in a signed binary calculation.

Differential Monitor Complete Flag

Turns ON when differential monitoring is completed.

Read/ write

Readonly

Read/ write

Readonly

07 STEP(08) Execution Flag

Turns ON for 1 cycle only at the start of process based on STEP(08).

08 to 15 Not used.

00 0.1-second clock pulse (0.05 second ON; 0.05 second OFF)

01 0.2-second clock pulse (0.1 second ON; 0.1 second OFF)

1.0-second clock pulse (0.5 second ON; 0.5 second OFF)

Instruction Execution Error (ER) Flag

Turns ON when an error occurs during execution of an instruction.

Carry (CY) Flag

Turns ON when there is a carry in the results of an instruction execution.

Greater Than (GR) Flag

Turns ON when the result of a comparison operation is “greater.”

06 Equals (EQ) Flag

Turns ON when the result of a comparison operation is “equal,” or when the result of an instruction execution is 0.

07 Less Than (LE) Flag

Turns ON when the result of a comparison operation is “less.”

08 to 15 Not used.

Readonly

Note DM 6601 in the PC Setup can be set to maintain the previous status of the

Forced Status Hold Bit (SR 25211) and the I/O Hold Bit (SR 25212) when power is turned OFF.

AR Area Section 4-5

4-5 AR Area

Word(s)

AR 00

(-DRT only)

AR 01

AR 02

AR 03

AR 04

AR 05

AR 06

AR 07

These bits mainly serve as flags related to CPM2C-S operation such as error flags, high-speed counter flags, pulse output operation flags, and cycle time values. These bits retain their status even after the CPM2C-S power supply has been turned off or when operation begins or stops.

Bit(s)

DeviceNet network power supply error (ON when an error occurred, OFF when normal.)

DeviceNet communications error (ON when an error occurred, OFF when normal.)

04 to 06 Not used.

07 DeviceNet status error (ON when an error occurred, OFF when normal.)

Function

DeviceNet switch settings error (ON when a settings error occurred, OFF when normal.)

Node number duplication or Bus off error (ON when an error occurred, OFF when normal.)

Explicit Connection Flag

Polling Connection Flag

10 Bit Strobe Connection Flag

11 to 14 Not used.

ON: Connection established.

OFF: Connection not established.

15 I/O Link in progress (ON when the I/O Link is operating, otherwise OFF.)

00 to 15 Reserved for the system (These bits cannot be used.)

Expansion Unit Error Flag for 1st Unit

Expansion Unit Error Flag for 2nd Unit

These flags turn ON when there is an error in the corresponding Unit.

02 Expansion Unit Error Flag for 3rd Unit

03 to 07 Not used.

08 to 11 Number of Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units connected

12 to 15 Not used.

00 to 15 Not used.

00 to 07 CompoBus/S Active Slave Flags for OUT 0 to OUT7 (ON when the Slave is communicating.)

08 to 15 CompoBus/S Slave Communications Error Flags for OUT 0 to OUT7

00 to 07 CompoBus/S Active Slave Flags for IN0 to IN7 (ON when the Slave is communicating.)

08 to 15 CompoBus/S Slave Communications Error Flags for IN0 to IN7

00 to 07 CompoBus/S Active Slave Flags for OUT 8 to OUT15 (ON when the Slave is communicating.)

08 to 15 CompoBus/S Slave Communications Error Flags for OUT 8 to OUT15

00 to 07 CompoBus/S Active Slave Flags for IN8 to IN15 (ON when the Slave is communicating.)

08 to 15 CompoBus/S Slave Communications Error Flags for IN8 to IN15

AR Area

Word(s)

AR 08

AR 09

AR 10

Bit(s)

00 to 03 RS-232C Port Error Code

0: Normal completion

1: Parity error

2: Frame error

3: Overrun error

Function

RS-232C Communications Error Flag

Turns ON when an RS-232C port communications error occurs.

RS-232C Transmit Ready Flag

Turns ON when the PC is ready to transmit data. (No-protocol and Host Link only)

06 RS-232C Reception Completed Flag

Turns ON when the PC has completed reading data. (No-protocol only)

08 to 11 Peripheral Port Error Code

0: Normal completion

1: Parity error

2: Frame error

3: Overrun error

RS-232C Reception Overflow Flag

Turns ON when an overflow has occurred. (No-protocol only)

Peripheral Port Communications Error Flag

Turns ON when a peripheral port communications error occurs.

Peripheral Port Transmit Ready Flag

Turns ON when the PC is ready to transmit data. (No-protocol and Host Link only)

Peripheral Port Reception Completed Flag

Turns ON when the PC has completed reading data. (No-protocol only)

Peripheral Port Reception Overflow Flag

Turns ON when an overflow has occurred. (No-protocol only)

00 to 15 RS-232C Port Reception Counter (4 digits BCD)

Valid only when no-protocol communications are used.

00 to 15 Peripheral Port Reception Counter (4 digits BCD)

Valid only when no-protocol communications are used.

Section 4-5

AR Area

Word(s)

AR 11

(Note 1)

AR 12

(Note 1)

Bit(s)

00 to 07 High-speed Counter Range Comparison Flags

00 ON: Counter PV is within comparison range 1

01 ON: Counter PV is within comparison range 2

02 ON: Counter PV is within comparison range 3

03 ON: Counter PV is within comparison range 4

04 ON: Counter PV is within comparison range 5

05 ON: Counter PV is within comparison range 6

06 ON: Counter PV is within comparison range 7

07 ON: Counter PV is within comparison range 8

Function

High-speed Counter Comparison Operation

ON: Operating

OFF: Stopped

High-speed Counter PV Overflow/Underflow Flag

ON: An overflow or underflow occurred.

OFF: Normal operation

Not used.

Pulse Output 0 Output Status

ON: Pulse output 0 is accelerating or decelerating.

OFF: Pulse output 0 is operating at a constant rate.

Pulse Output 0 Overflow/Underflow Flag

ON: An overflow or underflow occurred.

OFF: Normal operation

Pulse Output 0 Pulse Quantity Set Flag

ON: Pulse quantity has been set.

OFF: Pulse quantity has not been set.

Pulse Output 0 Pulse Output Completed Flag

ON: Completed

OFF: Not completed

Pulse Output 0 Output Status

ON: Pulses being output.

OFF: Stopped.

00 to 11 Not used.

12 Pulse Output 1 Overflow/Underflow Flag

ON: An overflow or underflow occurred.

OFF: Normal operation

Pulse Output 1 Pulse Quantity Set Flag

ON: Pulse quantity has been set.

OFF: Pulse quantity has not been set.

Pulse Output 1 Pulse Output Completed Flag

ON: Completed

OFF: Not completed

Pulse Output 1 Output Status

ON: Pulses being output.

OFF: Stopped.

Section 4-5

AR Area Section 4-5

AR 16

AR 17

(Note 2)

AR 18

(Note 2)

AR 19

(Note 2)

AR 20

(Note 2)

Word(s)

AR 13

AR 14

AR 15

Bit(s)

03, 04

06, 07

Function

Power-up PC Setup Error Flag

Turns ON when there is an error in DM 6600 to DM 6614 (the part of the PC Setup area that is read at power-up).

Start-up PC Setup Error Flag

Turns ON when there is an error in DM 6615 to DM 6644 (the part of the PC Setup area that is read at the beginning of operation).

RUN PC Setup Error Flag

Turns ON when there is an error in DM 6645 to DM 6655 (the part of the PC Setup area that is always read).

Not used.

Cycle Time Too Long Flag

Turns ON if the actual cycle time is longer than the cycle time set in DM 6619.

Not used.

Memory Area Specification Error Flag

Turns ON when a non-existent data area address is specified in the program.

Flash Memory Error Flag

Turns ON when there is an error in flash memory.

Read-only DM Error Flag

Turns ON when a checksum error occurs in the read-only DM (DM 6144 to DM 6599) and that area is initialized.

PC Setup Error Flag

Turns ON when a checksum error occurs in the PC Setup area.

Program Error Flag

Turns ON when a checksum error occurs in the program memory (UM) area, or when an improper instruction is executed.

Expansion Instruction Area Error Flag

Turns ON when a checksum error occurs in the expansion instruction assignments area. The expansion instruction assignments will be cleared to their default settings.

Data Save Error Flag

Turns ON if data could not be retained with the backup battery.

The following words are normally backed up by the battery:

DM read/write words (DM 0000 to DM 1999 and DM 2022 to DM 2047), Error Log (DM 2000 to

DM 2021), HR area, counter area, SR 25511, SR 25512 (if DM 6601 is set to hold I/O memory at startup), AR 23, operating mode (if DM 6600 is set to use the previous operating mode), and clock words (AR 17 to AR 21, for CPU Units with clocks).

If the above words cannot be retained, all data will be cleared except that AR 2114 will be turned

ON. The CPU Unit will start in PROGRAM mode if DM 6600 is set to use the previous operating mode. (If DM 6604 is set to generate an error, the PC will start in PROGRAM mode regardless.)

CompoBus/S ASIC Error Flag

Turns ON if an error occurred.

00 to 15 Maximum Cycle Time (4 digits BCD, see note 3)

The longest cycle time since the beginning of operation is stored. It is not cleared when operation stops, but it is cleared when operation starts again.

00 to 15 Current Cycle Time (4 digits BCD, see note 3)

The most recent cycle time during operation is stored. The Current Cycle Time is not cleared when operation stops.

00 to 15 Not used.

00 to 07 Minute (00 to 59, BCD)

08 to 15 Hour (00 to 59, BCD)

00 to 07 Second (00 to 59, BCD)

08 to 15 Minute (00 to 59, BCD)

00 to 07 Hour (00 to 23, BCD)

08 to 15 Day of the Month (01 to 31, BCD)

00 to 07 Month (01 to 12, BCD)

08 to 15 Year (00 to 99, BCD)

PC Setup Section 4-6

Word(s)

AR 21

(Note 2)

AR 22

AR 23

Bit(s)

00 to 07

Day of the Week

(00 to 06, BCD)

00: Sunday

04: Thursday

01: Monday

05: Friday

Function

02: Tuesday

06: Saturday

03: Wednesday

08 to 12 Not used.

13 30-second Compensation Bit

Turn this bit ON to round off to the nearest minute. When the seconds are 00 to 29, the seconds are cleared to 00 and the rest of the time setting is left unchanged. When the seconds are 30 to

59, the seconds are cleared to 00 and the time is incremented by one minute.

Clock Stop Bit

Turn this bit ON to stop the clock. The time/date can be overwritten while this bit is ON.

Clock Set Bit

To change the time/date, turn ON AR 2114, write the new time/date (being sure to leave AR 2114

ON), and then turn this bit ON to enable a new time/date setting. The clock will restart and both

AR 2114 and AR 2115 will be turned OFF automatically.

00 to 15 Not used.

00 to 15 Power-off Counter (4 digits BCD)

This is the count of the number of times that the power has been turned off.

To clear the count, write “0000” from a Programming Device.

Note 1.

The same data can be read immediately with PRV(62).

The time and date can be set while AR 2114 is ON. The new setting becomes effective when AR 2115 is turned ON. (AR 2114 and AR 2115 are turned OFF automatically when the new setting goes into effect.)

The units for the maximum and current cycle times are determined by the setting in bits 08 to 15 of DM 6618. A setting of 00 specifies 0.1-ms units,

01 specifies 0.1-ms units, 02 specifies 1-ms units, and 03 specifies 10-ms units.

4-6 PC Setup

4-6-1 Overview

Changing PC Setup

Settings

CPU Unit Access of PC

Setup Settings

PC Setup Errors

The PC Setup (DM 6600 to DM 6655) contains various settings that control

PC operation. Changes to the PC Setup are saved when the CPM2C-S is turned OFF, program execution is started, or program execution is stopped.

Always perform one of the following operations after changing the PC Setup:

• Switch the CPM2C-S to MONITOR mode or RUN mode.

• Turn the CPM2C-S OFF and then ON again.

The PC Setup (DM 6600 to DM 6655) can be edited from a Programming

Device. The settings in DM 6600 to DM 6644 can be changed only when the

PC is in PROGRAM mode. The settings in DM 6645 to DM 6655 can be changed when the PC is in PROGRAM mode or MONITOR mode, although the PC’s cycle time will be quite long when the settings are changed in MONI-

TOR mode.

The CPM2C-S CPU Unit reads parts of the PC Setup at different points of PC operation. The CPU Unit timing is as follows:

DM 6600 to DM 6614: Read once when the PC is turned ON.

DM 6615 to DM 6644: Read once at the start of program execution.

DM 6645 to DM 6655: Read regularly while the PC is ON.

If there is an error in the PC Setup settings, a non-fatal error (error code 9B) will be generated when the CPU Unit accesses that part of the PC Setup. The

PC Setup Error Flags (AR 1300 to AR 1302) indicate the part of the PC Setup where the error is located. The default setting (usually 0000) is used instead of the incorrect setting.

PC Setup Section 4-6

4-6-2 PC Setup Settings

Word(s) Bit(s) Function

PC Startup Processing (DM 6600 to DM 6614)

The following settings are read by the CPU when the PC is turned ON.

DM 6600 00 to 07 Startup mode (effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 02).

00 (Hex): PROGRAM; 01 (Hex): MONITOR; 02 (Hex): RUN

DM 6601

08 to 15 Startup mode designation

00 (Hex): According to the setting on DIP switch pin 4 and peripheral port connection

(See table at the bottom of this page.)

01 (Hex): Continue operating mode last used before power was turned OFF.

02 (Hex): Use setting in bits 00 to 07.

00 to 07 Not used.

08 to 11 IOM Hold Bit (SR 25212) Status at Startup

0 (Hex): Reset to 0; 1 (Hex): Maintain previous status

12 to 15 Forced Status Hold Bit (SR 25211) Status at Startup

0 (Hex): Reset to 0; 1 (Hex): Maintain previous status

DM 6602

DM 6603

DM 6604

DM 6605

DM 6606

DM 6607

00 to 03 Program memory write-protection

0 (Hex): Program memory unprotected

1 (Hex): Program memory write-protected (except DM 6602 itself)

04 to 07 Programming Console display language

0 (Hex): English; 1 (Hex): Japanese

08 to 11 Expansion instruction function code assignments

0 (Hex): Default settings

1 (Hex): User assignments

12 to 15 Not used.

00 to 03 Maximum number of CompoBus/S nodes

0 (Hex): 256-point mode (32 nodes)

1 (Hex): 128-point mode (16 nodes)

04 to 07 CompoBus/S communications mode

0 (Hex): High-speed mode

1 (Hex): Long-distance mode

08 to 15 Not used.

00 to 07 00 (Hex): A memory error will not be generated if data could not be retained by the battery.

01 (Hex): A memory error will be generated if data could not be retained by the battery.

08 to 15 Not used.

00 to 03 DeviceNet Read/Write area settings

0 (Hex): Read area (IN) IR 020 to IR 027; Write area (OUT) IR 030 to IR 037

1 (Hex): Use settings in DM 6606 to DM 6609.

04 to 07 Transmission of CPM2C-S status to the DeviceNet Master

0 (Hex): Attach status information ahead of data.

1 (Hex): Do not attach status information ahead of data.

08 to 15 Not used.

00 to 07 DeviceNet I/O Link Write

(OUT) area settings

(Master → CPM2C-S)

Data area

01 (Hex): I/O area 1 (IR 000 to IR 049)

02 (Hex): I/O area 2 (IR 200 to IR 227)

03 (Hex): DM area (DM 0000 to DM 2047)

04 (Hex): LR area (LR 00 to LR 15)

05 (Hex): HR area (HR 00 to HR 19)

07 (Hex): Timer/counter area (TC 000 to TC 255)

08 to 15

00 to 15

Number of bytes

01 to 40 (Hex) (equivalent to 0 to 64 decimal)

Starting word address

0000 to 07FF (Hex) (equivalent to 0000 to 2047 decimal)

100

PC Setup Section 4-6

Word(s)

DM 6608

DM 6609

DM 6610 to

DM 6614

Bit(s)

00 to 07 DeviceNet I/O Link Read

(IN) area settings

(CPM2C-S → Master)

08 to 15

00 to 15

00 to 15 Not used.

Function

Data area

01 (Hex): I/O area 1 (IR 000 to IR 049)

02 (Hex): I/O area 2 (IR 200 to IR 227)

03 (Hex): DM area (DM 0000 to DM 2047)

04 (Hex): LR area (LR 00 to LR 15)

05 (Hex): HR area (HR 00 to HR 19)

06 (Hex): AR area (AR 00 to 23)

07 (Hex): Timer/counter area (TC 000 to TC 255)

Number of bytes

01 to 40 (Hex) (equivalent to 0 to 64 decimal)

Starting word address

0000 to 07FF (Hex) (equivalent to 0000 to 2047 decimal)

Not used.

Note The startup operating mode will be as shown in the following table if bits 08 to

15 of DM 6600 are set to 00.

Connected

Programming Device

None

Programming Console

Other Device

Startup operating mode

DIP switch pin 4 ON DIP switch pin 4 OFF

PROGRAM RUN

Mode set on Programming Console mode switch

PROGRAM

Word(s) Bit(s) Function

Cycle Time Settings (DM 6615 to DM 6619)

The following settings are read by the CPU when program execution is started.

DM 6615

DM 6616

DM 6617

00 to 15 Not used.

00 to 07 Servicing time for RS-232C port (Effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 01.)

00 to 99 (BCD): Percentage of cycle time used to service RS-232C port.

08 to 15 RS-232C port servicing setting enable

00 (Hex): 5% of the cycle time

01 (Hex): Use time in bits 00 to 07.

00 to 07 Servicing time for peripheral port (Effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 01.)

00 to 99 (BCD): Percentage of cycle time used to service peripheral.

DM 6618

DM 6619

08 to 15 Peripheral port servicing setting enable

00 (Hex): 5% of the cycle time

01 (Hex): Use time in bits 00 to 07.

00 to 07 Cycle monitor time (Effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 01, 02, or 03.)

00 to 99 (BCD): Setting (See bits 08 to 15, below.)

A fatal error will be generated and PC operation will stop if the cycle time exceeds the cycle monitor time set here.

08 to 15 Cycle monitor enable (Setting in 00 to 07 × units; 99 s max.)

00 (Hex): 120 ms (setting in bits 00 to 07 disabled)

01 (Hex): Setting units: 10 ms

02 (Hex): Setting units: 100 ms

03 (Hex): Setting units: 1 s

00 to 15 Minimum cycle time

0000: Variable (no minimum)

0001 to 9999 (BCD): Minimum time in ms

101

PC Setup Section 4-6

Word(s)

Interrupt Processing (DM 6620 to DM 6639)

The following settings are read by the CPU when program execution is started.

DM 6620

Bit(s) Function

00 to 03 Input time constant for IR 00000 to IR 00002

0 (Hex): 10 ms; 1 (Hex): 1 ms; 2 (Hex): 2 ms; 3 (Hex): 3 ms; 4 (Hex): 5 ms;

5 (Hex): 10 ms; 6 (Hex): 20 ms; 7 (Hex): 40 ms; 8 (Hex): 80 ms

04 to 07 Input time constant for IR 00003 and IR 00004 (Setting same as bits 00 to 03)

08 to 11 Input time constant for IR 00005 (Setting same as bits 00 to 03)

12 to 15 Not used.

DM 6621

DM 6622

DM 6623

DM 6624

00 to 07 Input time constant for IR 001

00 (Hex): 10 ms 01 (Hex): 1 ms 02 (Hex): 2 ms 03 (Hex): 3 ms 04 (Hex): 5 ms

05 (Hex): 10 ms 06 (Hex): 20 ms 07 (Hex): 40 ms 08 (Hex): 80 ms

08 to 15 Input constant for IR 002 (Setting same as for IR 001.)

00 to 07 Input constant for IR 003 (Setting same as for IR 001.)

08 to 15 Input constant for IR 004 (Setting same as for IR 001.)

00 to 07 Input constant for IR 005 (Setting same as for IR 001.)

08 to 15 Input constant for IR 006 (Setting same as for IR 001.)

00 to 07 Input constant for IR 007 (Setting same as for IR 001.)

08 to 15 Input constant for IR 008 (Setting same as for IR 001.)

DM 6625 00 to 07 Input constant for IR 009 (Setting same as for IR 001.)

08 to 15 Not used.

00 to 15 Not used.

DM 6626 to

DM 6627

DM 6628

DM 6629

00 to 03 Function selection for input bit IR 00003

0 (Hex): Used as a normal input.

1 (Hex): Used as an interrupt input (including counter mode).

2 (Hex): Used as a quick-response input.

04 to 07 Function selection for input bit IR 00004 (Setting same as for IR 00003.)

08 to 15 Not used.

00 to 03 PV coordinate system for pulse output 0

0 (Hex): Relative coordinates; 1 (Hex): Absolute coordinates

04 to 07 PV coordinate system for pulse output 1

0 (Hex): Relative coordinates; 1 (Hex): Absolute coordinates

DM 6630 to

DM 6639

08 to 15 Not used.

00 to 15 Not used.

High-speed Counter Settings (DM 6640 to DM 6644)

The following settings are read by the CPU when program execution is started.

00 to 15 Not used.

DM 6640 to

DM 6641

DM 6642 00 to 03 High-speed counter mode

0 (Hex): Differential phase mode (5 kHz)

1 (Hex): Pulse + direction input mode (20 kHz)

2 (Hex): Up/down input mode (20 kHz)

4 (Hex): Increment mode (20 kHz)

DM 6643,

DM 6644

04 to 07 High-speed counter reset mode

0: Z phase and software reset; 1: Software reset only

08 to 15 High-speed counter/Synchronized pulse control for IR 00000 to IR 00002

00 (Hex): Don’t use either function.

01 (Hex): Use as high-speed counters.

02 (Hex): Use for synchronized pulse control (10 to 500 Hz).

03 (Hex): Use for synchronized pulse control (20 Hz to 1 kHz).

04 (Hex): Use for synchronized pulse control (300 Hz to 20 kHz).

00 to 15 Not used.

102

PC Setup Section 4-6

Word(s) Bit(s) Function

RS-232C Port Communications Settings

The following settings are read regularly by the CPU while the PC is ON.

If pin 3 of the CPM2C-S CPU Unit’s DIP switch is ON, communications through the CPM2C-S’ RS-232C port are governed by the default settings (all 0) regardless of the settings in DM 6645 through DM 6649.

DM 6645 00 to 03 Port settings

0 (Hex): Standard (1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, 9,600 bps),

Host Link unit number: 0

1 (Hex): Settings in DM 6646

(Any other setting will cause a non-fatal error and AR 1302 will turn ON.)

04 to 07 CTS control setting

0 (Hex): Disable CTS control; 1 (Hex): Enable CTS control

(Any other setting will cause a non-fatal error and AR 1302 will turn ON.)

08 to 11 Link words for 1:1 data link

0 (Hex): LR 00 to LR 15 (Any other settings are ineffective.)

DM 6646

DM 6647

DM 6648

DM 6649

12 to 15 Communications mode

0 (Hex): Host Link; 1 (Hex): No-protocol; 2 (Hex): 1:1 PC Link Slave;

3 (Hex): 1:1 PC Link Master; 4 (Hex): NT Link

(Any other setting causes a non-fatal error and turns ON AR 1302.)

00 to 07 Baud rate

00 (Hex): 1,200 bps; 01 (Hex): 2,400 bps; 02 (Hex): 4,800 bps;

03 (Hex): 9,600 bps; 04 (Hex): 19,200 bps

08 to 15 Frame format

00 (Hex):

01 (Hex):

02 (Hex):

03 (Hex):

04 (Hex):

05 (Hex):

06 (Hex):

07 (Hex):

08 (Hex):

09 (Hex):

10 (Hex):

11 (Hex):

Start bits

1 bit

Data bits

7 bits

8 bits

Stop bits

1 bit

2 bits

1 bit

2 bits

Parity

Even

Odd

None

Even

Odd

None

Even

Odd

None

Even

Odd

None

(Any other setting specifies standard settings (1 start bit, 7 data bits; even parity, 2 stop bits,

9,600 bps), causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR 1302.)

00 to 15 Transmission delay (0000 to 9999 BCD sets a delay of 0 to 99,990 ms.)

(Any other setting specifies a delay of 0 ms, causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR 1302.)

00 to 07 Node number (Host Link)

00 to 31 (BCD)

(Any other setting specifies a node number of 00, causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR

1302.)

08 to 11 Start code selection for no-protocol communications

0 (Hex): Disables start code; 1 (Hex): Enables start code in DM 6649

(Any other setting disables the start code, causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR 1302.)

12 to 15 End code selection for no-protocol communications

0 (Hex): Disables end code; 1 (Hex): Enables end code in DM 6649;

2 (Hex): Sets end code of CR, LF.

(Any other setting disables the end code, causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR 1302.)

00 to 07 Start code (00 to FF)

(This setting is valid only when bits 8 to 11 of DM 6648 are set to 1.)

08 to 15 When bits 12 to 15 of DM 6648 set to 0:

Sets the number of bytes to receive. (00: 256 bytes; 01 to FF: 1 to 255 bytes)

When bits 12 to 15 of DM 6648 set to 1:

Sets the end code. (00 to FF)

103

PC Setup Section 4-6

Word(s) Bit(s) Function

Peripheral Port Communications Settings

The following settings are read regularly by the CPU while the PC is ON.

If pin 3 of the CPM2C-S CPU Unit’s DIP switch is ON, communications through the CPM2C-S’ peripheral port are governed by the default settings (all 0) regardless of the settings in DM 6650 through DM 6651.

When connecting a computer running OMRON Support Software to the peripheral bus, turn OFF pin 3 of the DIP switch and set DM 6650 to 0001 (host link port settings specified in DM 6651). The computer cannot be connected to the peripheral bus if bits 00 to 03 of DM 6650 are set to 0 (standard port settings).

DM 6650

DM 6651

00 to 03 Port settings

00 (Hex): Standard (1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, 9,600 bps),

Host Link unit number: 0

01 (Hex): Settings in DM 6651

(Any other setting specifies standard settings, causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR 1302.)

04 to 11 Not used.

12 to 15 Communications mode

0 (Hex): Host Link or peripheral bus; 1 (Hex): No-protocol

(Any other setting specifies Host Link, causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR 1302.)

00 to 07 Baud rate

00 (Hex): 1,200 bps; 01 (Hex): 2,400 bps; 02 (Hex): 4,800 bps;

03 (Hex): 9,600 bps; 04 (Hex): 19,200 bps

DM 6652

DM 6653

DM 6654

08 to 15 Frame format

Start bits

00 (Hex): 1 bit

01 (Hex): 1 bit

02 (Hex): 1 bit

03 (Hex): 1 bit

04 (Hex): 1 bit

05 (Hex): 1 bit

06 (Hex): 1 bit

07 (Hex): 1 bit

08 (Hex): 1 bit

09 (Hex): 1 bit

10 (Hex): 1 bit

11 (Hex): 1 bit

Data bits

7 bits

8 bits

Stop bits

1 bit

2 bits

1 bit

2 bits

Parity

Even

Odd

None

Even

Odd

None

Even

Odd

None

Even

Odd

None

(Any other setting specifies standard settings (1 start bit, 7 data bits; even parity, 2 stop bits,

9,600 bps), causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR 1302.)

00 to 15 Transmission delay (0000 to 9999 BCD sets a delay of 0 to 99,990 ms.)

(Any other setting specifies a delay of 0 ms, causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR 1302.)

00 to 07 Node number (Host Link)

00 to 31 (BCD)

(Any other setting specifies a node number of 00, causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON

AR 1302.)

08 to 11 Start code selection for no-protocol communications

0 (Hex): Disables start code; 1 (Hex): Enables start code in DM 6649

(Any other setting disables the start code, causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR 1302.)

12 to 15 End code selection for no-protocol communications

0 (Hex): Disables end code; 1 (Hex): Enables end code in DM 6649;

2 (Hex): Sets end code of CR, LF.

(Any other setting disables the end code, causes a non-fatal error, and turns ON AR 1302.)

00 to 07 Start code (00 to FF)

(This setting is valid only when bits 8 to 11 of DM 6648 are set to 1.)

08 to 15 When bits 12 to 15 of DM 6648 set to 0:

Sets the number of bytes to receive. (00: 256 bytes; 01 to FF: 1 to 255 bytes)

When bits 12 to 15 of DM 6648 set to 1:

Sets the end code. (00 to FF)

104

Basic PC Operation and I/O Processes Section 4-7

Word(s)

Error Log Settings (DM 6655)

The following settings are read regularly by the CPU while the PC is ON.

DM 6655

Bit(s) Function

00 to 03 Style

0 (Hex): Shift after 7 records have been stored

1 (Hex): Store only first 7 records (no shifting)

2 to F (Hex): Do not store records

04 to 07 Not used.

08 to 11 Cycle time monitor enable

0 (Hex): Generate a non-fatal error for a cycle time that is too long.

1 (Hex): Do not generate a non-fatal error.

12 to 15 Low battery error enable

0 (Hex): Generate a non-fatal error for low battery voltage.

1 (Hex): Do not generate a non-fatal error.

Note If an out-of-range value is set, the following communications conditions will result. In that case, reset the value so that it is within the permissible range.

Communications mode: Host Link

Communications format: Standard settings

(1 start bit, 7-bit data; even parity, 2 stop bits,

9,600 bps)

Transmission delay: No

Node number: 00

4-7 Basic PC Operation and I/O Processes

This section explains the PC Setup settings related to basic operation and I/O processes.

4-7-1 Startup Mode

The operating mode the PC will start in when power is turned on can be set as shown below.

Bit

DM6600

15 0

Startup Mode Designation

00 (Hex): See note below.

01 (Hex): Operating mode last used before power was turned OFF

02 (Hex): Mode set in bits 00 to 07

Startup Mode (Bits 08 to 15: Valid when bits 00 to 07 are set to 02)

00 (Hex): PROGRAM mode

01 (Hex): MONITOR mode

02 (Hex): RUN mode

Note When the “startup mode designation” is set to 00, the operating mode at startup depends upon the connected Programming Device and the setting on pin

4 of the CPM2C-S CPU Unit’s DIP switch.

Refer to

1-3-3 Operating Mode at Startup

for complete details.

105

Basic PC Operation and I/O Processes Section 4-7

4-7-2 Hold Bit Status

Make the settings shown below to determine whether, when the power supply is turned on, the Forced Status Hold Bit (SR 25211) and/or IOM Hold Bit

(SR 25212) will retain the status that was in effect when the power was last turned off, or whether the previous status will be cleared.

Bit

DM6601

0 0

SR 25211 setting

0 (Hex): Clear status

1 (Hex): Retain status

SR 25212 setting

0 (Hex): Clear status

1 (Hex): Retain status

Always 00

Default: Clear both.

The Forced Status Hold Bit (SR 25211) determines whether or not the forced set/reset status is retained when changing from PROGRAM mode to MONI-

TOR mode.

The IOM Hold Bit (SR 25212) determines whether or not the status of IR bits and LR bits is retained when PC operation is started and stopped.

4-7-3 Program Memory Write-protection

In CPM2C-S PCs, the program memory can be protected by setting bits 00 to

03 of DM 6602 to 1. Bits 04 to 07 determine whether Programming Console messages are displayed in English or Japanese.

Bit

DM6602

Always 00

Expansion instruction function code assignments

0 (Hex): Default settings

1 (Hex): User assignments

Programming Console messages

0 (Hex): English

1 (Hex): Japanese

Program memory

0 (Hex): Not write-protected

1 (Hex): Write-protected

Default: English displays, not write-protected

Note DM 6602 itself can still be changed after the program memory has been writeprotected by setting bits 04 to 07 of DM 6602 to 1.

106

Basic PC Operation and I/O Processes Section 4-7

4-7-4 RS-232C Port Servicing Time

The following settings are used to determine the percentage of the cycle time devoted to servicing the RS-232C port.

Bit 15

DM6616

Servicing time setting enable

00 (Hex): Disabled (5% used)

01 (Hex): Enabled (setting in bits 00 to 07 used)

Servicing time (%, valid with bits 08 to 15 are 01)

00 to 99 (BCD, two digits)

Default: 5% of cycle time

For example, if DM 6616 is set to 0110, the RS-232C port will be serviced for

10% of the cycle time.

The servicing time will be 0.34 ms minimum.

The entire servicing time will not be used unless processing requests exist.

4-7-5 Peripheral Port Servicing Time

The following settings are used to determine the percentage of the cycle time devoted to servicing the peripheral port.

Bit 15

DM6617

Servicing time setting enable

00 (Hex): Disabled (5% used)

01 (Hex): Enabled (setting in bits 00 to 07 used)

Servicing time (%, valid with bits 08 to 15 are 01)

00 to 99 (BCD, two digits)

Default: 5% of cycle time

For example, if DM 6617 is set to 0115, the peripheral port will be serviced for

15% of the cycle time.

The servicing time will be 0.34 ms minimum.

The entire servicing time will not be used unless processing requests exist.

4-7-6 Cycle Monitor Time

Bit 15

DM6618

Cycle Monitor Time Enable and Units

00 (Hex): Setting disabled (time fixed at 120 ms)

01 (Hex): Setting in 00 to 07 enabled; units:10 ms

02 (Hex): Setting in 00 to 07 enabled; units:100 ms

03 (Hex): Setting in 00 to 07 enabled; units:1 s

Cycle monitor time setting (When bits 08 to 15 are not 00)

00 to 99 (2 digits BCD; units set in bits 08 to 15.)

Default: 120 ms.

107

Basic PC Operation and I/O Processes Section 4-7

Note

The cycle monitor time is used for checking for extremely long cycle times, as can happen when the program goes into an infinite loop. If the cycle time exceeds the cycle monitor setting, a fatal error (FALS 9F) will be generated.

The units used for the maximum and current cycle times recorded in the

AR area (AR 14 and AR 15) are determined by the setting for the cycle monitor time in DM 6618, as shown below.

Bits 08 to 15 set to 01 (Hex):0.1 ms

Bits 08 to 15 set to 02 (Hex):1 ms

Bits 08 to 15 set to 03 (Hex):10 ms

If the cycle time is 1 s or longer, the cycle time read from Programming Devices will be 999.9 ms. The correct maximum and current cycle times will be recorded in the AR area.

Example

If 0230 is set in DM 6618, an FALS 9F error will not occur until the cycle time exceeds 3 s. If the actual cycle time is 2.59 s, the current cycle time stored in the AR area will be 2590 (ms), but the cycle time read from a Programming

Device will be 999.9 ms.

A “cycle time over” error (non-fatal) will be generated when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms unless detection of long cycle times is disabled using the setting in DM 6655.

4-7-7 Minimum Cycle Time

Make the settings shown below to standardize the cycle time and to eliminate variations in I/O response time by setting a minimum cycle time.

Bit

DM6619

15 0

Cycle time (4 digits BCD)

0000:Cycle time variable

0001 to 9999: Minimum cycle time (Unit: 1 ms)

Default: Cycle time variable

If the actual cycle time is shorter than the minimum cycle time, execution will wait until the minimum time has expired. If the actual cycle time is longer than the minimum cycle time, then operation will proceed according to the actual cycle time. AR 2405 will turn ON if the minimum cycle time is exceeded.

4-7-8 Input Time Constants

Make the settings shown below to set the time from when the actual inputs from the DC Input Unit are turned ON or OFF until the corresponding input bits are updated (i.e., until their ON/OFF status is changed). Make these settings when you want to adjust the time until inputs stabilize.

Increasing the input time constant can reduce the effects from chattering and external noise.

Input from an input device such as a limit switch

Input bit status t t

Input time constant

Use a Programming Device to set the input time constants.

108

Basic PC Operation and I/O Processes Section 4-7

Input Time Constants for IR 000

Bit 15

DM 6620

Not used.

Time constant for IR 00005 (1 digit BCD; see below.)

Time constant for IR 00003 to IR 00004 (1 digit BCD; see below.)

Time constant for IR 00000 to IR 00002 (1 digit BCD; see below.)

Default: 0000 (8 ms for each)

Input Time Constants for IR 001 to IR 009

DM 6621: IR 001 and IR 002

DM 6622: IR 003 and IR 004

DM 6623: IR 005 and IR 006

DM 6624: IR 007 and IR 008

DM 6625: IR 009

Bit

DM 6621 to DM 6625

15 0

Time constant for IR 002, IR 004, IR 006, and IR 008

Time constant for IR 001, IR 003, IR 005, IR 007, and IR 009

Default: 0000 (8 ms for each)

The nine possible settings for the input time constant are shown below. (Set only the rightmost digit for each setting for IR 000.)

00 (Hex): 8 ms 01 (Hex): 1 ms 02 (Hex): 2 ms

03 (Hex): 4 ms 04 (Hex): 8 ms 05 (Hex): 16 ms

06 (Hex): 32 ms 07 (Hex): 64 ms08 (Hex): 128 ms

4-7-9 Error Log Settings

Error Detection and Error Log Operation (DM 6655)

Make the settings shown below to determine whether or not a non-fatal error is to be generated when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms or when the voltage of the built-in battery drops, and to set the method for storing records in the error log when errors occur.

Bit

DM6655

Low battery voltage detection

0 (Hex): Detect

1 (Hex): Don't detect

Always

Cycle time over detection

0 (Hex): Detect

1 (Hex): Don't detect

Error log storage method

0 (Hex): Error records for the 7 most recent errors always stored (older errors deleted).

1 (Hex): Only the first 7 error records stored (no errors stored beyond that point).

2 to F (Hex): Error records not stored.

Default: Low battery voltage and cycle time over errors detected, and error records stored for the 7 most recent errors.

Battery errors and cycle time overrun errors are non-fatal errors.

Refer to

4-8 Error Log

below for details on the error log.

109

Error Log Section 4-8

4-8 Error Log

DM 2000

DM 2021

DM 2022

DM 2023 to

DM 2019

DM 2020

DM 2021

Error log pointer

Error log record 1

(3 words used.)

The error log function registers the error code of any fatal or non-fatal error that occurs in the PC. The date and time at which the error occurred are registered along with the error code.

In CPM2C-S PCs, the error log is stored in DM 2000 through DM 2021. Up to

7 error records can be stored.

Indicates the number of records stored in the log (0 to 7).

A 0 indicates no records.

Error log record 7

(3 words used.)

Each error log record is configured as follows:

15 8 7

Leading word

Leading word + 1

Leading word + 2

Error classification

Min

Day

Error code

Sec

Hour

Error classification: 00: Non-fatal

80: Fatal

Each stored in

2 digits BCD.

Note An error record with an error code of 00 will be stored in the error log for power interruptions. Refer to

9-2 Self-diagnostic Functions

for tables listing the error codes.

Error Log Storage Methods

The error log storage method is set in the PC Setup (bits 00 to 03 of DM

6655). Set any of the following methods.

1,2,3...

Set 0 in bits 00 to 03 of DM 6655. (This is the default setting.)

This method stores the most recent 7 error log records and discards older records. This is achieved by shifting the records as shown below so that the oldest record (record 0) is lost whenever a new record is generated.

Lost

Error log record 1

Error log record 2

All records shifted

Error log record 6

Error log record 7

New record added

Set 1 in bits 00 to 03 of DM 6655.

This method stores only the first 7 error log records, and ignores any subsequent errors beyond those 7.

Set another value (other than 0 or 1) in bits 00 to 03 of DM 6655.

A setting other than 0 or 1 disables the log so that no records are stored.

Clearing the Error Log

To clear the entire error log, turn ON SR 25214 from a Programming Device.

(After the error log has been cleared, SR 25214 will turn OFF again automatically.)

110

SECTION 5 Exchanging Data with CompoBus/S Slaves

This section explains how to exchange data with CompoBus/S Slaves when using the CPM2C-S as a CompoBus/S Master.

Read this section when using CompoBus/S I/O link communications.

5-1 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1-1 Setting the Maximum Number of Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1-2 Setting the CompoBus/S Communications Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2 Remote I/O Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2-1 Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2-2 I/O Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3 Communications Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111

Initial Settings Section 5-1

5-1 Initial Settings

5-1-1 Setting the Maximum Number of Nodes

The maximum number of Slaves that can be connected through CompoBus/S can be set to 16 or 32 Slaves.

CompoBus/S communications path

Terminator

Word Bits

DM 6603 00 to 03

Slave Slave Slave

16 or 32 Slaves max.

Use a Programming Device to set the maximum number of Slaves in

DM 6603 of the PC Setup, as shown in the following table.

Function

Sets the max. number of Compo-

Bus/S Slaves to 16 or 32.

0 (Hex): 32 Slaves

1 (Hex): 16 Slaves

Note

Settings

0 or 1

Default

(32 Slaves)

Always turn the power OFF and ON again after changing this setting.

The communications response time is affected by the max. number of

Slaves setting as shown below.

Communications mode

High-speed mode

Long-distance mode

Max. number of Slaves

Communications response time

0.5 ms

0.8 ms

4.0 ms

6.0 ms

5-1-2 Setting the CompoBus/S Communications Mode

The CompoBus/S communications mode can be set to high-speed mode or long-distance mode.

Communications mode

Max. communications distance (trunk line length)

High-speed mode 100 m

Long-distance mode 500 m

Communications speed

750 kbps

93.75 kbps

Use a Programming Device to set the maximum number of Slaves in

DM 6603 of the PC Setup, as shown in the following table.

Word Bits

DM 6603 04 to 07

Function

Sets the CompoBus/S communications mode.

0 (Hex): High-speed mode

1 (Hex): Long-distance mode

Settings

0 or 1

Default

(High-speed)

Note Always turn the power OFF and ON again after changing this setting.

112

Remote I/O Communications Section 5-2

5-2 Remote I/O Communications

5-2-1 Slaves

The following table lists the commonly used Slaves. Refer to the CompoBus/S

Operation Manual (W266) for more details. The SRT1-series Slaves support high-speed communications mode only. The SRT2-series Slaves support both high-speed and long-distance communications modes.

Name

I/O Terminals

(Transistor)

Connector Terminals

(Transistor)

Output Terminals

(Relay outputs)

Output Terminals

(Power MOSFET outputs)

I/O Modules

Analog Terminals

SRT2-series

SRT2-ID04

SRT2-ID04-1

SRT2-ID08

SRT2-ID08-1

SRT2-ID16

SRT2-ID16-1

SRT2-ID16T

SRT2-ID16T-1

SRT2-OD04

SRT2-OD04-1

SRT2-OD08

SRT2-OD08-1

SRT2-OD16

SRT2-OD16-1

SRT2-OD16T

SRT2-OD16T-1

SRT2-MD16T

SRT2-MD16T-1

SRT2-VID08S

SRT2-VID08S-1

SRT2-VID16ML

SRT2-VID16ML-1

SRT2-ID32ML

SRT2-ID32ML-1

SRT2-VOD08S

SRT2-VOD08S-1

SRT2-VOD16ML

SRT2-VOD16ML-1

SRT2-OD32ML

SRT2-OD32ML-1

SRT2-MD32ML

SRT2-MD32ML-1

SRT2-ROC08

SRT2-ROC16

SRT2-ROF08

SRT2-ROF16

Not available

SRT1-series

SRT1-ID04

SRT1-ID04-1

SRT1-ID08

SRT1-ID08-1

SRT1-ID16

SRT1-ID16-1

Not available

SRT1-OD04

SRT1-OD04-1

SRT1-OD08

SRT1-OD08-1

SRT1-OD16

SRT1-OD16-1

Not available

SRT1-ROC08

SRT1-ROC16

SRT1-ROF08

SRT1-ROF16

SRT1-ID16P

SRT1-OD16P

Not available

Sensor Amplifier Terminals

SRT2-AD04

SRT2-DA02

Not available

Sensor Terminals Not available

SRT1-TID04S

SRT1-XID04S

SRT1-ID08S

SRT1-OD08S

SRT1-ND08S

113

Remote I/O Communications Section 5-2

Name

Bit-chain Terminal

SRT2-series

Not available

Environment Resistive Terminals SRT2-ID04CL

SRT2-ID04CL-1

SRT2-ID08

SRT2-ID08CL-1

SRT2-OD04CL

SRT2-OD04CL-1

SRT2-OD08CL

SRT2-OD08CL-1

SRT1-series

SRT1-B1T

Not available

5-2-2 I/O Allocation

Note

In the CPM2C-S, CompoBus/S input words IR 020 to IR 027 and CompoBus/

S output words IR 030 to IR 037 are allocated for the CompoBus/S Terminal’s

I/O. The CompoBus/S Terminal’s I/O (IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15) are allocated as indicated in the following table.

IN0 to IN15 are the node addresses for the Input Terminals and OUT0 to

OUT15 are the node addresses for the Output Terminals.

Word

Input IR 020

IR 021

IR 022

IR 023

IR 024

IR 025

IR 026

IR 027

Output IR 030

IR 031

IR 032

IR 033

IR 034

IR 035

IR 036

IR 037

Relay numbers

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

IN1 IN0

IN3

IN5

IN7

IN9

IN2

IN4

IN6

IN8

IN11

IN13

IN15

OUT1

OUT3

OUT5

OUT7

OUT9

OUT11

OUT13

OUT15

IN10

IN12

IN14

OUT0

OUT2

OUT4

OUT6

OUT8

OUT10

OUT12

OUT14

When the maximum number of CompoBus/S nodes is set to 16, IN8 to

IN15 and OUT8 to OUT15 can be used as work bits.

CompoBus/S Terminals with less than 8 points are allocated bit addresses from either 0 or 8, filling up from the lowest available word.

CompoBus/S Terminals with 16 points can be set for only even number addresses.

114

Communications Status Section 5-3

5-3 Communications Status

The status of communications with CompoBus/S Terminals is indicated with the status flags in AR 04 through AR 07. Bits 0 to 7 contain the Active Slave

Flags and bits 8 to 15 contain the Slave Communications Error Flags.

Word Uppermost bits: Slave Communications Error Flags

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6

Lower Bits: Active Slave Flags

5 4 3 2 1 0

AR04 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0

AR05 IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN0 IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN0

AR06 OUT

OUT

AR07 IN15 IN14 IN13 IN12 IN11 IN10

OUT

IN9

OUT

IN8 IN15 IN14 IN13 IN12 IN11 IN10

OUT

IN9

OUT

IN8

Note 1.

IN0 to IN15 are the input terminals and OUT0 to OUT15 are the output terminals.

When the maximum number of CompoBus/S units is set to 16, IN8 to IN15 and OUT8 to OUT15 cannot be used.

Each Active Slave Flag is turned ON when the corresponding Slave is participating in communications. When the power to the CPU Unit is turned

OFF and ON again all of the Active Slave Flags are turned OFF.

Each Slave Communications Error Flag is turned ON when a Slave that was participating in the network is separated from the network. The bit is turned OFF when the Slave re-enters the network.

An error is not generated at the CPM2C-S if there are duplicated node address settings for Slaves or if there is a communications error, such as communications failure or a disconnection. Therefore, use the above status flags in the ladder program to confirm whether or not node addresses are set correctly, and whether or not Slaves are operating correctly.

115

Communications Status

CPM2C-S

Example

Section 5-3

CompoBus/S communications path

Disconnection (2)

IR 000

Bits 00 to 07

Slave 1

Node 0 (IN0)

IR 001

Bits 00 to 07

Slave 2

Node 2 (IN2)

00000 (Slave 1 input)

00100 (Slave 2 input)

20000

20100

IR 000

Bits 00 to 07

Slave 3

Node 0 (IN0)

Node address duplication (1)

If the addresses for Slave 1 and Slave 3 are the same, the Master will not be able to read input from Slave 3.

If a communications error is generated, the status of IR 00100 will be the same as before the error and so the change in the status of the actual input will not be detected.

• Example of Countermeasure in Ladder Program

AR0500

(IN0's Active Flag)

AR0508

(IN0's Error Flag)

02800 (Slave 1 communications normal)

00000 02800

20000

AR0502

(IN2's Active Flag)

AR0510

(IN2's Error Flag)

02900 (Slave 2 communications normal)

00100 02900

20100

116

SECTION 6 Exchanging Data with a DeviceNet Master

This section explains how to exchange data with a CPM2C-S100C-DRT or CPM2C-S110C-DRT DeviceNet Master. Refer to this section when using remote I/O communications or explicit message communications from a DeviceNet Master.

6-1 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1-1 Setting the Node Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1-2 Setting the Communications Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1-3 Attaching Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2 Remote I/O Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3 Explicit Message Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3-1 DeviceNet Explicit Message Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3-2 Command and Response Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3-3 Examples of DeviceNet Explicit Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4 Status Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4-1 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4-2 AR Area Flags indicating DeviceNet Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4-3 CPM2C-S Status Output to DeviceNet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

117

Initial Settings Section 6-1

6-1 Initial Settings

6-1-1 Setting the Node Number

Set the DeviceNet node number with the rotary switches on the front of the

Unit. The allowed setting range is 00 to 63; node number settings 64 to 99 are not allowed. The rotary switch settings are read when the Unit’s power is turned ON.

6-1-2 Setting the Communications Speed

Set the DeviceNet communications speed with DIP switch 2 on the front of the

Unit. The DIP switch settings are read when the Unit’s power is turned ON.

DIP switch 2 settings

Pin 1

OFF

Pin 2

OFF

DeviceNet communications speed

125 kbps

250 kbps

500 kbps

Not used.

Maximum total communications distance

500 m max.

250 m max.

100 m max.

---

6-1-3 Attaching Status Information

It is possible to enable and disable the attachment of the CPM2C-S status information in transmissions from the CPM2C-S to the Master Unit.

The status attachment is set in DM 6605 of the PC Setup, as shown in the following table. The initial setting is 0 (attach status information); change this setting to 1 to disable attachment of status information. Refer to

6-4 Status

Information for details on the status information.

Word Bits Function

DM 6605 04 to 07 Sets whether CPM2C-S status is transmitted to the DeviceNet Master.

0 (Hex): Attach status ahead of data.

1 (Hex): Do not attach status ahead of data.

Default

(Attach status.)

6-2 Remote I/O Communications

Allocate the DeviceNet read and write areas to specify what part of the PC’s data area will be used to read and write data from the DeviceNet Master Unit.

Specify the PC data area, starting word address, and number of bytes. Up to

64 bytes can be allocated for DeviceNet remote I/O.

Allocating Read/Write

Areas with the PC Setup

Switch the CPM2C-S to PROGRAM mode and use a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console or Support Software, to make the following settings in DM 6605 to DM 6609 of the PC Setup. The settings in these words are read only when the CPM2C-S is turned ON, so the PC’s power must be turned OFF and then ON again to make changes effective.

118

Remote I/O Communications Section 6-2

Word Bits Function

DM 6605 00 to 03 DeviceNet Read/Write area setting

0 (Hex): Read (IN) IR 020 to IR 027; Write (OUT) IR 030 to IR 037

1 (Hex): Use settings in DM 6606 to DM 6609.

04 to 07 Transmission of CPM2C-S status to the DeviceNet Master

0 (Hex): Attach status information ahead of data.

1 (Hex): Do not attach status information ahead of data.

08 to 15 Not used.

DM 6606 00 to 07 DeviceNet I/O Link Write

(OUT) area settings

(Master → CPM2C-S)

08 to 15

Data area

01 (Hex): I/O area 1 (IR 000 to IR 049)

02 (Hex): I/O area 2 (IR 200 to IR 227)

03 (Hex): DM area (DM 0000 to DM 2047)

04 (Hex): LR area (LR 00 to LR 15)

05 (Hex): HR area (HR 00 to HR 19)

07 (Hex): Timer/counter area (TC 000 to TC 255)

Number of bytes (see note 1)

DM 6607

DM 6608

DM 6609

00 to 15

00 to 07

08 to 15

00 to 15

DeviceNet I/O Link Read

(IN) area settings

(CPM2C-S → Master)

01 to 40 (Hex) (equivalent to 0 to 64 decimal)

Starting word address

0000 to 07FF (Hex) (equivalent to 0000 to 2047 decimal)

Data area

01 (Hex): I/O area 1 (IR 000 to IR 049)

02 (Hex): I/O area 2 (IR 200 to IR 227)

03 (Hex): DM area (DM 0000 to DM 2047)

04 (Hex): LR area (LR 00 to LR 15)

05 (Hex): HR area (HR 00 to HR 19)

06 (Hex): AR area (AR 00 to AR 23)

07 (Hex): Timer/counter area (TC 000 to TC 255)

Number of bytes (see note 1)

01 to 40 (Hex) (equivalent to 0 to 64 decimal)

Starting word address

0000 to 07FF (Hex) (equivalent to 0000 to 2047 decimal)

Default

0 (Hex)

00 (Hex)

0000 (Hex)

00 (Hex)

0000 (Hex)

Note 1.

A system failure error (PC Setup setting error) will occur if the number of bytes is set to 00 (Hex) for both the write and read areas.

Data written through DeviceNet is valid even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so outputs may go ON when the PC is in PROGRAM mode if output bits are allocated to the DeviceNet I/O Link Write area. To prevent outputs from going ON while the PC is in PROGRAM mode, do not allocate output bits directly to the DeviceNet I/O Link Write area.

If words in any areas other than the IR area (IR 000 to IR 227) or LR area

(LR 00 to LR 15) are allocated to the I/O Link Read area, the data may not be cleared even when the power is interrupted, possibly causing data from immediately before power interruption to be read by the master. If this creates a potential problem, use the following measures to eliminate the problem.

• When starting in RUN or MONITOR mode, configure the ladder program so that the Read area is rewritten with appropriate data.

• When starting in PROGRAM mode, it will not be possible to take direct measures at the slave. Monitor the status at the master and do not read the data when the operating mode is PROGRAM mode.

When a fatal error occurs at a slave, the master may read data from immediately before the error. In this case also, monitor the status at the master and do not read the data.

119

Remote I/O Communications

Allocating Read/Write

Areas with the DeviceNet

Configurator

1,2,3...

Section 6-2

An OMRON DeviceNet Configurator (version 2.0 or higher) can be used to specify the DeviceNet Read and Write areas. Contact your OMRON representative if you are using a Configurator version earlier than 2.0. (The version can be displayed in the Configurator’s Help menu.)

Connect the DeviceNet Configurator to the DeviceNet network and switch to online operation.

Turn ON the CPM2C-S power supply and put the PC in PROGRAM mode.

Click the Upload Button.

Double-click the CPM2C-S to be set on the DeviceNet Configurator’s device list.

The DeviceNet Parameters Window will be displayed to edit the read and write area parameters. Double-click the read/write area parameters to be changed.

120

Explicit Message Communications

Change the parameters as shown in the following example.

a) Double-click the parameter to be changed.

Section 6-3 b) Enter the desired value and press the Enter Key.

When all parameters are set as required, click the Download Button.

After the download has been completed, click the OK Button to return to the list display.

6-3 Explicit Message Communications

6-3-1 DeviceNet Explicit Message Functions

Explicit message communications use a command/response protocol. The

CPM2C-S returns responses to commands sent from the Master, allowing

CPM2C-S data areas to be read or written from the Master.

Command message

DeviceNet

Master

Response message

121

Explicit Message Communications Section 6-3

Explicit Message List

Note

Explicit message

READ BYTE DATA

WRITE BYTE DATA

READ WORD DATA

Function

Reads the specified node’s data in byte-units from the DeviceNet Master. When word data is being read, the leftmost byte is read before the rightmost byte. Up to 200 bytes can be read at one time.

Writes data from the DeviceNet Master to the specified node’s data area in byte-units. When word data is being written, the leftmost byte is written before the rightmost byte. Up to 200 bytes can be written at one time.

Reads the specified node’s data in word-units (twobyte units) from the DeviceNet Master. When word data is being read, the leftmost byte is read before the rightmost byte. Up to 100 words can be read at one time.

WRITE WORD DATA Writes data from the DeviceNet Master to the specified node’s data area in word-units (two-byte units).

When word data is being written, the leftmost byte is written before the rightmost byte. Up to 100 words can be written at one time.

ERROR RESPONSE The CPM2C-S returns an error response when there is an error in the explicit message command sent from the DeviceNet Master.

Page

When sending explicit message commands, the range of data specified by the data area, starting address, and number of bytes must not exceed the range of the CPM2C-S data area.

Use the READ BYTE DATA and WRITE BYTE DATA commands when sending explicit message commands from an OMRON DeviceNet Master.

Use the READ WORD DATA and WRITE WORD DATA commands when sending explicit message commands from another company’s DeviceNet

Master.

The number of bytes occupied by the “Class ID” and “Instance ID” parameters varies from Master to Master. These parameters are specified in 2 bytes (4 digits) in commands sent from OMRON DeviceNet Masters. (CVseries PCs use the CMND instruction and C200HX/HG/HE PCs use the

IOWR instruction.)

6-3-2 Command and Response Formats

READ BYTE DATA Reads the specified node’s data in byte-units from the DeviceNet Master.

When word data is being read, the leftmost byte is read before the rightmost byte. Up to 200 bytes can be read at one time.

Command Format

Class ID

Service code

Address L

Instance ID

Number of bytes

Address H

Destination node number

122

Explicit Message Communications

Response Format

Section 6-3

Leftmost byte

Service code Rightmost byte

Leftmost byte

Rightmost byte

Source node number

Number of bytes received

Read data

(200 bytes max.)

Parameters

Destination node number (command)

Specify the node number of the CPM2C-S containing the desired data in 1 byte (2-digit hexadecimal).

Service code (command, response)

Specify 1C (Hex) in the command.

The leftmost bit of the service code is turned ON in the response, so 9C (Hex) is returned.

Class ID (command)

Always 2F (Hex).

Instance ID (command)

Specify the data area containing the desired data in 1 byte (2-digit hexadecimal). Use one of the codes listed in the following table.

Code

01 (Hex)

02 (Hex)

03 (Hex)

04 (Hex)

05 (Hex)

06 (Hex)

07 (Hex)

Area name

IR area

DM area

LR area

HR area

AR area

Timer/Counter area

Address range

IR 000 to IR 049

IR 200 to IR 227

DM 0000 to DM 2047

LR 00 to LR 15

HR 00 to HR 19

AR 00 to AR 23 (read area only)

TC 000 to TC 255

Address L and Address H (command)

Specify the starting word address of the read data in hexadecimal as follows:

Address L: The rightmost two digits of the 4-digit starting address.

Address H: The leftmost two digits of the 4-digit starting address.

Number of bytes (command)

Specify the number of bytes of data to read in 1 byte (2-digit hexadecimal).

The allowed range is 01 to C8 (Hex), which is equivalent to 1 to 200 decimal.

Number of bytes received (response)

Indicates the number of bytes of data (in hexadecimal) from the “source node number” on.

Source node number (response)

Indicates the node number (in hexadecimal) of the CPM2C-S that returned the response.

Read data (response)

Contains the desired data read from the specified data area. Word data is returned with the leftmost byte (bits 8 to 15) preceding the rightmost byte (bits

0 to 7). If an odd number was specified in the command’s “number of bytes” parameter, the last byte of read data will contain the leftmost byte of a word.

123

Explicit Message Communications

WRITE BYTE DATA

Section 6-3

Precautions

The range of data specified by the data area (instance ID), starting address

(Address L and Address H), and number of bytes parameters must not exceed the range of the CPM2C-S data area.

Command Format

Class ID

Service code

Address L

Instance ID

Leftmost byte

Address H Rightmost byte

Leftmost byte

Rightmost byte

Destination node number

Write data

(200 bytes max.)

Response Format

Service code

Source node number

Number of bytes received

Parameters

Destination node number (command)

Specify the node number of the CPM2C-S where the data will be written.

Specify the node number in 1 byte (2-digit hexadecimal).

Service code (command, response)

Specify 1E (Hex) in the command.

The leftmost bit of the service code is turned ON in the response, so 9E (Hex) is returned.

Class ID (command)

Always 2F (Hex).

Instance ID (command)

Specify the data area where data will be written. Specify one of the codes listed in the following table in 1 byte (2-digit hexadecimal).

Code

01 (Hex)

02 (Hex)

03 (Hex)

04 (Hex)

05 (Hex)

07 (Hex)

Area name

IR area

DM area

LR area

HR area

Timer/Counter area

Address range

IR 000 to IR 049

IR 200 to IR 227

DM 0000 to DM 2047

LR 00 to LR 15

HR 00 to HR 19

TC 000 to TC 255

Address L and Address H (command)

Specify the starting word address where data will be written. Specify the address in hexadecimal as follows:

Address L: The rightmost two digits of the 4-digit starting address.

Address H: The leftmost two digits of the 4-digit starting address.

124

Explicit Message Communications

READ WORD DATA

Section 6-3

Write data (command)

Contains the data that will be written in the specified data area. Input word data with the leftmost byte (bits 8 to 15) preceding the rightmost byte (bits 0 to

7). If the command contains an odd number of bytes of write data, the last byte will be written to the leftmost byte of the last word.

Number of bytes received (response)

Indicates the number of bytes of data (in hexadecimal) from the “source node number” on.

Source node number (response)

Indicates the node number (in hexadecimal) of the CPM2C-S that returned the response.

Precautions

The range of data specified by the data area (instance ID), starting address

(Address L and Address H), and write data parameters must not exceed the range of the CPM2C-S data area.

Reads the specified node’s data in word-units (two-byte units) from the

DeviceNet Master. When word data is being read, the leftmost byte is read before the rightmost byte. Up to 100 words can be read at one time.

Command Format

Class ID

Service code

Address L

Instance ID

Number of words

Address H

Destination node number

Response Format

Leftmost byte

Service code Rightmost byte

Leftmost byte

Rightmost byte

Source node number

Number of bytes received

Read data

(200 bytes max.)

Parameters

Destination node number (command)

Specify the node number of the CPM2C-S containing the desired data in 1 byte (2-digit hexadecimal).

Service code (command, response)

Specify 1D (Hex) in the command.

The leftmost bit of the service code is turned ON in the response, so 9D (Hex) is returned.

Class ID (command)

Always 2F (Hex).

125

Explicit Message Communications

WRITE WORD DATA

Section 6-3

Instance ID (command)

Specify the data area containing the desired data in 1 byte (2-digit hexadecimal). Use one of the codes listed in the following table.

Code

01 (Hex)

02 (Hex)

03 (Hex)

04 (Hex)

05 (Hex)

06 (Hex)

07 (Hex)

Area name

IR area

DM area

LR area

HR area

AR area

Timer/Counter area

Address range

IR 000 to IR 049

IR 200 to IR 227

DM 0000 to DM 2047

LR 00 to LR 15

HR 00 to HR 19

AR 00 to AR 23 (read area only)

TC 000 to TC 255

Address L and Address H (command)

Specify the starting word address of the read data in hexadecimal as follows:

Address L: The rightmost two digits of the 4-digit starting address.

Address H: The leftmost two digits of the 4-digit starting address.

Number of words (command)

Specify the number of words of data to read in 1 byte (2-digit hexadecimal).

The allowed range is 01 to 64 (Hex), which is equivalent to 1 to 100 decimal.

Number of bytes received (response)

Indicates the number of bytes of data (in hexadecimal) from the “source node number.”

Source node number (response)

Indicates the node number (in hexadecimal) of the CPM2C-S that returned the response.

Read data (response)

Contains the desired data read from the specified data area. Word data is returned with the leftmost byte (bits 8 to 15) preceding the rightmost byte (bits

0 to 7).

Precautions

The range of data specified by the data area (instance ID), starting address

(Address L and Address H), and number of words parameters must not exceed the range of the CPM2C-S data area.

Writes data from the DeviceNet Master to the specified node’s data area in word-units (two-byte units). When word data is being written, the leftmost byte is written before the rightmost byte. Up to 100 words can be written at one time.

Command Format

Class ID

Service code

Address L

Instance ID

Leftmost byte

Address H Rightmost byte

Leftmost byte

Rightmost byte

Destination node number

Write data

(200 bytes max.)

126

Explicit Message Communications

Response Format

Section 6-3

Service code

Source node number

Number of bytes received

Parameters

Destination node number (command)

Specify the node number of the CPM2C-S where the data will be written.

Specify the node number in 1 byte (2-digit hexadecimal).

Service code (command, response)

Specify 1F (Hex) in the command.

The leftmost bit of the service code is turned ON in the response, so 9F (Hex) is returned.

Class ID (command)

Always 2F (Hex).

Instance ID (command)

Specify the data area where data will be written. Specify one of the codes listed in the following table in 1 byte (2-digit hexadecimal).

Code

01 (Hex)

02 (Hex)

03 (Hex)

04 (Hex)

05 (Hex)

07 (Hex)

Area name

IR area

DM area

LR area

HR area

Timer/Counter area

Address range

IR 000 to IR 049

IR 200 to IR 227

DM 0000 to DM 2047

LR 00 to LR 15

HR 00 to HR 19

TC 000 to TC 255

Address L and Address H (command)

Specify the starting word address where data will be written. Specify the address in hexadecimal as follows:

Address L: The rightmost two digits of the 4-digit starting address.

Address H: The leftmost two digits of the 4-digit starting address.

Write data (command)

Contains the data that will be written in the specified data area. Input word data with the leftmost byte (bits 8 to 15) preceding the rightmost byte (bits 0 to

7).

Number of bytes received (response)

Indicates the number of bytes of data (in hexadecimal) from the “source node number” on.

Source node number (response)

Indicates the node number (in hexadecimal) of the CPM2C-S that returned the response.

Precautions

The range of data specified by the data area (instance ID), starting address

(Address L and Address H), and write data parameters must not exceed the range of the CPM2C-S data area.

127

Explicit Message Communications

ERROR RESPONSE

Section 6-3

The CPM2C-S returns an error response when there is an error in the explicit message command sent from the DeviceNet Master.

Response Format

Additional error code

(Always FF)

General error code

Source node number

Number of bytes received

Parameters

Number of bytes received (response)

Indicates the number of bytes of data (in hexadecimal) from the “source node number.”

Source node number (response)

Indicates the node number (in hexadecimal) of the CPM2C-S that returned the response.

General error code (response)

Indicates the nature of the error with one of the 1-byte (2-digit hexadecimal) error codes listed in the following table.

Code Error name Meaning

08 (Hex) Service not supported The service code was invalid.

15 (Hex) Too much data There was too much data. (For example, the amount of write data exceeded the data area boundary.)

13 (Hex) Not enough data

20 (Hex) Invalid parameter

11 (Hex) Reply data too large

There was too little data. (For example, an odd number of bytes of write data were used in a

WRITE WORD DATA command.)

The starting word address was invalid.

16 (Hex) Object does not exist

The data area boundary was exceeded in a

DATA READ command.

The class ID or instance ID was invalid.

Additional error code (response)

Always FF (Hex).

6-3-3 Examples of DeviceNet Explicit Messages

CS/CJ, CVM1, and CV-series PCs: Reading Data with CMND(194)

This example shows the instruction operands and results when 20 words of data (IR 010 to IR029) in a Slave are read through a Master mounted in a CS/

CJ, CVM1 or CV-series PC.

For details on explicit messages, refer to the CS/CJ Series DeviceNet Units

Operation Manual (W380) for CS/CJ-series PCs, and refer to the DeviceNet

Operation Manual (W267) for CVM1 and CV-series PCs. For details on

CMND(194), refer to the CS Series Programmable Controllers Operation

Manual (W339) for CS-series PCs, and refer to the CVM1/CV Series CV500/

CV1000/CV2000/CVM1 Programmable Controllers Operation Manual: Ladder

Diagrams (W202) for CVM1 and CV-series PCs.

Example Network

Conditions

Master’s node number: 63

Slave’s network address: 1

Slave’s node number: 2

128

Explicit Message Communications Section 6-3

CMND(194) Operand Details

[CMND S D C]

• Command Words

Word Contents

(Hex)

S+1

28 01

02 1C

S+2

S+3

S+4

S+5

00 2F

00 01

0A 00

28 00

Function

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Slave node number = 02 (Hex)

READ BYTE DATA command service code = 1C (Hex)

Class ID = 002F (Hex)

Instance ID = 0001 (Hex) specifies data area

Starting read address = 000A (Hex) specifies IR 010

Address L = 0A (Hex); Address H = 00 (Hex)

Number of bytes = 28 (Hex) specifies 40 bytes

(The rightmost byte of S+5 is not used.)

• Response Words

(The results are stored as follows.)

Word Contents

(Hex)

D 28 01

D+1 00 00

D+2 00 2A

D+3

D+4 to

D+23

02 9C

HH LL

Function

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Normal completion code = 0000 (Hex)

Number of bytes received = 2A (Hex) indicates 42 bytes

(This is the number of bytes from D+3 to the end.)

Slave’s node number = 02 (Hex)

READ BYTE DATA response service code = 9C (Hex)

These words contain the data read from slave words IR 010 to

IR 029. When the READ BYTE DATA command is executed from an OMRON Master, the bytes are stored in the same order

(HH LL) in which they were stored in the Slave.

• Control Words

Word Contents

(Hex)

C 00 0B

C+1

C+2

C+3

C+4

C+5

00 30

00 01

3F FE

00 00

00 64

Function

Number of bytes of command data beginning with word S =

0B (Hex) specifies 11 bytes

Number of bytes of response data beginning with word D =

30 (Hex) specifies 48 bytes

Destination network address = 01 (Hex)

Master’s node number = 3F (Hex) specifies 63

Master’s unit address = FE (Hex) specifies the local Unit

Response required

Transmission port number = 00 (Hex) specifies 0

Number of retries = 00 (Hex) specifies 0

Response monitoring time = 64 (Hex) specifies 10.0 seconds

CS/CJ, CVM1, and CV-series PCs: Writing Data with CMND(194)

This example shows the instruction operands and results when 20 words of data are written through a Master mounted in a CS/CJ, CVM1, or CV-series

PC to words IR 010 to IR 029 in a Slave.

For details on explicit messages, refer to the CS/CJ Series DeviceNet Units

Operation Manual (W380) for CS/CJ-series PCs, and refer to the DeviceNet

Operation Manual (W267) for CVM1 and CV-series PCs. For details on

CMND(194), refer to the CS Series Programmable Controllers Operation

Manual (W339) for CS-series PCs, and refer to the CVM1/CV Series CV500/

CV1000/CV2000/CVM1 Programmable Controllers Operation Manual: Ladder

Diagrams (W202) for CVM1 and CV-series PCs.

129

Explicit Message Communications Section 6-3

Example Network

Conditions

Master’s node number: 63

Slave’s network address: 1

Slave’s node number: 2

CMND(194) Operand Details

[CMND S D C]

• Command Words

Word Contents

(Hex)

S+1

28 01

02 1C

S+2

S+3

S+4

S+5 to

S+24

00 2F

00 01

0A 00

HH LL

Function

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Slave node number = 02 (Hex)

WRITE BYTE DATA command service code = 1E (Hex)

Class ID = 002F (Hex)

Instance ID = 0001 (Hex) specifies data area

Starting write address = 000A (Hex) specifies IR 010

Address L = 0A (Hex); Address H = 00 (Hex)

These words contain the data to be written to slave words

IR 010 to IR 029. When the WRITE BYTE DATA command is executed from an OMRON Master, the bytes are written to the

Slave in the same order (HH LL) in which they appear in the

Master.

• Response Words

(The results are stored as follows.)

Word Contents

(Hex)

D 28 01

D+1 00 00

D+2 00 02

D+3 02 9C

Function

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Normal completion code = 0000 (Hex)

Number of bytes received = 02 (Hex) indicates 2 bytes

(This is the number of bytes from D+3 to the end.)

Slave’s node number = 02 (Hex)

WRITE BYTE DATA response service code = 9E (Hex)

• Control Words

Word Contents

(Hex)

C 00 32

C+1

C+2

C+3

C+4

C+5

00 08

00 01

3F FE

00 00

00 64

Function

Number of bytes of command data beginning with word S =

32 (Hex) specifies 50 bytes

Number of bytes of response data beginning with word D =

08 (Hex) specifies 8 bytes

Destination network address = 01 (Hex)

Master’s node number = 3F (Hex) specifies 63

Master’s unit address = FE (Hex) specifies the local Unit

Response required

Transmission port number = 00 (Hex) specifies 0

Number of retries = 00 (Hex) specifies 0

Response monitoring time = 64 (Hex) specifies 10.0 seconds

130

Explicit Message Communications Section 6-3

C200HX/HG/HE PCs: Reading Data with IOWR(––)

This example shows the instruction operands and results when 20 words of data (IR 010 to IR029) in a Slave are read through a Master mounted in a

C200HX/HG/HE PC and stored in words DM 2000 to DM 2019.

Refer to the DeviceNet Masters Operation Manual (W379) for details on explicit messages and refer to the C200HX/HG/HE Programmable Controllers

Operation Manual (W303) for details on IOWR(––).

Example Network

Conditions

The Master’s node number is 63, the Slave’s network address is 0, and the

Slave’s node number is 2.

IOWR(––) Operand Details

[IOWR C S D]

• Control Code

Word Contents

(Hex)

C 3F FE

Function

Master’s node number = 3F (Hex) specifies 63

Master’s unit address = FE (Hex) specifies the local Unit

• Command Words (Source information)

Word Contents

(Hex)

S+1

82 07

D0 00

S+2

S+3

S+4

S+5

S+6

S+7

S+8

S+9

00 64

00 0B

28 01

02 1C

00 2F

00 01

0A 00

28 00

Function

Specifies starting response word = DM 2000

82 (Hex) specifies the DM area

07D0 (Hex) specifies address 2000

(Refer to the C200HX/HG/HE Operation Manual (W303) for details.)

Response monitoring time = 64 (Hex) specifies 10.0 seconds

Number of bytes of command data beginning with word S+4 =

0B (Hex) specifies 11 bytes

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Slave node number = 02 (Hex)

READ BYTE DATA command service code = 1C (Hex)

Class ID = 002F (Hex)

Instance ID = 0001 (Hex) specifies data area

Starting read address = 000A (Hex) specifies IR 010

Address L = 0A (Hex); Address H = 00 (Hex)

Number of bytes = 28 (Hex) specifies 40 bytes

(The rightmost byte of S+5 is not used.)

• Destination Information

Word Contents

(Hex)

D 00 10

Function

Master Unit’s unit number = 00

Number of words of command data beginning with word S = 10

(BCD) specifies 10 words

• Response Words (The results are stored as follows.)

Word Contents

(Hex)

DM 2000 28 01

DM 2001 00 00

DM 2002 00 2A

DM 2003 02 9C

DM 2004 to

DM 2023

HH LL

Function

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Normal completion code = 0000 (Hex)

Number of bytes received = 2A (Hex) indicates 42 bytes

(This is the number of bytes from D+3 to the end.)

Slave’s node number = 02 (Hex)

READ BYTE DATA response service code = 9C (Hex)

These words contain the data read from slave words IR 010 to IR 029. When the READ BYTE DATA command is executed from an OMRON Master, the bytes are stored in the same order (HH LL) in which they were stored in the Slave.

131

Explicit Message Communications Section 6-3

C200HX/HG/HE PCs: Writing Data with IOWR(––)

This example shows the instruction operands and results when 20 words of data are written from a Master mounted in a C200HX/HG/HE PC to words IR

010 to IR029 in a Slave.

Example Network

Conditions

Refer to the DeviceNet Masters Operation Manual (W379) for details on explicit messages and refer to the C200HX/HG/HE Programmable Controllers

Operation Manual (W303) for details on IOWR(––).

Master’s node number: 63

Slave’s network address: 0

Slave’s node number: 2

IOWR(––) Operand Details

[IOWR C S D]

• Control Code

Word Contents

(Hex)

C 3F FE

Function

Master’s node number = 3F (Hex) specifies 63

Master’s unit address = FE (Hex) specifies the local Unit

• Command Words (Source Information)

Word Contents

(Hex)

S 82 07

S+1 D0 00

S+2

S+3

S+4

S+5

S+6

S+7

S+8

S+9 to

S+28

00 64

00 0B

28 01

02 1E

00 2F

00 01

0A 00

HH LL

Function

Specifies starting response word = DM 2000

82 (Hex) specifies the DM area

07D0 (Hex) specifies address 2000

(Refer to the C200HX/HG/HE Operation Manual (W303) for details.)

Response monitoring time = 64 (Hex) specifies 10.0 seconds

Number of bytes of command data beginning with word S+4 =

32 (Hex) specifies 50 bytes

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Slave node number = 02 (Hex)

WRITE BYTE DATA command service code = 1E (Hex)

Class ID = 002F (Hex)

Instance ID = 0001 (Hex) specifies data area

Starting write address = 000A (Hex) specifies IR 010

Address L = 0A (Hex); Address H = 00 (Hex)

These words contain the data to be written to slave words

IR 010 to IR 029. When the WRITE BYTE DATA command is executed from an OMRON Master, the bytes are written to the

Slave in the same order (HH LL) in which they appear in the

Master.

• Destination Information

Word Contents

(Hex)

D 00 29

Function

Master Unit’s unit number = 00

Number of words of command data beginning with word S = 29

(BCD) specifies 29 words

• Response Words (The results are stored as follows.)

Word Contents

(Hex)

DM 2000 28 01

DM 2001 00 00

DM 2002 00 02

DM 2003 02 9E

Function

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Normal completion code = 0000 (Hex)

Number of bytes received = 02 (Hex) indicates 2 bytes

(This is the number of bytes from D+3 to the end.)

Slave’s node number = 02 (Hex)

READ BYTE DATA response service code = 9E (Hex)

132

Explicit Message Communications Section 6-3

C200HW Master in a CS Series PC: Reading Data with IOWR (––)

This example shows the instruction operands and results of the IOWR command when 20 words of data are read from IR 010 to IR 029 in a Slave, and written to response words from DM 2000 to the end in a Master mounted in a

CS-series PC.

Refer to the DeviceNet Masters Unit Operation Manual (W379) for details on explicit messages, and refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Communications

Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details on IOWR(––).

Example Network

Conditions

Master’s node number:

Slave’s node number:

IOWR(––) Operand Details

[IOWR C S W]

• Control Code

Word Contents

(Hex)

C 3F FE

Function

Master’s node number = 3F (Hex) specifies 63

Master’s unit address = FE (Hex) specifies the local Unit

• Command Words

Word Contents

(Hex)

S 82 07

S+1 D0 00

S+2

S+3

S+4

S+5

S+6

S+7

S+8

S+9

00 64

00 0B

28 01

02 1C

00 2F

00 01

0A 00

28 00

Function

Specifies starting response word = DM 2000

82 (Hex) specifies the DM area

07D0 (Hex) specifies address 2000

(Refer to the CS Series Operation Manual (W339) for details.)

Response monitoring time = 10.0 seconds

Number of bytes of command data beginning with word S+4 =

0B (Hex) specifies 11 bytes

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Slave node number = 02 (Hex)

READ BYTE DATA command service code = 1C (Hex)

Class ID = 002F (Hex)

Instance ID = 0001 (Hex) specifies data area

Starting read address = 000A (Hex) specifies IR 010

Address L = 0A (Hex); Address H = 00 (Hex)

Number of bytes of data to read = 28 (Hex) specifies 40 bytes

• Destination Information

Word Contents

(Hex)

W 00 00

W+1 00 10

Function

Master Unit’s unit number = 00 (Hex) specifies 0

Number of words of command data beginning with word S+0 =

10 (BCD) specifies 10 words

• Response Words (The results are stored as follows.)

Word Contents

(Hex)

DM 2000 28 01

DM 2001 00 00

DM 2002 00 2A

DM 2003 02 9C

DM 2004 HH LL

Function

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Normal completion code = 0000 (Hex)

Number of bytes received = 2A (Hex) indicates 42 bytes

(This is the number of bytes from D+3 to the end.)

Slave’s node number = 02 (Hex)

READ BYTE DATA response service code = 9C (Hex)

These words contain the data to be read from Slave words IR 010 to IR 029.

When the READ BYTE DATA command is executed from an

OMRON Master, the bytes are written to the Master in the same order (HH LL) in which they appear in the Slave.

133

Explicit Message Communications Section 6-3

C200HW Master in a CS Series PC: Writing Data with IOWR (––)

This example shows the instruction operands and results of the IOWR command when 20 words of data are written from a Master mounted in a CSseries PC to words IR 200 to IR 219 in a Slave.

Refer to the DeviceNet Masters Unit Operation Manual (W379) for details on explicit messages, and refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Communications

Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details on IOWR(––).

Example Network

Conditions

Master’s node number:

Slave’s node number:

IOWR(––) Operand Details

[IOWR C S W]

• Control Code

Word Contents

(Hex)

C 3F FE

Function

Master’s node number = 3F (Hex) specifies 63

Master’s unit address = FE (Hex) specifies the local Unit

• Command Words

Word Contents

(Hex)

S 82 07

S+1 D0 00

S+2

S+3

S+4

S+5

S+6

S+7

S+8

S+9 to

S+28

00 64

00 32

28 01

02 1E

00 2F

00 02

C8 00

HH LL

Function

Specifies starting response word = DM 2000

82 (Hex) specifies the DM area

07D0 (Hex) specifies address 2000

(Refer to the CS Series Operation Manual (W339) for details.)

Response monitoring time = 10.0 seconds

Number of bytes of command data beginning with word S+4 =

32 (Hex) specifies 50 bytes

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Slave node number = 02 (Hex)

WRITE BYTE DATA command service code = 1E (Hex)

Class ID = 002F (Hex)

Instance ID = 0002 (Hex) specifies data area 2

Starting write address = 00C8 (Hex) specifies IR 200

Address L = C8 (Hex); Address H = 00 (Hex)

These words contain the data to be written to Slave words

IR 200 to IR 219. When the WRITE BYTE DATA command is executed from an OMRON Master, the bytes are written to the

Slave in the same order (HH LL) in which they appear in the

Master.

• Destination Information

Word Contents

(Hex)

W 00 00

W+1 00 29

Function

Master Unit’s unit number = 00 (Hex)

Number of words of command data beginning with word S+0 =

29 (BCD) specifies 29 words

• Response Words (The results are stored as follows.)

Word Contents

(Hex)

DM 2000 28 01

DM 2001 00 00

DM 2002 00 02

DM 2003 02 9E

Function

EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command code = 2801 (Hex)

Normal completion code = 0000 (Hex)

Number of bytes received = 02 (Hex) indicates 2 bytes

(This is the number of bytes from D+3 to the end.)

Slave’s node number = 02 (Hex)

WRITE BYTE DATA response service code = 9E (Hex)

134

Status Information Section 6-4

6-4 Status Information

The status of DeviceNet communications is indicated by the CPM2C-S PC’s

LED indicators and AR area flags. In addition, the PC Setup can be set so that the CPM2C-S PC’s operating status information is attached to remote I/O transmissions from the CPM2C-S to the Master Unit.

6-4-1 LED Indicators

The status of DeviceNet communications is indicated on the CPM2C-S PC’s

LED indicators.

Indicator Color

MS Green

Status

Lit Normal status

Function

Flashing Incomplete settings status

Red

---

Green

Red

---

Lit Fatal error

Flashing Non-fatal error

Not lit Power is not being supplied.

Lit Online/Communications established

Meaning

Normal status

Reading switch settings

Hardware error (watchdog timer error)

Error such as incorrect switch settings

• Power is not being supplied.

• Waiting for initialization to start

• Reset in progress

Normal network status when communications have been established

Flashing Online/Communications not established Normal network status when communications haven’t been established

Lit Fatal communications error Communications error (The Unit detected an error indicating that network communications are disabled.)

Flashing

Not lit

Non-fatal communications error

Offline/Power supply OFF

• Node number duplication

• Bus off error detected

Communications timeout

Waiting for completion of the node number duplication check in the Master.

• Incorrect switch settings

• Power supply OFF

135

Status Information Section 6-4

6-4-2 AR Area Flags indicating DeviceNet Status

Word

AR 00

The following status information is output to flags in the AR area.

Bit(s)

Function

DeviceNet switch settings error (ON when a settings error occurred, OFF when normal.)

Node number duplication or Bus off error (ON when an error occurred, OFF when normal.)

DeviceNet network power supply error (ON when an error occurred, OFF when normal.)

03 DeviceNet communications error (ON when an error occurred, OFF when normal.)

04 to 06 Not used.

DeviceNet status error (ON when an error occurred, OFF when normal.)

Explicit Connection Flag

Polling Connection Flag

Bit Strobe Connection Flag

ON: The connection has been established.

OFF: The connection has not been established.

11 to 14 Not used.

15 I/O Link in progress (ON when the I/O Link is operating, otherwise OFF.)

6-4-3 CPM2C-S Status Output to DeviceNet

The operating status of the CPM2C-S is transmitted to the Master Unit in two words. The status information is automatically attached as the first two words received at the Master.

The setting in DM 6605 bits 04 to 07 of the PC Setup determines whether or not the status information will be transmitted.

Word Bits Function

DM 6605 04 to 07 Sets whether CPM2C-S status is transmitted to the DeviceNet Master.

0 (Hex): Attach status ahead of data.

1 (Hex): Do not attach status ahead of data.

(A settings error will occur for any other setting.)

Default

(Attach status.)

136

Status Information Section 6-4

Transmitted Status Information

Word Bits

Leading word 00 to 07

08 and 09 CPM2C operating mode

Contents

The error code (2 digits) that is output to AR 253 bits 00 to 07 is output.

Bit

PROGRAM mode

MONITOR mode

RUN mode

Leading word

+ 1

Not used.

UM area write-protection (Mirrors the status of PC Setup setting in DM 6602 bits 00 to 03.)

OFF: UM writable

ON: UM write-protected

Not used.

13 CompoBus/S communications error (See note 1.)

OFF: Communications normal or not part of network

ON: Disconnected from communications

This bit will automatically be turned OFF if the slave joins the network again or the power supply is turned OFF and ON.

ON when a non-fatal error has occurred.

ON when a fatal error has occurred.

00 to 03

Not used.

ON when a battery error has occurred.

(Effective only when detection of battery errors is enabled with the PC Setup setting in

DM 6655 bits 12 to 15 set to 0.)

ON when a cycle time overrun error has occurred.

Not used.

ON when FAL(06) was executed or a PC Setup settings error has occurred.

(The FAL number is transmitted in bits 00 to 07 of the leading word.)

ON when a memory error has occurred.

ON when there isn’t an END(01) instruction in the program.

Not used.

11 ON when an I/O Unit over error (too many Units) has been detected.

12 and 13 Not used.

ON when an I/O bus error has occurred.

ON when FALS(07) was executed.

(The FAL number is transmitted in bits 00 to 07 of the leading word.)

Note 1.

This bit is supported from Units manufactured on June 1, 2009 or later. Re-

fer to page xxii for information on interpreting manufacturing numbers. Use

the manufacturing number to confirm that your Unit supports this bit before attempting to use the bit.

If words in any areas other than the IR area (IR 000 to IR 227) or LR area

• When starting in RUN or MONITOR mode, configure the ladder program so that the Read area is rewritten with appropriate data.

• When starting in PROGRAM mode, it will not be possible to take direct measures at the slave. Monitor the status at the master and do not read the data when the operating mode is PROGRAM mode.

137

Status Information Section 6-4

When a fatal error occurs at a slave, the master may read data from immediately before the error. In this case also, monitor the status at the master and do not read the data.

138

SECTION 7 Cycle Time and I/O Response Time

This section explains the cycle time and I/O response time in CPM2C-S PCs. Refer to this section when writing the user program to improve operation and reduce response delays.

7-1 Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1-1 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1-2 Cycle Time and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1-3 Cycle Time Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1-4 Instruction Execution Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2 I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2-1 CPM2C-S I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2-2 I/O Response Time between CompoBus/S Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3 Interrupt Processing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-4 One-to-one PC Link I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

139

Cycle Time Section 7-1

7-1 Cycle Time

7-1-1 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts

Basic CPU Operation Initialization is performed when the power is turned ON. If there are no initialization errors, the overseeing processes, program execution, I/O refreshing, and communications port servicing are performed repeatedly (cyclically).

Startup initialization

•

Check hardware.

•

Check memory.

•

Read data from flash memory (program, read-only DM data, and PC Setup settings).

Overseeing processes

CompoBus/S input refreshing

Program execution

Cycle time calculation

CompoBus/S output refreshing

I/O refreshing

• Check for battery error.

•

Preset the watch (maximum) cycle time.

•

Check program memory.

•

Refresh bits for expansion functions.

•

Read input data from CompoBus/S Remote

I/O Slaves.

•

Execute the program.

(Refer to the Programming Manual (W353) for details on cycle time and I/O response times.)

•

Wait for minimum cycle time if a minimum cycle time has been set in the PC Setup

(DM 6619).

• Calculate cycle time.

•

Write output data to CompoBus/S Remote I/O

Slaves.

•

Read input data from input bits.

•

Write output data to output bits.

DeviceNet

I/O refreshing

DeviceNet message communications

RS-232C port servicing

•

Exchange I/O data with DeviceNet Master.

(CPM2C-S1

(

0C-DRT versions only)

• Perform explicit message communications with DeviceNet Master.

(CPM2C-S1

(

0C-DRT versions only)

•

Perform RS-232C port communications processing. (Can be changed in DM 6616.)

Peripheral port servicing

•

Perform peripheral port communications processing. (Can be changed in DM 6617.)

Note 1.

The cycle time can be read using a Programming Device.

140

Cycle Time Section 7-1

The maximum cycle time and current cycle time are stored in AR 14 and

AR 15 respectively.

The cycle time varies with the processing required and so it is possible that the calculated value and the actual value may not be the same.

Process

Overseeing

Content

Set cycle watchdog timer, check I/O bus, check

UM, refresh clock, refresh bits allocated to new functions.

Wait for completion of CompoBus/S communications

Wait for completion of the CompoBus/S communications started in the CompoBus/S output refreshing process.

CompoBus/S input refreshing

Read input data from CompoBus/S Master

ASIC.

Program execution Execute user program.

0.3 ms

---

0.02 ms

Time requirements

Cycle time calculation

Wait until minimum cycle time has elapsed if a minimum cycle time is set in DM 6619 of PC

Setup.

CompoBus/S output refreshing

Calculate of cycle time.

Write output data to CompoBus/S Master ASIC.

Start CompoBus/S communications.

I/O output refreshing Write output data (results of executing program) to output bits.

I/O input refreshing Read input data from input bits.

DeviceNet I/O refreshing

Write output data to DeviceNet interface and read input data.

Total time for executing instructions. (Varies according to content of user’s program.)

Negligible except for the delay itself when required.

0.05 ms

CPM2C-S CPU Unit:0.06 ms

Expansion I/O Unit:0.3 ms

0.1 ms

RS-232C port servicing

Communications processing when a Programming Device or Communications Adapter is connected to the RS-232C port.

Peripheral port servicing

DeviceNet communications servicing

Service device connected to peripheral port when a Programming Device or Adapter is connected.

Perform communications processing (explicit message communications) with the DeviceNet

Master.

0.55 ms min., 5% or less of cycle time up to

131 ms

(The percentage of cycle time allocated to

RS-232C servicing can be set in DM 6616.)

0.55 ms min., 5% or less of cycle time up to

131 ms

(The percentage of cycle time allocated to peripheral port servicing can be set in DM 6617.)

65.536 ms max.

Note 1.

The CPM2C-S starts I/O refreshing after CompoBus/S communications are completed. If the cycle time is shorter than the CompoBus/S communications response time, the CPU will wait until CompoBus/S communications are completed before starting I/O refreshing again. In effect, this delay results in a minimum cycle time equivalent to the CompoBus/S communications response time.

Even if the CompoBus/S is not used, the cycle time will never be shorter than the CompoBus/S communications response time.

The cycle time will be affected if there is a connection to a DeviceNet network (-DRT models only). Adjust the system while connected to the DeviceNet network.

141

Cycle Time Section 7-1

7-1-2 Cycle Time and Operations

The effects of the cycle time on operations are as shown below. When a long cycle time is affecting operation, either reduce the cycle time or improve responsiveness with interrupt programs.

Cycle time

1 ms or longer

10 ms or longer

Operation conditions

TMHH(––) may be inaccurate when TC 000 through TC 003 or TC 008 through TC 255 are used

(operation will be normal for TC 004 through TC 007).

TIMH(15) may be inaccurate when TC 004 through TC 255 are used (operation will be normal for TC

000 through TC 003).

Programming using the 0.02-second Clock Bit (SR 25401) may be inaccurate.

20 ms or longer

100 ms or longer TIM may be inaccurate. Programming using the 0.1-second Clock Bit (SR 25500) may be inaccurate.

A CYCLE TIME OVER error is generated (SR 25309 will turn ON).

120 ms or longer The FALS 9F monitoring time SV is exceeded. A system error (FALS 9F) is generated, and operation stops.

200 ms or longer Programming using the 0.2-second Clock Bit (SR 25501) may be inaccurate.

7-1-3 Cycle Time Example

In this example, the cycle time is calculated for a Unit. The I/O is configured as follows:

6 inputs: 1 word (00000 to 00005)

4 outputs: 1 word (01000 to 01003)

The rest of the operating conditions are assumed to be as follows:

User’s program: 500 instructions (consists of only LD and OUT)

Cycle time: Variable (no minimum set)

The average processing time for a single instruction in the user’s program is assumed to be 1.26 µ s. The cycle times are as shown in the following table.

1. Overseeing

Process

2. Wait for completion of CompoBus/S communications

3. CompoBus/S input refreshing

4. Program execution

5. Cycle time calculation

6. CompoBus/S output refreshing

7. I/O refreshing

8. DeviceNet I/O refreshing

9. Peripheral port servicing

---

Calculation method

---

1.26 × 500 ( µ s)

---

Time when peripheral port is used

0.3 ms

0.02 ms

0.6 ms

0.05 ms

0.06 ms

0.1 ms

0.55 ms

10. RS-232C port servicing ---

11. DeviceNet communications servicing ---

Total cycle time

(1) + (2) + (3) + - - - + (11) 1.68 ms

Time when peripheral port is not used

0.3 ms

0.5 ms

0.02 ms

0.6 ms

0.05 ms

0.06 ms

0.1 ms

1.63 ms

Note 1.

The CompoBus/S communications wait time can be calculated by subtracting the time required for processes 9, 10, 11, and 1 from the Compo-

Bus/S communications response time.

CompoBus/S wait time = CompoBus/S response time – (9) – (10) – (11) –

(1)

142

Cycle Time Section 7-1

When the peripheral port is being used in the example above, the calculation result is negative and the CompoBus/S wait time is negligible.

Communications mode

High-speed mode 16

Max. number of nodes setting

Long-distance mode 16

CompoBus/S communications response time

0.5 ms

0.8 ms

4.0 ms

6.0 ms

The cycle time can be read from a Programming Device.

AR 14 contains the max. cycle time and AR 15 contains the current cycle time.

The actual cycle time will vary slightly from the calculated value due to variations in processing from cycle to cycle.

If the cycle time is shorter than the CompoBus/S communications response time, the actual cycle time will be equal to the CompoBus/S communications response time. With short cycle times, the CompoBus/S communications response time will become the minimum cycle time; this is especially true when long-distance mode is being used.

7-1-4 Instruction Execution Times

Basic Instructions

Code Mnemonic ON execution time ( µ s)

---

LD NOT

AND

AND NOT

OR NOT

AND LD

OR LD

OUT

OUT NOT

SET

RSET

TIM

0.64

0.52

0.26

1.88

2.58

4.76

--CNT 4.50

The following table lists the execution times for CPM2C-S instructions.

Any

Conditions (Top: min.; bottom: max.)

Constant for SV

* DM for SV

Constant for SV

DM for SV

---

OFF execution time ( µ s)

RSET IL JMP

7.8

15.6

6.8

14.5

7.6

15.4

2.9

3.1

143

Cycle Time

Special Instructions

Code Mnemonic ON execution time ( µ s)

00 NOP 0.15

END

ILC

6.2

1.1

1.6

JMP

JME

FAL

FALS

0.95

2.1

20.5

2.9

STEP

SNXT

SFT

7.3

5.1

11 KEEP

10.4

15.3

39.6

3.2

Any

Conditions (Top: min.; bottom: max.)

With 1-word shift register

With 10-word shift register

With 53-word shift register

Any

12 CNTR

DIFU

DIFD

TIMH

10.9

18.8

5.5

5.3

Constant for SV

* DM for SV

Any

WSFT

ASFT

CMP

MOV

MVN

BIN

BCD

22.8

7.9

8.4

22.8

15.8

30.3

14.6

29.0

9.0

9.6

9.8

10.7

14.0

18.6

1.15 ms

13.0

22.9

1.51 ms

7.0

8.3

12.1

7.8

8.4

Regular execution, constant for SV

Interrupt execution, constant for SV

Regular execution, * DM for SV

Interrupt execution,

DM for SV

With 1-word shift register

With 10-word shift register

With 2,048-word shift register using * DM

Shifting 1 word

Shifting 10 words

Shifting 2,048 words via * DM

When comparing a constant to a constant

When comparing two words

When comparing two * DM

When transferring a constant to a word

When transferring from one word to another

When transferring

DM to

When transferring a constant to a word

When transferring from one word to another

When transferring * DM to * DM

When converting a word to a word

When converting * DM to * DM

When converting a word to a word

When converting * DM to * DM

2.6

Section 7-1

OFF execution time (

µ s)

4.8

4.7

12.6

14.0

20.5

22.0

0.98

1.0

1.2

5.5

Shift

5.1

Shift

5.4

Reset

13.0

14.4

20.8

22.2

2.6

2.1

1.6

1.8

2.1

2.5

6.0

3.6

Reset

9.2

11.9

26.2

Reset

3.1

Reset

7.9

JMP

0.96

JMP

0.97

JMP

6.1

7.5

6.1

7.5

JMP

0.98

1.0

JMP

1.3

JMP

5.6

144

Cycle Time

Code Mnemonic ON execution time ( µ s)

25 ASL 8.6

26 ASR

15.8

8.4

15.6

27 ROL

28 ROR

7.3

14.5

7.3

14.5

29 COM

ADD

SUB

8.9

16.1

14.7

16.0

37.6

14.6

15.8

37.5

32 MUL

DIV

ANDW

ORW

XORW

XNRW

13.8

35.4

12.3

13.8

35.4

12.3

13.8

35.4

26.8

28.3

51.0

25.9

27.5

50.1

12.3

13.8

INC

DEC

STC

CLC

MSG

RXD

TXD

35.5

17.8

71.9

314.5

32.4

264.5

27.7

42.2

8.8

15.9

8.9

16.1

3.0

9.9

Conditions (Top: min.; bottom: max.)

When shifting a word

When shifting * DM

When shifting a word

When shifting * DM

When rotating a word

When rotating * DM

When rotating a word

When rotating * DM

When inverting a word

When inverting * DM

Constant + constant → word

Word + word → word

* DM + * DM → * DM

Constant – constant → word

Word – word → word

* DM – * DM → * DM

Constant × constant → word

Word × word → word

* DM × * DM → * DM

Constant ÷ constant → word word ÷ word → word

* DM ÷ * DM → * DM

Constant ∩ constant → word

Word

∩

word

→

word

* DM ∩ * DM → * DM

Constant V constant → word

Word V word → word

DM V

→ *

Constant V constant → word

Word V word → word

* DM V * DM → * DM

Constant V constant → word

Word V word → word

DM V

→ *

When incrementing a word

When incrementing * DM

When decrementing a word

When decrementing

Any

With message in words

With message in

Word specification, 1 byte input

* DM specification, 256 bytes input

Word specification, 1 byte input, RS-232C

DM specification, 256 bytes input, RS-232C

Word specification, 1 byte input, Host Link

* DM specification, 256 bytes input, Host Link

2.6

2.5

2.6

2.5

2.6

Section 7-1

2.5

OFF execution time (

µ s)

2.5

145

Cycle Time Section 7-1

Code Mnemonic ON execution time ( µ s)

50 ADB 14.1

51 SBB

15.6

37.4

14.4

52 MLB

15.9

37.7

16.8

18.5

DVB

ADDL

SUBL

41.2

16.9

18.6

41.3

25.3

48.6

25.3

48.6

56 MULL

DIVL

BINL

BCDL

CMPL

INI

33.7

14.8

30.6

68.8

12.0

43.3

79.1

102.1

73.9

98.6

23.9

38.5

19.1

51.8

42.8

50.8

60.1

42.7

50.7

17.8

20.0

27.6

Conditions (Top: min.; bottom: max.)

Constant + constant → word

Word + word → word

* DM + * DM → * DM

Constant – constant → word

Word – word → word

* DM – * DM → * DM

Constant × constant → word

Word × word → word

* DM × * DM → * DM

Constant ÷ constant → word

Word ÷ word → word

* DM ÷ * DM → * DM

Word + word → word

* DM + * DM → * DM

Word – word → word

* DM – * DM → * DM

Word × word → word

* DM × * DM → * DM

Word ÷ word → word

* DM ÷ * DM → * DM

When converting word data to a word

When converting * DM to * DM

When converting word data to a word

When converting

DM to

Comparing words

Comparing * DM

Starting high-speed counter comparison

Stopping high-speed counter comparison

Specifying a constant when changing highspeed counter PV

Specifying * DM when changing high-speed counter PV

Specifying increment mode via constant

Specifying increment mode via

Stopping pulse output

Specifying a constant when changing pulse output PV

Specifying * DM when changing pulse output PV

Stopping synchronized control of high-speed counter

Specifying a constant when changing interrupt counter PV

Specifying * DM when changing interrupt

counter PV

2.6

OFF execution time (

µ s)

146

Cycle Time Section 7-1

Code Mnemonic ON execution time ( µ s)

62 PRV 36.9

44.7

36.6

44.3

38.5

46.2

20.2

27.4

24.4

32.4

39.9

47.8

20.1

27.1

Conditions (Top: min.; bottom: max.)

Reading high-speed counter PV via word

Reading high-speed counter PV * DM

Specifying increment mode via word

Specifying increment mode via * D

Specifying a word when using synchronized control

Specifying * DM when using synchronized control

Reading high-speed counter pulse output status via word

Reading high-speed counter pulse output status via

Reading high-speed counter read range comparison results via word

Reading high-speed counter read range comparison results via * DM

Reading pulse output PV via word

Reading pulse output PV via * DM

Reading interrupt counter PV via word

Reading interrupt counter PV via * DM

2.6

OFF execution time (

µ s)

147

Cycle Time Section 7-1

Code Mnemonic ON execution time ( µ s)

63 CTBL 186.0

64 SPED

807.5

185.8

781.9

410.0

418.9

380.6

399.7

183.4

810.3

182.4

776.3

351.0

359.1

331.2

335.9

44.6

53.8

42.9

52.0

34.1

39.8

Conditions (Top: min.; bottom: max.)

Registering a target value comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing/decrementing pulse input mode via word

Registering a target value comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing/decrementing pulse input mode via * DM

Registering a target value comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing mode via word

Registering a target value comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing mode via

Registering a range comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing/decrementing pule input mode via word

Registering a range comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing/decrementing pule input mode via * DM

Registering a range comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing mode via word

2.6

Registering a range comparison table and starting comparison in incrementing mode via

Only registering a target value comparison table in incrementing/decrementing pulse input mode via word

Only registering a target value comparison table in incrementing/decrementing pulse input mode via * DM

Only registering a target value comparison table in incrementing mode via word

Only registering a target value comparison table in incrementing mode via

Only registering a range comparison table in incrementing/decrementing pule input mode via word

Only registering a range comparison table in incrementing/decrementing pule input mode via

* DM

Only registering a range comparison table in incrementing mode via word

Only registering a range comparison table in incrementing mode via

Specifying a constant in independent mode

Specifying * DM in independent mode

Specifying a constant in continuous pulse output mode

Specifying

DM in continuous pulse output mode

Specifying a word when changing output frequency

Specifying * DM when changing output frequency

2.6

OFF execution time (

µ s)

148

Cycle Time Section 7-1

21.3

23.8

1.52 ms

13.8

14.3

971.1

14.5

29.3

12.3

23.9

2.83 ms

12.3

23.9

2.83 ms

16.8

46.1

19.7

52.1

19.8

48.3

18.7

20.2

43.1

31.0

32.7

55.9

58.1

25.7

47.8

25.9

47.8

34.0

46.4

10.6

37.9

39.2

59.9

24.9

4.32 ms

35.3

38.3

Code Mnemonic ON execution time ( µ s)

65 PULS 38.4

SCL

BCNT

BCMP

STIM

XFER

BSET

XCHG

SLD

SRD

MLPX

DMPX

SDEC

DIST

46.6

40.0

48.1

Conditions (Top: min.; bottom: max.)

Specifying a relative pulse for the set pulse output via a word

Specifying a relative pulse for the set pulse output via * DM

Specifying an absolute pulse for the set pulse output via a word

Comparing word, results to word

Comparing

DM, results to

Constant-set one-shot interrupt start

* DM-set one-shot interrupt start

Constant-set scheduled interrupt start

DM-set scheduled interrupt start

Constant-set timer read

* DM-set timer read

Stopping timer

2.6

Specifying an absolute pulse for the set pulse output via

Specifying a parameter word; constant to word 2.6

Specifying a parameter word; word to word

Specifying a parameter * DM ; * DM to * DM

When counting 1 word

When counting 2,048 words via * DM

Comparing constant, results to word

2.6

When transferring a constant to a word

When transferring a word to a word

When transferring 2,048 words using * DM

When setting a constant to a word

When setting a word to a word

When setting * DM to 2,048 words

Word → word

* DM → * DM

Shifting 1 word

Shifting 10 words

Shifting 2,048 words using * DM

Shifting 1 word

2.6

Shifting 10 words

Shifting 2,048 words using * DM

When decoding word to word

When decoding * DM to * DM

When encoding word to word

When encoding * DM to * DM

When decoding word to word

When decoding * DM to * DM

When setting a constant to a word + a word

When setting a word to a word + a word

When setting * DM to * DM + * DM

When setting a constant to a stack

When setting a word to a stack

When setting * DM to a stack via * DM

2.6

OFF execution time (

µ s)

149

Cycle Time Section 7-1

33.6

34.0

57.1

10.7

11.0

10.8

---

6.2

16.8

22.1

30.1

18.4

26.4

17.2

24.1

23.1

31.1

130.7

110.7

26.1

42.3

17.3

18.0

41.7

13.8

16.2

38.1

22.8

24.3

1.15 ms

27.5

28.0

48.3

19.1

52.2

Code Mnemonic ON execution time ( µ s)

81 COLL 21.5

21.9

42.5

31.5

32.0

784.7

MOVB

MOVD

SFTR

TCMP

ASC

INT

Conditions (Top: min.; bottom: max.)

When setting a constant + a word to a word

When setting a word + a word to a word

When setting * DM + * DM to * DM

When setting a word + constant to FIFO stack

When setting a word + word to FIFO stack

When setting a * DM + * DM to FIFO stack via

* DM

When setting a word + constant to LIFO stack

When setting a word + word to LIFO stack

When setting a * DM + * DM to LIFO stack via

* DM

When transferring a constant to a word

When transferring from one word to another

When transferring

DM to

When transferring a constant to a word

When transferring from one word to another

When transferring * DM to * DM

Shifting 1 word

Shifting 10 words

Shifting 2,048 words using * DM

Comparing constant to word-set table

Comparing word to word-set table

Comparing * DM to * DM-set table

Word → word

* DM → * DM

Set masks via word

Set masks via * DM

Clear interrupts via word

Clear interrupts via * DM

Read mask status via word

Read mask status via * DM

Change counter SV via word

Change counter SV via * DM

Mask all interrupts via word

Mask all interrupts via * DM

Clear all interrupts via word

Clear all interrupts via * DM

Any

SBS

SBN

RET

IORF

MCRO

Refreshing IR 000

Refreshing one input word

Refreshing one output word

With word-set I/O operands

With * DM-set I/O operands

2.6

OFF execution time (

2.6

0.76

1.0

2.8

µ s)

150

Cycle Time Section 7-1

Expansion Instructions without Default Function Codes

Code Mnemonic ON execution time ( µ s)

--ACC 66.5

Conditions (Top: min.; bottom: max.)

---

AVG

FCS

HEX

HMS

MAX

MIN

92.1

66.2

92.2

65.5

75.0

45.4

53.8

65.5

75.0

45.5

53.6

65.0

74.5

45.4

53.5

65.4

74.8

45.5

53.6

23.2

23.9

84.2

27.6

592.3

25.8

72.2

30.7

45.0

21.9

713.9

21.9

713.9

When specifying a word in independent mode and CW/CCW mode

When specifying * DM in independent mode and

CW/CCW mode

When specifying a word in independent mode and Feed/Dir mode

When specifying * DM in independent mode and

Feed/Dir mode

When executing the word designation in CW continuous mode and CW/CCW mode

When executing the * DM designation in CW continuous mode and CW/CCW mode

When changing the word designation in CW continuous mode and CW/CCW mode

When changing the * DM designation in CW continuous mode and CW/CCW mode

When executing the word designation in CCW continuous mode and CW/CCW mode

When executing the * DM designation in CCW continuous mode and CW/CCW mode

When changing the word designation in CCW continuous mode and CW/CCW mode

When changing the * DM designation in CCW continuous mode and CW/CCW mode

2.6

When executing the word designation in CW continuous mode and Feed/Dir mode

When executing the * DM designation in CW continuous mode and Feed/Dir mode

When changing the word designation in CW continuous mode and Feed/Dir mode

When changing the * DM designation in CW continuous mode and Feed/Dir mode

When executing the word designation in CCW continuous mode and Feed/Dir mode

When executing the * DM designation in CCW continuous mode and Feed/Dir mode

When changing the word designation in CCW continuous mode and Feed/Dir mode

When changing the * DM designation in CCW continuous mode and Feed/Dir mode

Average for 1 cycle (constant designation)

Average for 1 cycle (word designation)

Average for 64 cycles ( * DM designation)

Adding one word and outputting to word

Adding 999 words and outputting to * DM

Word → Word

* DM → * DM

When converting word to word

When converting * DM to * DM

Searching one word and outputting to word

Searching 999 words and outputting to * DM

Searching one word and outputting to word

Searching 999 words and outputting to * DM

3.2

2.6

OFF execution time (

µ s)

151

Cycle Time Section 7-1

Code Mnemonic ON execution time ( µ s)

--NEG 12.0

--PID

12.8

28.3

392.5

--PWM

418.8

29.3

58.7

30.3

---

SCL2

SCL3

SEC

SRCH

43.4

46.0

35.1

59.3

37.1

62.3

29.8

44.0

28.9

1.40 ms

---

STUP

SUM

SYNC

TIML

TMHH

ZCP

ZCPL

3.42 ms

34.1

3.44 ms

39.8

22.8

1.44 ms

34.6

35.3

42.5

25.3

32.6

12.8

13.5

12.3

12.7

13.6

9.4

11.8

33.4

19.5

45.2

Conditions (Top: min.; bottom: max.) OFF execution time (

Converting constant to word

Converting word to word

Converting * DM to * DM

Initializing word to word

Initializing * DM to * DM

Sampling word to word

Sampling * DM to * DM

Constant for pulse width ratio

Word for pulse width ratio

* DM for pulse width ratio

Parameter word designation, word to word

Parameter * DM designation, * DM to * DM

Parameter word designation, word to word

Parameter * DM designation, * DM to * DM

Converting from word to word

Converting from * DM to * DM

Searching one word and outputting to a word

* DM specification, searching 2,048 words and outputting to * DM

Constant specification, executed first scan

Constant specification, executed second scan or later

* DM specification, executed first scan

DM specification, executed second scan or later

Word added and output to word

* DM specification, 999 bytes added and output to

Constant ratio specification, when executed

Word ratio specification, when executed

* DM ratio specification, when executed

Word ratio specification, when changed

* DM ratio specification, when changed

3.0

3.3

2.6

Normal execution, constant specification

Interrupt execution, constant specification

Normal execution, constant specification

Interrupt execution, constant specification

Normal execution,

DM specification

Interrupt execution, * DM specification

Comparing a constant to a constant range and output to word

Reset

17.9

25.7

Reset

15.6

17.2

23.6

25.1

2.6

Comparing a word to a word range and output to word

Comparing * DM to * DM and output to * DM

Comparing a word to a word range

Comparing

DM to

2.6

17.5

25.5

15.1

16.9

23.3

24.7

JMP

8.1

JMP

7.4

9.1

7.7

9.1

152

I/O Response Time Section 7-2

7-2 I/O Response Time

7-2-1 CPM2C-S I/O Response Time

The I/O response time is the time it takes after an input signal has been received (i.e., after an input bit has turned ON) for the PC to check and process the information and to output a control signal (i.e., to output the result of the processing to an output bit). The I/O response time varies according to the timing and processing conditions.

The minimum and maximum I/O response times are shown here, using the following program as an example.

Output

Input

Minimum I/O Response

Time

The following conditions are taken as examples for calculating the I/O response times.

Input ON delay:

Overseeing time:

10 ms (input time constant: default setting)

1 ms (includes I/O refreshing)

Instruction execution time: 14 ms

Output ON delay: 15 ms

Communications ports: Not used.

The CPM2C-S responds most quickly when it receives an input signal just prior to I/O refreshing, as shown in the illustration below.

Input point

Input bit

Input ON delay (10 ms)

I/O refreshing Program execution and other processes

(15 ms)

I/O refreshing

Output ON delay (15 ms)

Output point

Maximum I/O Response

Time

Min. I/O response time = 10 + 15 + 15 = 40 ms

The CPM2C-S takes longest to respond when it receives the input signal just after the input refresh phase of the cycle, as shown in the illustration below. In that case, a delay of approximately one cycle will occur.

Input point

Input bit

Input ON delay (10 ms)

I/O refreshing

Program execution and other processes

(15 ms)

I/O refreshing

Program execution and other processes

(15 ms)

I/O refreshing

Output ON delay (15 ms)

Output point

Max. I/O response time = 10+15

2+15 = 55 ms

153

I/O Response Time Section 7-2

7-2-2 I/O Response Time between CompoBus/S Slaves

The I/O response time between CompoBus/S Slaves depends on the cycle time and I/O timing.

CompoBus/S transmission line

Minimum I/O Response

Time

CompoBus/S Slave

The minimum I/O response time is the CPM2C-S program execution time plus the cycle time calculation time.

CompoBus/S input refreshing

CompoBus/S output refreshing

CPM2C-S cycle

Maximum I/O Response

Time

CompoBus/S communications processing

CompoBus/S communications time

Input delay

Slave input

Output delay

Slave output

The maximum I/O response time is as follows:

CPM2C-S cycle time) + CompoBus/S communications time + Compo-

Bus/S Slave input delay + CompoBus/S Slave output delay

CompoBus/S input refreshing

CompoBus/S output refreshing

CPM2C-S cycle

(See note 2.)

CompoBus/S communications processing

CompoBus/S communications time

Cycle time (See note 1.) Cycle time (See note 2.)

Slave input

Slave output

Input delay

Output delay

Note The Slave input is not read for almost one PC cycle because it goes ON just after the start of CompoBus/S communications processing (*1). The input is read during the next CompoBus/S communications processing cycle (*2).

154

Interrupt Processing Time Section 7-3

7-3 Interrupt Processing Time

This section explains the processing times involved from the time an interrupt is executed until the interrupt processing routine is called, and from the time an interrupt processing routine is completed until returning to the initial location. This explanation applies to input interrupts, interval timer interrupts, and high-speed counter interrupts.

1,2,3...

Interrupt source

Interrupt ON delay

Wait for completion of interrupt-mask processing

Change to interrupt processing

Execution of interrupt routine

Return to initial location

The table below shows the times involved from the generation of an interrupt signal until the interrupt processing routine is called, and from when the interrupt processing routine is completed until returning to the original position.

Item

Interrupt ON delay

Wait for completion of interrupt-mask processing

Change to interrupt processing

Return

Contents

This is the delay time from the time the interrupt input bit turns ON until the time that the interrupt is executed. This delay does not apply to other interrupts.

Time

50 µ s

When a process that disables (masks) the interrupt is being executed, this is the time required for that process to be completed.

This is the time it takes to change processing to the interrupt process.

See below.

10 µ s

Example Calculation

This is the time it takes, from execution of RET(93), to return to the processing that was interrupted.

10 µ s

Mask Processing

Interrupts are masked during processing of the operations described below.

Until the processing is completed, any interrupts will remain masked for the indicated times.

Generation and clearing of non-fatal errors:

Interrupts will be masked for up to 100 µ s when a non-fatal error has been generated and the error contents are being registered in the PC, or when an error is being cleared.

Online editing:

Operation will stop and interrupts will be masked for up to 600 ms (for

DM 6144 to DM 6655) when online editing is executed or the settings are changed with STUP(––) during operation. The program or PC Setup can be overwritten during that delay.

In addition to the online editing delay, interrupts may be masked for up to

150

µ s for system processing.

This example shows the interrupt response time (i.e., the time from when the interrupt input turns ON until the start of the interrupt processing routine) when input interrupts are used under the conditions shown below.

Minimum Response Time

Interrupt ON delay:

Interrupt mask standby time:

Change-to-interrupt processing:

Minimum response time:

50 µ s

0 µ s

µ s s

155

One-to-one PC Link I/O Response Time Section 7-4

Maximum Response Time

(Except for the Online Editing of DM 6144 to DM 6655)

Interrupt ON delay:

Interrupt mask standby time:

Change-to-interrupt processing:

Maximum response time:

µ s

150

µ s

10 µ s

210

µ s

In addition to the response time shown above, the time required for executing the interrupt processing routine itself and a return time of 10 µ s must also be accounted for when returning to the process that was interrupted.

7-4 One-to-one PC Link I/O Response Time

When two CPM2C-S PCs are linked 1:1, the I/O response time is the time required for an input executed at one of the PCs to be output to the other PC by means of 1:1 PC Link communications.

The minimum and maximum I/O response times are shown here, using as an example the following instructions executed at the master and the slave. In this example, communications proceed from the master to the slave.

Master Slave

Input

Output (LR) Input

(LR)

Output

Minimum I/O Response

Time

1,2,3...

The following conditions are taken as examples for calculating the I/O response times. In CPM2C-S PCs, LR area words LR 00 to LR 15 are used in

1:1 data links and the transmission time is fixed at 12 ms.

Input ON delay:

Master cycle time:

Slave cycle time:

Output ON delay:

10 ms (input time constant: default setting)

10 ms

15 ms

The CPM2C-S responds most quickly under the following circumstances:

The CPM2C-S receives an input signal just prior to the input refresh phase of the cycle.

The Master’s communications servicing occurs just as the Master-to-Slave transmission begins.

The Slave’s communications servicing occurs just after the transmission is completed.

156

One-to-one PC Link I/O Response Time Section 7-4

Input point

Input bit

The minimum I/O response time = Input ON response time + Master’s cycle time + Transmission time + Slave’s cycle time + Output ON response time

Input ON delay (10 ms)

I/O refresh

Overseeing, communications servicing, etc.

Master

Slave

CPU processing

Program execution

Master's cycle time (10 ms) Master to

Slave

Transmission time (12 ms)

Program execution

Slave's cycle time (15 ms)

Output ON delay (15 ms)

Output point

Maximum I/O Response

Time

Input point

Input bit

1,2,3...

Min. I/O response time = 10+10+12+15+15 = 62 ms

The CPM2C-S takes the longest to respond under the following circumstances:

The CPM2C-S receives an input signal just after the input refresh phase of the cycle.

The Master’s communications servicing just misses the Master-to-Slave transmission.

The transmission is completed just after the Slave’s communications servicing ends.

The maximum I/O response time = Input ON response time + Master’s cycle time × 2 + Transmission time × 3 + Slave’s cycle time × 2 + Output ON response time

Input ON delay (10 ms)

I/O refresh

Overseeing, communications servicing, etc.

CPU processing

Program execution

Master's cycle time (10 ms)

Program execution

Master to Slave

Transmission time (12 ms × 3)

Program execution

Slave's cycle time (15 ms)

Program execution

Output ON delay (15 ms)

Output point

Maximum I/O response time = 10 + 10

2 + 12

3 + 15

2 + 15 = 111 (ms)

157

One-to-one PC Link I/O Response Time Section 7-4

158

SECTION 8 Using Programming Devices

This section outlines the operations possible with the Programming Consoles. Operations for the CX-Programmer are provided in the CX-Programmer Operation Manual (W414, W425) . Refer to

3-4-9 Programming Device Connections

for details on connecting a Programming Console or personal computer to the CPM2C-S.

8-1 Using a Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1-1 Connecting the Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1-2 Compatible Programming Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1-3 Changing the CPM2C-S’ Mode with the Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . .

8-1-4 Preparation for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1-5 Entering the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2 Programming Console Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-2 Clearing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-3 Clearing All Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-4 Reading UM Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-5 Reading/Clearing Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-6 Buzzer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-7 Assigning Expansion Instruction Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-8 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and

Monitoring I/O Bit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-9 Entering or Editing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-10 Instruction Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-11 Bit Operand Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-12 Inserting and Deleting Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-13 Checking the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-14 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-15 Differentiation Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-16 Binary Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-17 Three-Word Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-18 Signed Decimal Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-19 Unsigned Decimal Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-20 Three-Word Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-21 Changing Timer, Counter SV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-22 Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-23 Binary Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-24 Signed Decimal Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-25 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-26 Force Set, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-27 Clear Force Set/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-28 Hex-ASCII Display Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-29 Displaying the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-30 Reading and Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-3 Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-3-1 Preparatory Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-3-2 Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-3-3 Programming Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-3-4 Checking the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-3-5 Test Run in MONITOR Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

159

Using a Programming Console Section 8-1

8-1 Using a Programming Console

This section provides information on connecting and using a Programming

Console. Refer to

9-3 Programming Console Operation Errors

for details on errors that might occur during Programming Console operations.

8-1-1 Connecting the Programming Console

The following diagram shows how a CQM1H-PRO01-E, CQM1-PRO01-E, or

C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console can be connected to the communications port on the CPM2C-S CPU Unit.

A CQM1H-PRO01-E Programming Console can be connected directly.

CQM1H-PRO01-E

Peripheral port

CPM2C-CN111

Connecting Cable

CS1W-CN114

Connecting Cable

CPM2C-S CPU Unit

CQM1-PRO01-E

C200H-CN222 or

C200H-CN422

Connecting Cable

CQM1-PRO27-E

CS1W-CN224 or

CS1W-CN624

Connecting Cable

Peripheral port

A C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console can be connected directly to the

CPU Unit using a CS1W-CN224 or

CS1W-CN624 Connecting Cable.

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

CPM2C-S CPU Unit

Note 1.

Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port. A Programming

Console cannot be connected through the RS-232C port on a CPM2C-

CN111 Adapter.

If the Programming Console’s cable is disconnected and then reconnected within 2 seconds, it won’t be necessary to reenter the password and the previous display status will remain. In some cases, it won’t be necessary to reenter the password if the Programming Console’s cable is disconnect-

160

Using a Programming Console

Panel Installation

Section 8-1 ed while a time-consuming operation (such as a program check) is being performed.

The C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console can be installed in a control panel as shown in the following diagram. (The C200H-ATT01 Mounting

Bracket is sold separately.)

Mounting Bracket

Mounting hole dimensions

(DIN43700 standards)

Two screws

186

+1.1

− 0

Panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm 92

+0.8

− 0

Allow at least 80 mm for the cable connector above the Programming Console.

At least 80 mm is required.

Either connector may be used.

About 70 mm is required.

8-1-2 Compatible Programming Consoles

There are 3 Programming Consoles that can be used with the CPM2C-S: The

CQM1H-PRO01-E, CQM1-PRO01-E and the C200H-PRO27-E. The key functions for these Programming Consoles are identical.

Press and hold the Shift Key to input a letter shown in the upper-left corner of the key or the upper function of a key that has two functions. For example, the

CQM1-PRO01-E’s AR/HR Key can specify either the AR or HR Area; press and release the Shift Key and then press the AR/HR Key to specify the AR

Area.

161

Using a Programming Console

CQM1H-PRO01-E,

CQM1-PRO01-E

Section 8-1

The CQM1H-PRO01-E can be connected directly to the CPM2C-S.

LCD display

Mode switch

Operation keys

Attached Cable (2 m)

C200H-PRO27-E

Attached Cable (2 m)

LCD display

Mode switch

Operation keys

Cassette recorded jack

(Cannot be used with the CPM2C-S).

The following Connecting Cables can be used with the C200H-PRO27-E.

Model Cable length

C200H-CN222 2 m

C200H-CN422 4 m

CS1W-CN224 2 m

CS1W-CN624 6 m

Connection

Connects to the peripheral port on a CPM2C-

CN111 or CS1W-CN114.

Connects directly to the CPM2C-S CPU Unit’s communications port.

162

Using a Programming Console

Different Keys

Section 8-1

The following keys are labeled differently on the CQM1-PRO01-E and the

C200H-PRO27-E, but the operation of the keys in each pair is identical.

CQM1-PRO01-E and CQM1H-PRO01-E Keys C200H-PRO27-E Keys

SET

PLAY

SET

RESET

REC

RESET

Note To specify the AR area, use SHIFT and HR Keys for the C200H-PRO27-E and use SHIFT and AR/HR Keys for the CQM1-PRO01-E/CQM1H-PRO01-E.

A shift symbol will be displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen when the Shift Key is pressed. The shift input can be cleared by pressing the Shift

Key again.

SHIFT

^ Shift input symbol

Mode Switch

Contrast Control

The mode switch controls the CPM2C-S’ operating mode. The key can be removed when the switch is set to RUN or MONITOR but it cannot be removed when the switch is set to PROGRAM.

The display contrast can be adjusted with the control on the right side of the

Programming Console.

Buzzer Volume

Contrast control

The C200H-PRO27-E’s buzzer volume can be adjusted with the lever on the right side of the Programming Console. The buzzer volume cannot be adjusted on the CQM1-PRO01-E and CQM1H-PRO01-E.

Low volume

High volume

C200H-PRO27-E

Note

The buzzer volume can be turned on and off with a key operation. See 8-2-6

Buzzer Operation for details.

163

Using a Programming Console Section 8-1

8-1-3 Changing the CPM2C-S’ Mode with the Mode Switch

Once the Programming Console has been connected, its mode switch can be used to change the CPM2C-S’ operating mode. The mode display (<PRO-

GRAM>, <MONITOR>, or <RUN>) will appear on the Programming Console screen.

• No key operations can be performed while the mode display is displayed on the Programming Console screen. Press CLR to clear the display so that key operations can be performed.

• If the SHIFT Key is pressed while the mode switch is turned, the original display will remain on the Programming Console’s screen and the mode display won’t appear.

• The CPM2C-S will enter RUN mode automatically if a Programming Console isn’t connected when the CPM2C-S is turned on.

MONITOR

RUN PROGRAM

MONITOR

RUN PROGRAM

MONITOR

RUN PROGRAM

Mode display

<PROGRAM> BZ <MONITOR> BZ <RUN> BZ

CLR

Operation

Initial display

00000

Operation

SHIFT CLR

Operating Modes PROGRAM Mode

The CPM2C-S program isn’t executed in PROGRAM mode. Use PROGRAM mode to create and edit the program, clear memory, or check the program for errors.

MONITOR Mode

The CPM2C-S program is executed in MONITOR mode and I/O is processed just as it is in RUN mode. Use MONITOR mode to test system operations, such as monitoring CPM2C-S operating status, force-setting and resetting I/O bits, changing the SV/PV of timers and counters, changing word data, and online editing.

RUN Mode

This is the CPM2C-S’ normal operating mode. The CPM2C-S’ operating status can be monitored from a Programming Device, but bits can’t be force-set/ force-reset and the SV/PV of timers and counters can’t be changed.

!Caution

Check the system thoroughly before changing the operating mode of the PC to prevent any accidents that might occur when the program is first started.

!Caution

Never change the mode while pressing any of the keys.

164

Using a Programming Console Section 8-1

Startup Operating Mode The operating mode of the CPM2C-S when the power is turned ON depends upon the PC Setup settings in DM 6600, the setting of DIP switch pin 4, and the mode set on the Programming Console’s mode switch if a Programming

Console is connected. See 1-3-3 Operating Mode at Startup for details.

8-1-4 Preparation for Operation

This section describes the procedures required to begin Programming Console operation when using the Programming Console for the first time.

!Caution

Always confirm that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode when turning ON the PC with a Programming Console connected unless another mode is desired for a specific purpose. If the Programming Console is in RUN mode when PC power is turned ON, any program in Program Memory will be executed, possibly causing a PC-controlled system to begin operation.

1,2,3...

The following sequence of operations must be performed before beginning initial program input.

Be sure that the PC is OFF.

Connect the Programming Console to the CPU Unit’s communications port

(peripheral port). See

8-1-1 Connecting the Programming Console

for details.

(The CPU Unit’s Communications Switch setting has no effect on communications with the Programming Console.)

Set the mode switch to PROGRAM mode.

Turn ON the PC.

Enter the password. See

8-1-5 Entering the Password

for details.

Clear (All Clear) the PC’s memory. See

8-2-2 Clearing Memory

for details.

Read and clear all errors and messages. See

8-2-5 Reading/Clearing Error Messages

for details.

Start programming.

8-1-5 Entering the Password

To gain access to the PC’s programming functions, you must first enter the password. The password prevents unauthorized access to the program.

The PC prompts you for a password when PC power is turned on or, if PC power is already on, after the Programming Console has been connected to the PC. To gain access to the system when the “Password!” message appears, press CLR and then MONTR. Then press CLR to clear the display.

If the Programming Console is connected to the PC when PC power is already on, the first display below will indicate the mode the PC was in before the Programming Console was connected. Ensure that the PC is in PRO-

GRAM mode before you enter the password.

When the password is entered, the PC will shift to the mode set on the mode switch, causing PC operation to begin if the mode is set to RUN or MONITOR. The mode can be

165

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2 changed to RUN or MONITOR with the mode switch after entering the password.

CLR

PASSWORD!

MONTR

<PROGRAM> BZ

Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch.

8-2 Programming Console Operations

8-2-1 Overview

The following table lists the programming and monitoring operations that can be performed from a Programming Console. Refer to the rest of this section for details on operational procedures.

Name

Clearing memory

Clearing all memory

Reading UM allocations

Reading/clearing error messages

Buzzer operation

Function

Clears all or part of the Program Memory and any data areas that are not read-only, as well as the contents of the Programming Console’s memory.

Clears the user program, including the I/O comment area set by the CX-Programmer (version 2.0 or later), as well as the PC Setup and all bits, timers, counters, and DM Area data.

Reads the capacity of the I/O comment area and the ladder program when an I/O comment area has been set with the CX-Programmer (version 2.0 or later).

Displays and clears error messages and displays MESSAGE instruction messages.

Turns on and off the buzzer that sounds when Programming Console keys are pressed.

Page

Assigning expansion instruction function codes

Setting a program memory address

Reading a program memory address

Instruction search

Bit operand search

Inserting and deleting instructions

Finds occurrences of the specified operand bit in the program.

Inserts or deletes instructions from the program.

Entering or editing programs Overwrites the contents of the current Program Memory to either input a program for the first time or to change a program that already exists.

Checking the program Checks for programming errors and displays the program address and error when errors are found.

Bit, digit, word monitor

Multiple address monitor

Differentiation monitor

Binary monitor

3-word monitor

Signed decimal monitor

Reads or changes the function codes assigned to expansion instructions

Sets the specified program memory address when reading, writing, inserting and deleting programs.

Reads the contents of the Program Memory. Displays the status of the currently displayed bit in PROGRAM and MONITOR modes.

Finds occurrences of the specified instruction in the program.

Monitors the status of up to 16 bits and words, although only 3 can be shown on the display at one time.

Monitors the status of up to 6 bits and words simultaneously.

Monitors the up or down differentiation status of a particular bit.

Monitors the ON/OFF status of any word’s 16 bits.

Monitors the status of three consecutive words.

Converts the contents of the specified word from signed hexadecimal (two’s complement format) to signed decimal for display.

166

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Name

Unsigned decimal monitor

3-word data modification

Function

Converts hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned decimal for display.

Changes the contents of one or more of the 3 consecutive words displayed in the 3-Word Monitor operation.

Changing timer, counter SV 1 Changes the SV of a timer or counter.

Changing timer, counter SV 2 Makes fine adjustment changes to the SV of the timer or counter.

Changes the BCD or hexadecimal value of a word being monitored.

Hexadecimal, BCD data modification

Binary data modification

Signed decimal data modification

Changes the status of a word’s bits when the word is being monitored.

Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as signed decimal data, within a range of –32,768 to 32,767. The contents of the specified word are converted automatically to signed hexadecimal (two’s complement format.)

Page

Unsigned decimal data modification

Force set/reset

Clear force set/reset

Hex-ASCII display change

Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as unsigned decimal data, within a range of 0 to 65,535. A change into hexadecimal data is made automatically.

189

Forces bits ON (force set) or OFF (force reset.)

Restores the status of all bits which have been force set of reset.

Converts word data displays back and forth between 4-digit hexadecimal data and ASCII.

Displaying the cycle time Displays the current average cycle time (scan time.)

Reading and setting the clock Reads or sets the internal clock.

8-2-2 Clearing Memory

All Clear

1,2,3...

This operation is used to clear all or part of the Program Memory and data areas, as well as the contents of the Programming Console’s memory. This operation is possible in PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No No OK

Before beginning to program for the first time or when installing a new program, clear all areas.

The following procedure is used to clear memory completely, including the program, all data areas, counter PVs, Data Memory, and the PC Setup (DM

6600 to DM 6655).

Bring up the initial display by pressing the CLR Key repeatedly.

Press the SET, NOT, and then the RESET Key to begin the operation.

SET NOT RESET

00000MEMORY CLR?

HR CNT DM

Press the MONTR Key to clear memory completely.

MONTR

00000MEMORY CLR

END HR CNT DM

Partial Clear

!Caution

The PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655) will be cleared when this operation is performed.

It is possible to retain the data in specified areas or part of the Program Memory. To retain the data in the HR, TC, or DM Areas, press the appropriate key after pressing SET, NOT, and RESET. Any data area that still appears on the display will be cleared when the MONTR Key is pressed.

167

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

1,2,3...

The HR Key is used to specify both the AR and HR Areas, the CNT Key is used to specify the entire timer/counter area, and the DM Key is used to specify the DM Area.

It is also possible to retain a portion of the Program Memory from the first memory address to a specified address. After designating the data areas to be retained, specify the first Program Memory address to be cleared. For example, input 030 to leave addresses 000 to 029 untouched, but to clear addresses from 030 to the end of Program Memory.

As an example, follow the procedure below to retain the timer/counter area and Program Memory addresses 000 through 122:

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Press the SET, NOT, and then the RESET Key to begin the operation.

Press the CNT Key to remove the timer/counter area from the data areas shown on the display. (Counter PVs will not be cleared.)

CNT

00000MEMORY CLR?

HR DM

Press 123 to specify 123 as the starting program address.

00123MEMORY CLR?

HR DM

Press the MONTR Key to clear the specified regions of memory.

MONTR

00000MEMORY CLR

END HR DM

8-2-3 Clearing All Memory

The I/O comments function has been enabled for the CPM2C-S accompanying the CX-Programmer upgrade from version 1.2 to 2.0. This operation is used when it is necessary to clear the I/O comment area along with the rest of memory. The contents of the I/O comment area are completely initialized, and the size of the area is returned to its initial value of 2.0 Kwords.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No No OK

CLR SET NOT RESET

EXT

00000MEM ALLCLR?

MONTR

00000MEM ALLCLR?

END

This operation is required in order to initialize the I/O comment area along with the program. The memory clear operation (refer to

8-2-2 Clearing Memory ) does not initialize the I/O comment area.

8-2-4 Reading UM Allocations

The I/O comment area and ladder program area capacities can be read by reading UM allocation data when the I/O comment area has been set with the

CX-Programmer (version 2.0 or later). To change the size of the I/O comment

168

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2 area, refer to the CX-Programmer (version 2.0 or later) Operation Manual

(W414).

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

CLR

FUN VRFY

CA LAD

02 04.1

I/O comment area:

2 Kwords

(truncated display of 2,048 words)

Ladder program area:

4.1 Kwords (rounded-off display of 4,096 words)

8-2-5 Reading/Clearing Error Messages

Key Sequence

1,2,3...

This operation is used to display and clear error messages. It is possible to display and clear non-fatal errors and MESSAGE instruction messages in any mode, but fatal errors can be cleared in PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

Before inputting a new program, any error messages recorded in memory should be cleared. It is assumed here that the causes of any of the errors for which error messages appear have already been taken care of. If the buzzer sounds when an attempt is made to clear an error message, eliminate the cause of the error, and then clear the error message. (Refer to

SECTION 9

Test Runs and Error Processing

for troubleshooting information.)

Follow the procedure below to display and clear messages.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Press the FUN and then the MONTR Key to begin the operation. If there are no messages, the following display will appear:

FUN MONTR

ERR/MSG CHK OK

If there are messages, the most serious message will be displayed when the MONTR Key is pressed. Pressing MONTR again will clear the present message and display the next most serious error message. Continue pressing MONTR until all messages have been cleared. These are some examples of error messages:

A memory error:

MEMORY ERR

MONTR

A system error:

MONTR

SYS FAIL FAL01

A message (displayed with MSG(46)):

MATERIAL USED UP

MONTR

169

Programming Console Operations

All messages cleared:

MONTR

ERR/MSG CHK OK

Section 8-2

8-2-6 Buzzer Operation

Key Sequence

1,2,3...

This operation is used to turn on and off the buzzer that sounds when Programming Console keys are pressed. This buzzer will also sound whenever an error occurs during PC operation. Buzzer operation for errors is not affected by this setting.

This operation is possible in any mode.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

Follow the procedure below to turn the key-input buzzer on and off.

Press the CLR, SHIFT, and then the CLR Key to bring up the mode display.

In this case the PC is in PROGRAM mode and the buzzer is ON.

<MONITOR> BZ

CLR SHIFT CLR

Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key to turn off the buzzer.

SHIFT

1 The buzzer will not sound when "BZ" is not displayed.

Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key again to turn the buzzer back ON.

SHIFT

<MONITOR> BZ

8-2-7 Assigning Expansion Instruction Function Codes

1,2,3...

This operation is used to display or change the expansion instructions assigned to expansion instruction function codes. The assignments can be displayed in any mode, but can be changed in PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR Operation

Read assignment OK

Change assignment No

PROGRAM

Assign expansion instruction function codes before inputting the program. The

CPM2C-S will not operate properly if expansion instructions aren’t assigned correctly. An expansion instruction can be assigned to one function code only.

The PC Setup must be set for user-defined expansion instruction assignments. Set bits 8 to 11 of DM 6602 to 1 and turn the PC’s power off and then on again to enable the new setting.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Press the EXT Key to display the assignment for the first function code

(17).

EXT

INST TBL READ

FUN017:ASFT

170

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the expansion instruction function codes.

↓

INST TBL READ

FUN018:FUN

Press the CHG Key to assign a different expansion instruction to the selected function code.

CHG

INST TBL CHG?

FUN018:FUN ~????

Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the expansion instructions that can be assigned to the selected function code.

↓

INST TBL CHG?

FUN018:FUN ~HEX

Press the WRITE Key to assign the displayed instruction to the function code.

WRITE

INST TBL READ

FUN018:HEX

8-2-8 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring

I/O Bit Status

1,2,3...

This operation is used to display the specified program memory address and is possible in any mode. In the RUN or MONITOR mode, the I/O bit status of bits in the program will be displayed.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

When inputting a program for the first time, it is generally written to Program

Memory starting from address 000. Because this address appears when the display is cleared, it is not necessary to specify it.

When inputting a program starting from other than 000 or to read or modify a program that already exists in memory, the desired address must be designated.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Input the desired address. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.

Press the Down Arrow Key.

↓

00200READ OFF

LD 00000

In the RUN or MONITOR mode, ON/OFF status of the bit will be displayed.

Pressing the MONTR Key will change to the I/O monitor display. Bits can be force-set or force-reset from the I/O monitor display. Press the CLR Key to return to I/O bit status monitoring of the initial address.

Note The ON/OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in

RUN or MONITOR mode.

171

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the program.

↓

↑

00201READ

AND

00200READ

00001

OFF

00000

8-2-9 Entering or Editing Programs

This operation is used enter or edit programs. It is possible in PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No No OK

The same procedure is used to either input a program for the first time or to change a program that already exists. In either case, the current contents of

Program Memory is overwritten.

The program shown in the following diagram will be entered to demonstrate this operation.

00002

1,2,3...

TIM 000

#0123

12.3 s

MOV(021)

#0100

LR 10

Address Instruction

00200 LD

00201 TIM

Operands

00002

000

#0123

00202 MOV(021)

#0100

00203 ADB(050)

#0100

#FFF6

DM 0000

ADB(050)

#0100

#FFF6

DM 0000

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Specify the address where the program will begin.

Input the address where the program will begin and press the Down Arrow

Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.

↓

00200READ

NOP (000)

Input the first instruction and operand.

LD C

00200

LD 00002

Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The next program address will be displayed.

WRITE

00201READ

NOP (000)

If a mistake was made inputting the instruction, press the Up Arrow Key to return to the previous program address and input the instruction again. The mistaken instruction will be overwritten

172

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

To specify the Completion Flag for a timer or counter, press the LD, AND,

OR, or NOT Key followed by the TIM or CNT Key, and then input the timer/ counter number last.

Input the second instruction and operand. (In this case it isn’t necessary to enter the timer number, because it’s 000.) Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory.

TIM Timer number WRITE

00201 TIM DATA

#0000

Input the second operand (123 to specify 12.3 seconds) and press the

WRITE Key. The next program address will be displayed.

3 WRITE

00202READ

NOP (000)

If a mistake was made inputting the operand, press the Up Arrow Key to return to display the mistaken operand and input the operand again.

Note a) Counters are input in the same basic way as timers except the

CNT Key is pressed instead of the TIM Key.

b) Timer and counter SVs are input in BCD, so it isn’t necessary to press the CONT/# Key.

Input the third instruction and its operands. First input the instruction by pressing the FUN Key and then the function code (21 in this case).

FUN

00202

MOV (021)

To input the differentiated version of an instruction, press the NOT Key after the function code (FUN 2 1 NOT). The “@” symbol will be displayed next to differentiated instructions. Press the NOT Key again to change back the instruction back to a non-differentiated instruction. The “@” symbol will disappear.

To change an instruction after it has been entered, simply scroll through the program until the desired instruction is displayed and press the NOT

Key. The “@” symbol should be displayed next to the instruction.

Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The input display for the first operand will be displayed.

WRITE

00202 MOV DATA A

000

• Writing Hexadecimal, BCD Constant

10. Input the first operand.

The operands of MOV (21) are normally word addresses, but a constant can be input by pressing the CONT/# Key first. When the CONT/# Key is pressed, the display will change to “#0000,” indicating that a constant can be entered.

CONT

00202 MOV DATA A

#0100

Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The input display for the second operand will appear.

WRITE

00202 MOV DATA B

000

173

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Note The operands of MOV(21) can be word addresses, so the CONT/#

Key must be pressed to input a constant.

• Writing a Word Address

11. Input the second operand.

* EM

00202 MOV DATA B

LR 10

Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The next program address will be displayed.

WRITE

00203READ

NOP (000)

Note When the default display value is “000”, a word address can be input immediately without pressing the Shift and CH/# Keys.

12. Input the next instruction.

FUN

),* #

Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory.

! ),* ,)6) )

WRITE

• Writing an Unsigned Decimal Number

13. The first operand is input as an unsigned integer.

CONT

SHIFT TR NOT

! ),* ,)6) )

Input the value of the operand from 0 to 65535.

5 6

! ),* ,)6) )

Note If an erroneous input is made, press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.

14. Restore the hexadecimal display.

! ),* ,)6) )

SHIFT TR

Note If an input is made outside of the permissible range, a buzzer will sound and the hexadecimal display will not be displayed.

! ),* ,)6) *

WRITE

15. The second operand is input as a signed integer.

CONT

SHIFT TR

00203 ADB DATA B

#+00000

174

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Input the value of the operand from –32,768 to 32,767. Use the SET Key to input a positive number, and use the RESET Key to input a negative number.

RESET

00203 ADB DATA B

#-00010

Note If an erroneous input is made, press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.

16. Restore the hexadecimal display.

SHIFT TR

! ),* ,)6) *

...$

! ),* ,)6) +

WRITE

• Writing a Word Address (DM 0000)

17. Input the final operand and then press the WRITE Key. (It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)

WRITE

00203 ADB DATA C

DM 0000

00204READ

NOP (000)

8-2-10 Instruction Search

1,2,3...

This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified instruction in the program and is possible in any mode.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

The ON/OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or

MONITOR mode.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Input the address from which the search will begin and press the Down Arrow Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.

OUT

↓

00100READ

TIM 001

Input the instruction to be found and press the SRCH Key. In this case, the search is for OUT 01000.

In this case, the next OUT 01000 instruction is at address 200, as shown below.

0 SRCH

00200SRCH

OUT 01000

Press the Down Arrow Key to display the instruction’s operands or press the SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the instruction.

175

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program

Memory is reached. In this case, an END instruction was reached at address 397.

Indicates the address of END instruction.

SRCH

00397SRCH

END (001)00.4KW

Indicates the amount used by the user program in units of 0.1 Kwords.

8-2-11 Bit Operand Search

1,2,3...

This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified operand bit in the program and is possible in any mode.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

The ON/OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or

MONITOR mode.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Input the operand address. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.

SHIFT

CONT

00000CONT SRCH

LD 00005

Press the SRCH Key to begin the search.

SRCH

00123CONT SRCH

LD 00005

Press the SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the operand bit.

SRCH

00255CONT SRCH

AND NOT 00005

The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program

Memory is reached. In this case, an END instruction was reached.

Indicates the address of END instruction.

SRCH

00397CONT SRCH

END (001)00.4KW

Indicates the amount used by the user program in units of 0.1 Kwords.

8-2-12 Inserting and Deleting Instructions

This operation is used to insert or delete instructions from the program. It is possible in PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No No OK

176

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

To demonstrate this operation, an IR 00105 NO condition will be inserted at program address 00206 and an IR 00103 NO condition deleted from address

00205, as shown in the following diagram.

Original Program

Insertion

Deletion

00100 00101

00201 00102

Address Instruction Operands

00103 00104

01000

Delete

00105

Insert

END(01)

Delete 00205 AND

00206 AND NOT

00207 OUT

00208 END(01)

00103

00104

01000

Insert

1,2,3...

Follow the procedure below to insert the IR 00105 NO condition at address

00206.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Input the address where the NO condition will be inserted and press the

Down Arrow Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.

0 6

↓

00206READ

AND NOT

Input the new instruction and press the INS Key.

00104

AND

5 INS

00206INSERT?

AND 00105

Press the Down Arrow Key to insert the new instruction.

↓

00207INSERT END

AND NOT 00104

Note For instructions that require more operands (such as set values), input the operands and then press the WRITE Key.

Follow the procedure below to delete the IR 00103 NO condition at address

00205.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Input the address where the NO condition will be deleted and press the

Down Arrow Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.

↓

00205READ

AND 00103

Press the DEL Key.

DEL

00205DELETE?

AND 00103

Press the Up Arrow Key to delete the specified instruction.

If the instruction has more operands, the operands will be deleted automatically with the instruction.

↑

00205 DELETE END

AND 00105

177

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

After completing the insertion and deletion procedures, use the Up and Down

Arrow Keys to scroll through the program and verify that it has been changed correctly, as shown in the following diagram.

Corrected Program

Address Instruction Operands

00100 00101 00105 00104

01000

00201 00102

END(01)

00205 AND

00206 AND NOT

00207 OUT

00208 END(01)

00105

00104

01000

8-2-13 Checking the Program

This operation checks for programming errors and displays the program address and error when errors are found. It is possible in PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No No OK

1,2,3...

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Press the SRCH Key. An input prompt will appear requesting the desired check level.

SRCH

00000PROG CHK

CHK LBL (0-2)?

Input the desired check level (0, 1, or 2). The program check will begin when the check level is input, and the first error found will be displayed.

00178CIRCUIT ERR

OUT 00200

Note Refer to

9-4 Programming Errors

for details on check levels and the errors that may be detected when the program is checked.

Press the SRCH Key to continue the search. The next error will be displayed. Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search.

The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program

Memory is reached. A display like this will appear if the end of Program

Memory is reached:

SRCH

00300NO END INST

END

A display like this will appear if an END instruction is reached:

SRCH

00310PROG CHK

END (001)00.3KW

No more errors exist if the END instruction is displayed.

If errors are displayed, edit the program to correct the errors and check the program again. Continue checking the program by pressing the SRCH Key again until all errors have been corrected.

178

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

8-2-14 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor

Program Read then

Monitor

1,2,3...

This operation is used to monitor the status of up to 16 bits and words, although only 3 can be shown on the display at any one time. Operation is possible in any mode.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

When a program address is being displayed, the status of the bit or word in that address can be monitored by pressing the MONTR Key.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Input the desired program address and press the Down Arrow Key.

Bit Monitor

1,2,3...

↓

00200READ

TIM

Press the MONTR Key to begin monitoring.

000

MONTR

If the status of a bit is being monitored, that bit’s status can be changed using the Force Set/Reset operation. Refer to

8-2-26 Force Set, Reset

for details.

If the status of a word is being monitored, that word’s value can be changed using the Hexadecimal/BCD Data Modification operation. Refer to

8-2-22

Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification, 8-2-23 Binary Data Modification, 8-

2-24 Signed Decimal Data Modification,

and

8-2-25 Unsigned Decimal

Data Modification for details.

Press the CLR Key to end monitoring.

CLR

00200

TIM 000

Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular bit.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Input the bit address of the desired bit and press the MONTR Key.

SHIFT

CONT

1 MONTR

00001

^ ON

The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the previous or next bit.

In MONITOR mode or PROGRAM mode, the displayed bit’s status can be changed using the Force Set/Reset operation. Refer to

8-2-26 Force Set,

Reset

for details.

Press the CLR Key to end monitoring.

CLR

00000

CONT 00001

179

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Word Monitor

Multiple Address

Monitoring

1,2,3...

Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular word.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Input the word address of the desired word.

SHIFT

* DM

* EM

00000

CHANNEL LR

Press the MONTR Key to begin monitoring.

MONTR cL01

FFFF

The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the previous or next word.

The displayed word’s status can be changed using the Hexadecimal/BCD

Data Modification operation. Refer to

8-2-22 Hexadecimal, BCD Data

Modification, 8-2-23 Binary Data Modification, 8-2-24 Signed Decimal

Data Modification,

and 8-2-25 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification

for details.

Press the CLR Key to end monitoring.

CLR

00000

CHANNEL LR

Note The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode.

1,2,3...

The status of up to six bits and words can be monitored simultaneously, although only three can be shown on the display at any one time.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Input the address of the first bit or word and press the MONTR Key.

TIM MONTR

Repeat step 2 up to 6 times to display the next addresses to be monitored.

SHIFT

CONT

MONTR

00001 T000

^ OFF 0100

D000000001 T000

0000^ OFF 0100

If 4 or more bits and words are being monitored, the bits and words that do not appear on the display can be displayed by pressing the MONTR Key.

If the MONTR Key is pressed alone, the display will shift to the right.

If more than six bits and words are input, monitoring of the bit or word input first will be canceled.

Press the CLR Key to stop monitoring the leftmost bit or word and clear it from the display.

CLR

00001 T000

^ OFF 0100

180

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Press the SHIFT and CLR Keys to end monitoring altogether.

SHIFT CLR

00000

CONT 00001

Note Press the SHIFT Key, CLR Key, and then CLR Key again to return to the initial

Programming Console display with the multiple address monitoring state unchanged. Press the SHIFT Key and then the MONTR Key from the initial display to return to the multiple address monitoring state. The monitoring states can be retained for 6 bits and words.

The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode.

8-2-15 Differentiation Monitor

1,2,3...

This operation is used to monitor the up or down differentiation status of a particular bit. When detected, the up or down differentiation will be displayed and the buzzer will sound. It is possible in any mode.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described

in 8-2-14 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor

. If 2 or more bits are being monitored, the desired bit should be leftmost on the display.

In this case the differentiation status of LR 00 will be monitored.

L000000001H0000

^ OFF^ OFF^ OFF

To specify up-differentiation monitoring, press the SHIFT and then the Up

Arrow Key. The symbols “U@” will appear.

SHIFT

↑

L000000001H0000

U@OFF^ OFF^ OFF

Indicates waiting for the bit to turn ON.

To specify down-differentiation monitoring, press the SHIFT and then the

Down Arrow Key. The symbols “D@” will appear.

SHIFT

↓

L000000001H0000

D@OFF^ OFF^ OFF

The buzzer will sound when the specified bit goes from off to on (for updifferentiation) or from on to off (for down-differentiation).

L000000001H0000

^ ON^ OFF^ OFF

Note The buzzer will not sound if it has been turned off.

Press the CLR Key to end differentiation monitoring and return to the normal monitoring display.

CLR

L000000001H0000

^ OFF^ OFF^ OFF

181

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

8-2-16 Binary Monitor

This operation is used to monitor the ON/OFF status of any word’s 16 bits. It is possible in any mode.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

1,2,3...

Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described in

8-2-14 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor . The desired word should be left-

most on the display if 2 or more words are being monitored.

(Word monitor)

Press the SHIFT and then the MONTR Key to begin binary monitoring. The

ON/OFF status of the selected word’s 16 bits will be shown along the bottom of the display. A 1 indicates a bit is on, and a 0 indicates it is off.

SHIFT

MONTR c010 MONTR

0000000000000000

Bit 15 Bit 00

The status of force-set bits is indicated by “S,” and the status of a force-reset bits is indicated by “R,” as shown below.

c010 MONTR

000S0000000R0000

Force-set bit Force-reset bit

Note a) The status of displayed bits can be changed at this point. Refer to

8-2-23 Binary Data Modification

for details.

b) The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the previous or next word’s bits.

Press the CLR Key to end binary monitoring and return to the normal monitoring display.

CLR

8-2-17 Three-Word Monitor

This operation is used to monitor the status of three consecutive words. It is possible in any mode.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

1,2,3...

Monitor the status of the first of the three words according to the procedure described in

8-2-14 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor .

If 2 or more words are being monitored, the desired first word should be leftmost on the display.

(Word monitor)

&')*

182

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Press the EXT Key to begin 3-word monitoring. The status of the selected word and the next two words will be displayed, as shown below. In this case, DM 0000 was selected.

EXT

? ? ?

! "#$% &')*

The Up and Down Arrow Keys can be used to shift one address up or down.

The status of the displayed words can be changed at this point. Refer to

2-20 Three-Word Data Modification .

The display can be changed to display ASCII text, which is useful when three consecutive words containing an ASCII message are displayed. Re-

fer to 8-2-28 Hex-ASCII Display Change.

Press the CLR Key to end 3-word monitoring and return to the normal monitoring display. The rightmost word on the 3-word monitor display will be monitored.

CLR

&')*

Note The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode.

8-2-18 Signed Decimal Monitor

This operation converts the contents of the specified word from signed hexadecimal (two’s complement format) to signed decimal for display. The operation can be executed while using I/O monitoring, multiple address monitoring or 3-word monitoring.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

1,2,3...

Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor with sign. During multiple address monitoring, the leftmost word will be converted.

c200 cL0020000

FFF0 0000^ OFF

(Multiple address monitor)

Press the SHIFT+TR Keys to display the leftmost word as signed decimal.

SHIFT TR c200

-00016

At this point, the contents of the displayed word can be changed with a signed-decimal input. Refer to

8-2-24 Signed Decimal Data Modification .

Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT+TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal display and return to normal monitoring.

CLR c200 cL0020000

FFF0 0000^ OFF

183

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

8-2-19 Unsigned Decimal Monitor

This operation is used to convert hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned decimal for display. The operation can be executed while using I/O monitoring, multiple address monitoring or 3-word monitoring.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

1,2,3...

Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor without sign. During multiple address monitoring, the leftmost word will be converted.

c200 cL0020000

FFF0 0000^ OFF

Multiple address monitoring

Press the SHIFT+TR+NOT Keys to display the leftmost word as unsigned decimal.

SHIFT TR NOT

$##

At this point, the contents of the displayed word can be changed with an unsigned-decimal input. Refer to

8-2-25 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification .

Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT+TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal display and return to normal monitoring.

CLR c200 cL0020000

FFF0 0000^ OFF

8-2-20 Three-Word Data Modification

This operation is used to change the contents of one or more of the 3 consecutive words displayed in the Three-Word Monitor operation. It is possible in

MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No OK OK

!Caution

Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit, Expansion Units, or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.

1,2,3...

Monitor the status of the desired words according to the procedure described

8-2-17 Three-Word Monitor .

, ,,

! "#$% &')*

(Three-word monitor)

Press the CHG Key to begin 3-word data modification. The cursor will appear next to the contents of the leftmost word.

CHG

D0002 3CH CHG?

00123 4567 89AB

Input the new value for the leftmost word on the display and press the CHG

Key if more changes will be made.

184

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

(Input the new value and press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory if no more changes will be made.)

1 CHG

D0002 3CH CHG?

0001 4567 89AB

Input the new value for the middle word on the display and press the CHG

Key if the rightmost word will be changed. Input the new value and press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory if the rightmost word will not be changed. (In this case, it will not.)

4 WRITE

, ,,

!" &')*

Note If the CLR Key is pressed before the WRITE Key, the operation will be cancelled and the 3-word monitor display will return without any changes in data memory.

8-2-21 Changing Timer, Counter SV

Inputting a New SV

Constant

1,2,3...

There are two operations that can be used to change the SV of a timer or counter. They are possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only. In MONI-

TOR mode, the SV can be changed while the program is being executed.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No OK OK

The timer or counter SV can be changed either by inputting a new value or by incrementing or decrementing the current SV.

This operation can be used to input a new SV constant, as well as to change an SV from a constant to a word address designation and vice versa. The following examples show how to input a new SV constant and how to change the

SV from a constant to an address.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Display the desired timer or counter.

TIM

1 SRCH

00201SRCH

TIM

Press the Down Arrow Key and then the CHG Key.

001

↓

CHG

00201DATA?

T001 #0134 #????

At this point a new SV constant can be input or the SV constant can be changed to a word address designation a) To input a new SV constant, input the constant and press the WRITE

Key.

SHIFT

* DM

4 WRITE

00201 TIM DATA

#0124 b) To change to a word address designation, input the word address and press the WRITE Key.

0 WRITE

00201 TIM DATA

HR 10

185

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Incrementing and

Decrementing a Constant

1,2,3...

This operation can be used to increment and decrement an SV constant. It is possible only when the SV has been entered as a constant.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Display the desired timer or counter.

TIM

SRCH

00201SRCH

TIM

Press the Down Arrow, CHG, and then the EXT Key.

000

↓

CHG EXT

00201DATA ? U/D

T000 #0123 #0123

The constant on the left is the old SV and the constant on the right will become the new SV constant in step 5.

Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to increment and decrement the constant on the right. (In this case the SV is incremented once.)

↓

00201DATA ? U/D

T000 #0123 #0124

Press the CLR Key twice to change the timer’s SV to the new value.

CLR CLR

00201 TIM DATA

#0124

8-2-22 Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification

This operation is used to change the BCD or hexadecimal value of a word being monitored using the procedure described in

8-2-14 Bit, Digit, Word

Monitor . It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No OK OK

Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed.

!Caution

1,2,3...

Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure de-

scribed in 8-2-14 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor

. If two or more words are being monitored, the desired word should be leftmost on the display.

(Word monitor)

Press the CHG Key to begin hexadecimal, BCD data modification.

CHG

PRES VAL?

D0000 0119 ????

Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV.

186

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

The operation will end and the normal monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed.

0 WRITE

8-2-23 Binary Data Modification

This operation is used to change the status of a word’s bits when the word is monitored using the procedure described in

8-2-16 Binary Monitor . It is possi-

ble in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No OK OK

Bits SR 25300 to SR 25507 and timer/counter flags cannot be changed.

!Caution

1,2,3...

Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described

8-2-16 Binary Monitor

(BInary monitor) c010 MONTR

1000010101010101

Bit 15

Press the CHG Key to begin binary data modification.

Bit 00

CHG c010 CHG?

1000010101010101

A flashing cursor will appear over bit 15. The cursor indicates which bit can be changed.

Three sets of keys are used to move the cursor and change bit status: a) Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the left and right.

↓ ↓ c010 CHG?

1000010101010101 b) Use the 1 and 0 Keys to change a bit’s status to on or off. The cursor will move one bit to the right after one of these keys is pressed.

1 c010 CHG?

1010010101010101 c) Use the SHIFT+SET and SHIFT+RESET Keys to force-set or force-reset a bit’s status. The cursor will move one bit to the right after one of these keys is pressed. The NOT Key will clear force-set or force-reset status.

Note Bits in the DM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.

187

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory and return to the binary monitor.

WRITE c010 MONTR

1010010101010101

8-2-24 Signed Decimal Data Modification

This operation is used to change the decimal value of a word being monitored as signed decimal data, within a range of –32,768 to 32,767. The contents of the specified word are converted automatically to signed hexadecimal (two’s complement format).

Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No OK OK

!Caution

1,2,3...

RESET

Monitor (signed decimal) the status of the word for which the present value is to be changed.

(Signed decimal monitor)

D0200

-00016

Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification.

CHG

PRES VAL?

D0200-00016

Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV. The operation will end and the signed-decimal monitoring display will return when the

WRITE Key is pressed.

The PV can be set within a range of –32,768 and 32,767. Use the SET Key to input a positive number, and use the RESET Key to input a negative number.

7 6 8 WRITE

D0200

-32768

If an erroneous input has been made, press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.

The buzzer will sound if a value outside the specified range is input, allowing no writing.

188

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

8-2-25 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification

This operation is used to change the decimal value of a word being monitored as unsigned decimal data, within a range of 0 to 65,535. A change into hexadecimal data is made automatically.

Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No OK OK

!Caution

1,2,3...

Monitor (unsigned decimal) the status of the word for which the present value is to be changed.

(Unsigned decimal monitor)

$##

Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification.

CHG

PRES VAL?

c200 65520

Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV. The operation will end and the decimal-without-sign monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed.

The PV can be set within a range of 0 to 65,535.

7 6 8 WRITE

! %$&

If an erroneous input has been made, press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.

The buzzer will sound if a value outside the specified range is input, allowing no writing.

8-2-26 Force Set, Reset

This operation is used to force bits ON (force set) or OFF (force reset) and is useful when debugging the program or checking output wiring. It is possible in

MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No OK OK

!Caution

189

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

1,2,3...

Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in

8-2-14 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor.

If two or more words are being monitored, the desired bit should be leftmost on the display.

0000020000

^ OFF^ ON

(Multiple address monitor)

Press the SET Key to force the bit ON or press the RESET Key to force the bit OFF.

SET

0000020000

ON^ ON

The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set/ reset is in progress. Bit status will remain ON or OFF only as long as the key is held down; the original status will return one cycle after the key is released.

Press the SHIFT and SET Keys or SHIFT and RESET Keys to maintain the status of the bit after the key is released. In this case, the force-set status is indicated by an “S” and the force-reset status is indicated by an “R.”

To return the bit to its original status, press the NOT Key or perform the

Clear Force Set/Reset operation. Refer to 8-2-27 Clear Force Set/Reset

for details.

Forced status will also be cleared in the following cases: a) When the PC’s operating mode is changed (although the forced status will not be cleared when the mode is changed from PROGRAM to

MONITOR if SR 25211 is ON) b) When the PC stops because a fatal error occurred c) When the PC stops because of a power interruption d) When the Clear Force Set/Reset Operation is performed

8-2-27 Clear Force Set/Reset

This operation is used to restore the status of all bits which have been force set or reset. It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

No OK OK

!Caution

1,2,3...

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Press the SET and then the RESET Key. A confirmation message will appear.

00000FORCE RELE?

SET RESET

Note If you mistakenly press the wrong key, press CLR and start again from the beginning.

190

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

Press the NOT Key to clear the force-set/reset status of bits in all data areas.

NOT

00000FORCE RELE

END

8-2-28 Hex-ASCII Display Change

This operation is used to convert word data displays back and forth between

4-digit hexadecimal data and ASCII. It is possible in any mode.

The displayed PV of the timer or counter cannot be changed.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK OK

1,2,3...

Monitor the status of the desired word(s) according to the procedure de-

scribed in 8-2-14 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor

. While the multiple addresses are being monitored, the leftmost word is subject to change.

"" !!

(Multiple address monitor)

Press the TR Key to switch to ASCII display. The display will toggle between hexadecimal and ASCII displays each time the TR Key is pressed.

, ,

)* !!

"" !!

Note 1.

A message contained in three words can be displayed by using ASCII display in combination with the Three-word monitor operation.

The Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification Operation can be used while displaying ASCII data. Input values in 4-digit hexadecimal.

8-2-29 Displaying the Cycle Time

This operation is used to display the current average cycle time (scan time). It is possible only in RUN or MONITOR mode while the program is being executed.

RUN MONITOR PROGRAM

OK OK No

1,2,3...

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Press the MONTR Key to display the cycle time.

MONTR

00000SCAN TIME

012.1MS

"MS" in the display indicates the unit "ms" for the cycle time.

There might be differences in displayed values when the MONTR Key is pressed repeatedly. These differences are caused by changing execution conditions.

191

Programming Console Operations Section 8-2

8-2-30 Reading and Setting the Clock

This operation is used to read or set the CPU’s clock. The clock can be read in any mode, but can be set in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.

RUN MONITOR Operation

Read clock

Set clock

PROGRAM

1,2,3...

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

Press the FUN Key, SHIFT Key, and then the MONTR Key to display the date and time.

FUN SHIFT MONTR

TIM 00-00-00

00:00:00 SUN(0)

Press the CHG Key to change the date and/or time.

CHG

TIM CHG?00-00-00

11:04:32 SUN(0)

The digit that can be changed will flash. If necessary, input a new value with the Up and Down Arrow Keys or Numeric Keys. Press the CHG Key to move the cursor to the next digit. The following table shows the setting ranges for each value.

Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day-of-week

00 to 99 01 to 12 01 to 31 00 to 23 00 to 59 00 to 59 0 to 6

(SUN to SAT)

Press the WRITE Key to write the new value.

WRITE

TIM 00-09-22

11:04:32 FRI(5)

Press the CLR Key to return to the initial display.

192

Programming Example Section 8-3

8-3 Programming Example

This section demonstrates all of the steps needed to write a program with the

Programming Console.

8-3-1 Preparatory Operations

1,2,3...

Use the following procedure when writing a program to the CPM2C-S for the first time.

Set the Programming Console’s mode switch to PROGRAM mode and turn on the CPM2C-S’ power supply. The password input display will appear on the Programming Console.

MONITOR

RUN PROGRAM

PASSWORD!

Enter the password by pressing the CLR and then the MONTR Key.

CLR MONTR

Clear the CPM2C-S’ memory by pressing the CLR, SET, NOT, RESET, and then the MONTR Key. Press the CLR Key several times if memory errors are displayed.

CLR

SET NOT RESET

MEMORY CLR?

HR CNT DM

MONTR

00000MEMORY CLR

END HR CNT DM

Display and clear error messages by pressing the CLR, FUN, and then the

MONTR Key. Continue pressing the MONTR Key until all error messages have been cleared.

CLR

FUN

MONTR

FUN (0??)

ERR/MSG CHK OK

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial programming display (program address 00000). The new program can be written at this point.

CLR

!Caution

Check the system thoroughly before starting or stopping the CPM2C-S to prevent any accidents that might occur when the program is first started.

193

Programming Example Section 8-3

8-3-2 Example Program

The following ladder program will be used to demonstrate how to write a program with the Programming Console. This program makes output IR 01000 flicker ON/OFF (one second ON, one second OFF) ten times after input

IR 00000 is turned ON.

Start input

00000 C000

20000 Self-holding bit

00000

20000

00004

20000 T002

TIM 001

#0010

1-second timer

00007

20000 T002

TIM 002

#0020

2-second timer

20000 T001

00010

20000

Count input

CNT 000

#0010

10-count counter

Reset input

00014

20000 T001

01000

Flicker output (10 counts)

OFF

END(01)

00017

The mnemonic list for the example program is shown in the following table.

The steps required to enter this program from a Programming Console are described in

8-3-3 Programming Procedures

Address Instruction Data Programming example procedures in

8-3-3 Programming

Procedures

(1) Self-holding bit 00000

00001

00002

00003

00004

00005

00006

00007

00008

00009

00010

00011

00012

00013

00014

00015

00016

00017

AND NOT

OUT

AND NOT

TIM

AND NOT

TIM

AND

LD NOT

CNT

AND NOT

OUT

END (01)

20000

002

0020

20000

001

20000

000

00000

20000

000

20000

002

001

0010

20000

001

01000

---

(2) 1-second timer

(3) 2-second timer

(4) 10-count counter

(5) Flicker output (10 counts)

(6) END(01) instruction

194

Programming Example Section 8-3

8-3-3 Programming Procedures

The example program will be written to the CPM2C-S according to the mnemonic list in

8-3-2 Example Program . The procedure is performed beginning

with the initial display. (Clear the memory before entering a new program.)

Note If an error occurs while inputting the program, refer to

9-3 Programming Console Operation Errors

for details on correcting the error. Refer to the relevant

Support Software Operation Manual for details on errors that appear when operating the SSS or SYSMAC-CPT Support Software.

(1) Inputting the Self-holding Bit

1,2,3...

Input the normally open condition IR 00000.

(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)

WRITE

1READ

NOP (000)

Input the OR condition IR 20000.

00000

WRITE

2READ

NOP (000)

Input the normally closed AND condition C000.

(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)

20000

AND

NOT CNT

AND NOT CNT 000

WRITE

3READ

NOP (000)

Input the OUT instruction IR 20000.

OUT

WRITE

4READ

NOP (000)

(2) Inputting the One-second Timer

1,2,3...

Input the normally open condition IR 20000.

LD C

WRITE

5READ

NOP (000)

20000

195

Programming Example Section 8-3

Input the normally closed AND condition T002.

(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)

AND

NOT

TIM

AND NOT TIM 002

WRITE

6READ

NOP (000)

Input the 1-second timer T001.

TIM

TIM 001

WRITE

6 TIM DATA

#0000

Input the SV for T001 (#0010 = 1.0 s).

WRITE

6 TIM DATA

#0010

7READ

NOP (000)

The following key operations are used to input the 2-second timer.

(3) Inputting the Twosecond Timer

1,2,3...

Input the normally open condition IR 20000.

LD 20000

WRITE

8READ

NOP (000)

Input the normally closed AND condition T002.

(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)

AND

NOT

TIM

AND NOT TIM 002

WRITE

9READ

NOP (000)

Input the 2-second timer T002.

TIM

TIM 002

WRITE

9 TIM DATA

#0000

Input the SV for T002 (#0020 = 2.0 s).

WRITE

9 TIM DATA

#0020

10READ

NOP (000)

196

Programming Example Section 8-3

(4) Inputting the 10-count

Counter

1,2,3...

The following key operations are used to input the 10-count counter.

NOT

Input the normally open condition IR 20000.

LD 20000

WRITE

11READ

NOP (000)

Input the normally open AND condition T001.

(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)

AND

TIM

AND

WRITE

12READ

NOP (000)

Input the normally closed condition IR 20000.

TIM 001

WRITE

LD NOT

13READ

NOP (000)

20000

Input the counter 000.

CNT

CNT 000

WRITE

13 CNT DATA

#0000

Input the SV for counter 000 (#0010 = 10 counts).

WRITE

13 CNT DATA

#0010

14READ

NOP (000)

(5) Inputting the Flicker

Output

1,2,3...

Input the normally open condition IR 20000.

WRITE

15READ

NOP (000)

20000

197

Programming Example Section 8-3

(6) Inputting the END(001)

Instruction

Input the normally closed AND condition T001.

(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)

AND

NOT

TIM

AND NOT TIM 001

WRITE

16READ

NOP (000)

Input the OUT instruction IR 01000.

(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)

OUT

OUT 01000

WRITE

17READ

NOP (000)

Input END(01). (The display shows three digits in the function code, but only the last two digits are input for CPM2C-S PCs.)

FUN

WRITE

FUN (0??)

END (001)

18READ

NOP (000)

8-3-4 Checking the Program

1,2,3...

Check the program syntax in PROGRAM mode to make sure that the program has been input correctly.

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

CLR

Press the SRCH Key. An input prompt will appear requesting the desired check level.

SRCH

PROG CHK

CHK LBL (0-2)?

Input the desired check level (0, 1, or 2). The program check will begin when the check level is input, and the first error found will be displayed. If no errors are found, the following display will appear.

17PROG CHK

END (001)00.1KW

Note Refer to

9-4 Programming Errors

for details on check levels and the programming errors that may be displayed during a program check.

Press the SRCH Key to continue the search. The next error will be displayed. Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search.

The search will continue until an END(01) instruction or the end of Program

Memory is reached.

198

Programming Example Section 8-3

If errors are displayed, edit the program to correct the errors and check the program again. Continue checking the program until all errors have been corrected.

8-3-5 Test Run in MONITOR Mode

1,2,3...

Switch the CPM2C-S in MONITOR mode and check the operation of the program.

Set the Programming Console’s mode switch to MONITOR mode.

RUN

MONITOR

PROGRAM

<MONITOR> BZ

Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.

CLR

Force-set the start input bit (IR 00000) from the Programming Console to start the program.

LD 00000

MONTR

^ OFF

SET

The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set is in progress. The bit will remain ON as long as the Set Key is held down.

The output indicator for output IR 01000 will flash ten times if the program is operating correctly. The indicator should go OFF after ten one-second flashes.

There is a mistake in the program if the output indicator doesn’t flash. In this case, check the program and force set/reset bits to check operation.

199

Programming Example Section 8-3

200

SECTION 9 Test Runs and Error Processing

This section describes procedures for test runs of CPM2C-S operation, self-diagnosis functions, and error processing to identify and correct the hardware and software errors that can occur during PC operation.

9-1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1-1 Initial System Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1-2 Flash Memory Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1-3 CPM2C-S Test Run Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2 Self-diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-1 Identifying Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-2 User-defined Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-3 Non-fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-4 Other Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-5 Fatal Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-3 Programming Console Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-4 Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-5 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-6 Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-7 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201

Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure Section 9-1

9-1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure

9-1-1 Initial System Checks

Check the following items after setting up and wiring the CPM2C-S, but before performing a test run.

Item

Power supply and I/

O connections

Points to check

Is the wiring correct?

Are the terminals securely tightened?

Are there any shorts between crimp terminals or wires?

Refer to

3-4 Wiring and Connections

for details.

Connecting cables Are the cables all connected correctly and locked?

Refer to

3-4 Wiring and Connections for details.

Protective label Has the protective label been removed?

Note 1.

Always clear memory before beginning to program the CPM2C-S. Although memory is cleared before the CPU Unit is shipped, the contents of

the DM, HR, AR, and counter areas may change in transit. See 8-2-2

Clearing Memory

for details on the All Clear operation.

See

1-3-3 Operating Mode at Startup to determine what mode the

CPM2C-S will enter when the power is turned ON.

9-1-2 Flash Memory Precautions

1,2,3...

Observe the following precautions to protect the flash memory and ensure proper operation.

If changes are made in the read-only DM area (DM 6144 through DM

6599) or PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655), the PC’s operating mode must be changed to write the new contents to flash memory. If backup battery is changed before the changes are written to flash memory, the changes will be lost.

The changes can be saved by switching the CPM2C-S to RUN or MONI-

TOR mode or turning the CPM2C-S OFF and then ON again.

When contents of the program, read-only DM (DM 6144 through DM

6599), or PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655) have been changed, startup processing will take up to 1,200 ms longer than usual. Be sure to take this one-time startup delay into account if it may affect operations.

If one of the following three operations is performed in MONITOR or RUN mode, the CPM2C-S’ cycle time will be extended by up to 1,200 ms and interrupts will be disabled while the program or PC Setup is being overwritten.

• Program changes with the online edit operation

• Changes to the read-only DM area (DM 6144 through DM 6599)

• Changes to the PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655)

A “SCAN TIME OVER” error won’t occur during these operations. Be sure to take this delay in the CPM2C-S’ I/O response times into account when performing online editing.

9-1-3 CPM2C-S Test Run Procedure

1,2,3...

Power Supply Application a) Check the CPM2C-S’ power supply voltage and terminal connections.

b) Check the I/O devices’ power supply voltage and terminal connections.

c) Turn ON the power supply and check that the “PWR” indicator lights.

202

Self-diagnostic Functions Section 9-2 d) Use a Programming Device to set the CPM2C-S to PROGRAM mode.

I/O Wiring Checks a) With the CPM2C-S in PROGRAM mode, check the output wiring by turning ON the output bits with the force set and force reset operations.

Refer to

8-2-26 Force Set, Reset

for details.

b) Check the input wiring with the CPM2C-S’ input indicators or a Programming Device’s monitor operations.

Test Run a) Use a Programming Device to set the CPM2C-S to RUN or MONITOR mode and check that the “RUN” indicator lights.

b) Check the sequence of operation with the force set/reset operations, etc.

Debugging

Correct any programming errors that are detected.

Saving the Program a) Use a Programming Device to write the program to a backup floppy disk.

b) Print out a hard copy of the program with a printer.

Note Refer to

SECTION 8 Using Programming Devices

for details on the Support

Software and Programming Console operations.

9-2 Self-diagnostic Functions

The CPM2C-S is equipped with a variety of self-diagnostic functions to help identify and correct errors and reduce down time.

9-2-1 Identifying Errors

An error can be identified by the error message displayed on a Programming

Device, error flags in the AR and SR areas, and the error code output to

SR 253.

Fatal and Non-fatal Errors

Communications Errors

PC errors are divided into 2 categories based on the severity of the errors.

The status of the ERR/ALM indicator (lit or flashing) shows which type of error has occurred.

ERR/ALM Lit (Fatal Error)

Fatal errors are serious errors which stop CPM2C-S operation. There are two ways to restart operation:

• Turn the PC OFF and then ON again.

• Use a Programming Device to switch the PC to PROGRAM mode, and read/clear the error.

ERR/ALM Flashing (Non-fatal Error)

Non-fatal errors are less serious errors which don’t stop CPM2C-S operation.

The LED indicators and AR area flags indicate when a CompoBus/S communications error, RS-232C port error, or peripheral port error has occurred.

CompoBus/S Communications Error

When an error occurs in CompoBus/S communications, the SD and RD indicators will be OFF and the ERC indicator will be ON. Check the Slaves and the transmission lines and restart communications.

203

Self-diagnostic Functions Section 9-2

Error Messages

Error Flags

Error Code

RS-232C Port Error

When an error occurs in communications through the RS-232C port, the

COMM indicator will be OFF and the RS-232C Communications Error Flag

(AR 0804) will be ON. Check the cables and restart communications.

Peripheral Port Error

When an error occurs in communications through the peripheral port, the

COMM indicator will be OFF and the Peripheral Port Communications Error

Flag (AR 0812) will be ON. Check the cables and restart communications.

When an error is detected, a corresponding error message will be displayed on the Programming Console or other Programming Device connected to the

PC.

When a hardware error is detected, the corresponding error flag in the AR or

SR area will be turned ON.

When an error is detected, a specific 2-digit hexadecimal error code is output to SR 25300 to SR 25307. The error code and time of occurrence are also output to the Error Log Area (DM 2000 to DM 2021).

!WARNING

The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system. Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents.

9-2-2 User-defined Errors

There are three instructions that can be used to define errors or messages.

FAL(06) causes a non-fatal error, FAL(07) causes a fatal error, and MSG(46) sends a message to the Programming Console or host computer connected to the PC.

FAILURE ALARM –

FAL(06)

FAL(06) is an instruction that causes a non-fatal error. The following will occur when an FAL(06) instruction is executed:

1,2,3...

SEVERE FAILURE ALARM

– FALS(07)

1,2,3...

The ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash. PC operation will continue.

The instruction’s 2-digit BCD FAL number (01 to 99) will be written to

SR 25300 to SR 25307.

The FAL numbers can be set arbitrarily to indicate particular conditions, but the same number should not be used as both an FAL number and an FALS number.

To clear an FAL error, correct the cause of the error and then execute FAL 00 or use a Programming Device to clear the error.

FALS(07) is an instruction that causes a fatal error. The following will occur when an FALS(07) instruction is executed:

Program execution will be stopped and all outputs will be turned OFF.

The ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will be lit.

204

Self-diagnostic Functions Section 9-2

MESSAGE – MSG(46)

The instruction’s 2-digit BCD FALS number (01 to 99) will be written to

SR 25300 to SR 25307.

The FALS numbers can be set arbitrarily to indicate particular conditions, but the same number should not be used as both an FAL number and an FALS number.

To clear an FALS error, use a Programming Device to switch the PC to PRO-

GRAM Mode, correct the cause of the error, and then clear the error.

MSG(46) is used to display a message on a Programming Device connected to the CPM2C-S. The message, which can be up to 16 characters long, is displayed when the instruction’s execution condition is ON.

9-2-3 Non-fatal Errors

PC operation and program execution will continue after one or more of these errors have occurred. Although PC operation will continue, the cause of the error should be corrected and the error cleared as soon as possible.

When one of these errors occurs, the POWER and RUN indicators will remain lit and the ERR/ALM indicator will flash.

Message

SYS FAIL FAL**

(** is 01 to 99 or 9B.)

SCAN TIME OVER

Battery error

(no message)

FAL No.

Meaning and appropriate response

01 to 99 An FAL(06) instruction has been executed in the program. Check the FAL number to determine conditions that would cause execution, correct the cause, and clear the error.

9B An error has been detected in the PC Setup. Check flags AR 1300 to AR 1302, and correct as directed.

AR 1300 ON: An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup (DM 6600 to

DM 6614) when power was turned ON. Correct the settings in PROGRAM Mode and turn ON the power again.

AR 1301 ON: An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup (DM 6615 to

DM 6644) when switching to RUN or MONITOR mode. Correct the settings in PRO-

GRAM Mode and switch to RUN or MONITOR mode again.

AR 1302 ON: An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup (DM 6645 to

DM 6655) during operation. Correct the settings and clear the error.

The cycle time has exceeded 100 ms. (SR 25309 will be ON.)

This indicates that the program cycle time is longer than recommended. Reduce cycle time if possible. (The CPM2C-S can be set so that this error won’t be detected.)

If the Low Battery Detection Switch is ON and the voltage of the CPM2C-BAT01 backup battery is below the minimum level, the ERR/ALM indicator will flash and SR

25308 will be turned ON. (See page 46 for details on the Low Battery Detection

Switch.)

Replace the battery. (See

9-7 Battery Replacement

for details.)

9-2-4 Other Errors

Message

CompoBus/S communications error (no message)

RS-232 port/peripheral port communications error (no message)

FAL No.

None

Meaning and appropriate response

If the POWER and ERC indicators are lit and the SD and RD indicators are not lit, an error may have occurred in the CompoBus/S communications. Restart after checking slaves and communications paths.

The POWER indicator will be lit and the COMM indicator will not be lit if this error occurs.

AR 0804 ON: An error has occurred in communications between the RS-232C port and peripheral device.

AR 0812 ON: An error has occurred in communications between the peripheral port and peripheral device.

Restart after checking communications path.

205

Programming Console Operation Errors Section 9-3

9-2-5 Fatal Errors

Message

Power interruption

(no message)

MEMORY ERR

NO END INST

I/O BUS ERR

I/O UNIT OVER

SYS FAIL FALS**

(** is 01 to 99 or 9F.)

PC operation and program execution will stop and all outputs from the PC will be turned OFF when any of these errors have occurred. CPM2C-S operation can’t be restarted until the PC is turned OFF and then ON again or a Programming Device is used to switch the PC to PROGRAM mode and clear the fatal error.

All CPU Unit indicators will be OFF for the power interruption error. For all other fatal operating errors, the POWER and ERR/ALM indicators will be lit.

The RUN indicator will be OFF.

FALS

No.

None

Meaning and appropriate response

Power has been interrupted for more than 10 ms (2 ms for DC power types.)

Check power supply voltage and power lines. Try to power-up again.

AR 1308 ON: There is a non-existent bit or word address in the user program. Check the program and correct errors.

AR 1309 ON: An error has occurred in flash memory. Replace the CPU Unit.

AR 1310 ON: A checksum error has occurred in read-only DM (DM 6144 to DM 6599).

Check and correct the settings in the read-only DM area.

AR 1311 ON: A checksum error has occurred in the PC Setup. Initialize the PC Setup and input the settings again.

AR 1312 ON: A checksum error has occurred in the program. Check the program and correct any errors detected.

AR 1313 ON: A checksum error has occurred in the expansion instructions data and all function codes have been set the their default values. Reset the expansion instructions.

AR 1314 ON: Data was not maintained in an area specified for holding. Clear the error, check the data in the areas specified for holding, and try again.

AR 1315 ON: A CompoBus/S Master ASIC error occurred. Replace the CPM2C-S.

END(01) is not written in the program. Write END(01) at the end of the program.

An error has occurred during data transfer between the CPU Unit and an Expansion I/O

Unit or Expansion Unit. Check the Unit’s connecting cable.

Too many Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units (more than 5) have been connected.

Check the Unit configuration. Do not connect more than 3 Expansion Units or Expansion

I/O Units.

01 to 99 A FALS(07) instruction has been executed in the program. Check the FALS number to determine the conditions that caused execution, correct the cause, and clear the error.

9F The cycle time has exceeded the Maximum (Watch) Cycle Time setting (DM 6618).

Check the cycle time and adjust the Maximum Cycle Time setting if necessary.

9-3 Programming Console Operation Errors

The following error messages may appear when performing operations on the

Programming Console. Correct the error as indicated and continue operation.

Message

REPL ROM

Meaning and appropriate response

An attempt was made to write to write-protected memory. Set bits 00 to 03 of DM 6602 to “0.”

PROG OVER The instruction at the last address in memory is not NOP(00). Erase all unnecessary instructions after END(01).

ADDR OVER An address was set that is larger than the highest memory address in Program Memory. Input a smaller address.

SETDATA

ERR

FALS 00 has been input, and “00” cannot be input. Reinput the data.

I/O NO. ERR A data area address has been designated that exceeds the limit of the data area, e.g., an address is too large. Confirm the requirements for the instruction and re-enter the address.

Note Refer to the relevant Support Software Operation Manual for details on errors that may appear when operating the SSS or SYSMAC-CPT Support Software.

206

Programming Errors Section 9-4

9-4 Programming Errors

These errors in program syntax will be detected when the program is checked using the Program Check operation.

Three levels of program checking are available. The desired level must be designated to indicate the type of errors that are to be detected. The following table provides the error types, displays, and explanations of all syntax errors.

Check level 0 checks for type A, B, and C errors; check level 1, for type A and

B errors; and check level 2, for type A errors only.

Type

Message Meaning and appropriate response

????

The program has been damaged, creating a non-existent function code. Re-enter the program.

CIRCUIT ERR The number of LD instructions (LD or LD NOT) does not match the number of logic block instructions (OR LD or

AND LD).Check your program.

OPERAND ERR A constant entered for the instruction is not within defined values. Change the constant so that it lies within the proper range.

NO END INSTR There is no END(01) in the program. Write END(01) at the end of the program.

LOCN ERR

JME UNDEFD A JME(05) instruction is missing for a JMP(04) instruction.

Correct the jump number or insert the proper JME(05) instruction.

DUPL

An instruction is in the wrong place in the program. Check instruction requirements and correct the program.

The same jump number or subroutine number has been used twice. Correct the program so that the same number is only used once for each.

SBN UNDEFD An SBN(92) has not been programmed with the same subroutine number as an SBS(91) instruction in the program.

Correct the program.

STEP ERR

IL-ILC ERR

STEP(08) with a section number and STEP(08) without a section number have been used incorrectly. Check

STEP(08) programming requirements and correct the program.

IL(02) and ILC(03) are not used in pairs. Correct the program so that each IL(02) has a unique ILC(03). Although this error message will appear if more than one IL(02) is used with the same ILC(03), the program will executed as written. Make sure your program is written as desired before proceeding.

JMP-JME ERR JMP(04) and JME(05) are not used in pairs. Make sure your program is written as desired before proceeding.

SBN-RET ERR RET(93) has not been used properly or the relationship between SBN(92) and RET(93) is not correct. Correct the program.

COIL DUPL The same bit is being controlled (i.e., turned ON and/or

OFF) by more than one instruction (e.g., OUT, OUT NOT,

DIFU(13), DIFD(14), KEEP(11), SFT(10)). Although this is allowed for certain instructions, check instruction requirements to confirm that the program is correct or rewrite the program so that each bit is controlled by only one instruction.

JMP UNDEFD JME(05) has been used with no JMP(04) with the same jump number. Add a JMP(04) with the same number or delete the JME(05) that is not being used.

SBS UNDEFD A subroutine exists that is not called by SBS(91). Program a subroutine call in the proper place, or delete the subroutine if it is not required.

207

Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 9-5

9-5 Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Use the following flowcharts to troubleshoot errors that occur during operation.

Main Check

Error

PWR indicator lit?

Yes

Check power supply.

(see page 209.)

RUN indicator lit?

No Operation stopped. Check for fatal errors.

(see page 210.)

Yes

ERR/ALM indicator flashing?

Not lit

Flashing

Is I/O sequence normal?

Yes

Operating environment normal?

Yes

Replace the CPU

Unit.

Check for non-fatal errors.

Check I/O.

(see page 211.)

(see page 212.)

Check operating environment.

(see page 214.)

208

Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Power Supply Check

PWR indicator not lit.

Is power being supplied?

Yes

Connect power supply.

Is PWR indicator lit?

Yes

Section 9-5

Is voltage adequate?

Yes

Set supply voltage within acceptable limits.

Is PWR indicator lit?

Yes

Are there any disconnected connectors or broken wires?

Yes Connect connectors or replace wires.

Is PWR indicator lit?

Yes

Replace the CPU

Unit.

End

209

Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Fatal Error Check

RUN indicator not lit.

No Is the ERR/ALM indicator lit?

Yes

Determine the cause of the error with a

Programming Device.

Section 9-5

Yes

Is PC mode displayed on Programming

Device?

Is PC mode displayed on

Programming Device?

Yes

Turn the power supply OFF, and then ON again.

Is a fatal error displayed?

Switch to RUN or

MONITOR mode.

Yes

Identify the error, eliminate its cause, and clear the error.

Follow the

Memory Error

Check flowchart if a memory

error has occurred.

Is the RUN indicator lit?

Yes

End

Replace the CPU

Unit.

210

Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Non-fatal Error Check

ERR/ALM indicator flashing.

Determine the cause of the error with a Programming Device.

Section 9-5

Is a non-fatal error in dicated?

Yes

Identify the error, eliminate its cause, and clear the error.

Is the ERR/ALM indicator flashing?

Not lit

Flashing

End

Replace the CPU

Unit.

211

Troubleshooting Flowcharts

I/O Check

Section 9-5

The I/O check flowchart is based on the following ladder diagram section.

(LS1)

00002

(LS2)

00003

01003 SOL1

01003

SOL1 malfunction.

Malfunction of SOL1

Is the

IR 01003 output indicator operating normally?

Yes

Check the voltage at the

IR 01003 terminals.

Wire correctly.

Operation OK?

Yes

Is output wiring correct?

Yes

Monitor the ON/OFF status of IR 01003 with a Programming

Device.

Operation OK?

Yes

To next page

Check output device

SOL1.

Disconnect the external wires and check the conductivity of each wire.

Yes

Operation OK?

Replace the CPU Unit, Expansion Unit, or Expansion

I/O Unit with the problem.

212

Troubleshooting Flowcharts

From previous page

Are the IR 00002 and IR 00003 input indicators operating normally?

Yes

Check the voltage at the IR 00002 and

IR 00003 terminals.

Section 9-5

Check the voltage at the IR 00002 and

IR 00003 terminals.

Operation OK?

Yes

Check operation by using a dummy input signal to turn the input ON and OFF.

Operation OK?

Yes

Is input wiring correct?

Wire correctly.

Yes

Tighten the terminal screws and connect connectors.

Are the terminal screws loose or connectors disconnected?

Operation OK?

Yes

Replace the CPU Unit,

Expansion Unit, or

Expansion I/O Unit.

Check input devices

LS1 and LS2.

Return to "start."

Replace the CPU Unit,

Expansion Unit, or

Expansion I/O Unit.

213

Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Environmental Conditions Check

Environmental conditions check

Is the ambient temperature below 55

Yes

Is the ambient temperature above

0 ° C?

Yes

Consider using a fan or cooler.

Consider using a heater.

Is the ambient humidity between 10% and

85%?

Yes

Is noise being controlled?

Yes

Consider using an air conditioner.

Install surge protectors or other noisereducing equipment at noise sources.

Is the installation environment okay?

End.

Yes

Consider constructing an instrument panel or cabinet.

Section 9-5

214

Troubleshooting Flowcharts

Memory Error Check

Memory error occurred.

AR 1309 ON?

Yes Replace the CPU

Unit.

AR 1314 ON?

Yes Check/correct backed-up data and clear error.

Section 9-5

AR 1308 ON?

Yes Check the program, correct any errors, and clear the error.

AR 1310 to

AR 1312 ON?

Yes

Turned ON during startup?

Yes

Check the error indicated by the flag that is ON, correct settings as required, and write data to the flash memory.

Check the external environment.

End

215

Maintenance Inspections Section 9-6

9-6 Maintenance Inspections

In order for your SYSMAC system to operate in optimum condition, be sure to carry out daily or periodical inspections.

Inspection Items The main system components of a SYSMAC system are semiconductors, and it contains few components with limited lifetimes. Poor environmental conditions, however, can lead to deterioration of the electrical components, making regular maintenance necessary.

The standard period for maintenance checks is 6 months to 1 year, but more frequent checks are required if the PC is operated in more demanding conditions.

If the criteria are not met, adjust to within the specified ranges.

Inspection items

Power supply

Environmental conditions

I/O power supply

Installation status appropriate?

Details

Determine whether the voltage fluctuation at the power supply terminals is within specifications.

Is the ambient temperature inside the panel appropriate?

Is the ambient humidity inside the panel

Has dirt or dust collected?

Battery (CPM2C-BAT01)

Criteria

Within the voltage variation range (see note)

0 to 55 ° C

10% to 90% RH with no condensation

None

Is the voltage fluctuation measured at the I/

O terminals within the standard range?

Are all units securely installed?

Each I/O terminal must conform to the specifications

Nothing is loose

Nothing is loose Are all connection cables and connectors inserted completely and locked?

Are any of the external wiring screws loose? Nothing is loose

Are any of the external wiring cables frayed?

No external abnormalities

Product service life Contact output relay Electrical:

Resistance load:

150,000 operations

Inductive load:

100,000 operations

Mechanical:

20,000,000 operations

2 years at 25 ° C

Tester

Remarks

Thermometer

Hygrometer

Visual inspection

Tester

Phillips screwdriver

Visual inspection

Phillips screwdriver

Visual inspection

---

Note Power supply voltage range:

Power supply

100 to 240 VAC (CPM2C-PA201 only)

24 VDC

Allowable voltage fluctuation range

85 to 264 VAC

20.4 to 26.4 VDC

Required Tools Standard Tools (Required)

• Screwdrivers (Phillips and flat-blade)

• Voltage tester or digital voltage meter

• Industrial alcohol and a cotton cloth

Measurement Devices (May be Needed)

• Synchroscope

• Cathode-ray oscilloscope

• Thermometer, hygrometer

Note Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the PC in any way.

216

Battery Replacement Section 9-7

9-7 Battery Replacement

!WARNING

The backup battery may explode, catch fire, or leak if dropped, broken apart, crushed, short-circuited, recharged, heated to 100 ° C or higher, or burned.

1,2,3...

If power has not been supplied to the PC for some time, turn ON the power supply for at least 5 minutes to charge the backup capacitor before replacing the battery.

Turn OFF the power supply to the PC before replacing the battery. To protect the contents of memory, this procedure must be completed within 5 minutes.

A label has been included to remind the user when the battery needs to be replaced. After replacing the battery, write the next date that the battery should be replaced on the label and affix the label in a visible place such as the inside of the communications port cover.

Be sure to dispose of the old battery in accordance with local laws and regulations.

A CPM2C-BAT01 Backup Battery is built into CPU Units that are equipped with an internal clock. Replace the battery within two years when used under

C. When the battery voltage drops, the ERR/ALM indicator will flash and

SR 25308 will be turned ON. (Refer to page 205.) In this case, replace the

battery within seven days. Use the procedure below when replacing the battery.

Stop CPM2C-S operation and turn OFF the power supply.

Remove the battery cover with a flat-blade screwdriver.

Battery cover

Remove the battery and disconnect the battery connector.

217

Battery Replacement Section 9-7

Install the new battery. Be sure that the connector is aligned correctly and the wires are not pinched or kinked when the battery is inserted.

To enable the detection of low battery errors, slide the Low Battery Detection Switch towards the front of the Unit and set bits 12 to 15 of DM 6655 to “0.”

Low Battery Detection Switch

Enable

Replace the battery cover.

Write the next date that the battery should be replaced on the reminder label. The battery lifetime of the CPU Unit with clock is 2 years at 25

C and that of the CPU Unit without clock is 5 years at 25

218

SECTION 10 Expansion Memory Unit

This section describes how to use the CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit. Follow the handling precautions and procedures to properly use the Unit.

10-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-1-1 Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-1-2 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-2 Specifications and Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-2-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-2-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-3 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-3-1 Mounting/Removing EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-3-2 PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-3-3 Uploading Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-3-4 Downloading Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

219

Overview

10-1 Overview

Section 10-1

The CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit is a program loader for smallsize or micro PCs. Using the CPM1-EMU01-V1, simple on-site transfer of user programs and data memory between PCs is possible.

Uploading

Downloading

CPM2C-CN111

CS1W-CN114

Expansion Memory Unit

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

Note The “PLC” in the “DOWNLOAD TO PLC” Button indicates PCs (Programmable Controllers).

10-1-1 Memory Areas

The memory areas that are uploaded or downloaded vary with the button used as shown in the following table.

Button

Ladder program and expansion instructions

DM 6144 to 6655

UPLOAD + DM

Read from PC to

EEPROM.

UPLOAD

Read from PC to

EEPROM.

Not affected.

DOWNLOAD TO

PLC

All contents of

EEPROM written to

PC.

Note For details on program size, DM area, and the availability of expansion instructions, refer to the relevant PC manual.

10-1-2 Precautions

• Do not attempt to use the CPM1-EMU01-V1 for any applications other than those described here. Doing so may result in malfunction.

• Do not attempt to upload or download data between different types of PC.

Doing so may result in malfunction.

• Do not download when the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode. If downloading is performed when the PC is running, it will automatically switch to

PROGRAM mode and operation will stop.

• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the CPM1-EMU01-V1.

Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.

• After downloading has been completed, be sure to confirm the user program, data, and expansion instruction information. Not doing so may result in faulty operation.

220

Specifications and Nomenclature Section 10-2

• Before touching the EEPROM or the CPM1-EMU01-V1, first touch a grounded metallic object to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.

10-2 Specifications and Nomenclature

10-2-1 Specifications

Note

Item

Supported PCs

Read/Write memory areas

Connector

Specifications

CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CPM2C-S, SRM1 (-

V2), CQM1, CQM1H

User program: 15.2 Kwords max.

Data memory: DM 6144 to DM 6655

(Read-only DM and PC Setup)

Expansion instructions: 18 instructions

Connector compatible with peripheral port of CPM1,

CPM1A, CPM2A, SRM1 (-V2), and CQM1 PCs.

For CPM2C, CPM2C-S and CQM1H PCs, connect via

CS1W-CN114 or CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable.

Communications setting 1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, 9,600 bps

EEPROM (See note 1.) 256-Kbit EEPROM

ATMEL: AT28C256

OMRON: EEROM-JD

Current consumption 129 mA max.

Dimensions

Weight

Main body (not including cables or connectors):

57 × 92 × 38 mm (W × H × D)

200 g max. (not including EEPROM)

The EEPROM must be purchased separately.

For general specifications, refer to the relevant PC manual.

10-2-2 Nomenclature

Peripheral Port

Connector

Lock Lever

Indicator

UPLOAD + DM Button

EEPROM Socket

DOWNLOAD to PLC Button

UPLOAD Button

Lock Lever

For mounting and removing EEPROM.

DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button

Writes all EEPROM data (ladder programs, data memory etc.) to the PC.

UPLOAD + DM Button

Reads PC user program and contents of

DM 6144 to DM 6655 to EEPROM.

UPLOAD Button

Reads only PC user program to EEPROM.

Note The “PLC” in the “DOWNLOAD TO PLC” Button indicates PCs (Programmable Controllers).

221

Handling Section 10-3

LED Indicator

CONNECT

(green)

OFF

Blinking

OFF

ERR (red)

OFF

Blinking

Meaning

Not connected to PC (power supply OFF).

Connected to a recognized PC.

Uploading/downloading data.

Host link communications error, retry by user.

PC model and EEPROM data not compatible.

One of the following errors has occurred:

• An unrecognized PC is connected.

• An EEPROM error (EEPROM not present,

EEPROM defect, or no program to download) occurred.

• A checksum error occurred.

10-3 Handling

10-3-1 Mounting/Removing EEPROM

!Caution

Do not mount or remove the EEPROM with the CPM1-EMU01-V1 connected to the PC. Doing so may damage the EEPROM.

Mounting EEPROM

1,2,3...

Lift up the lock lever.

Straighten the pins on the EEPROM, line up with the socket and lower into the socket, as shown in the following diagram. If the EEPROM is loose, place it in the center of the socket.

1. Lift up the lock lever.

EEPROM

2. Insert the EEPROM.

Gently hold down the EEPROM and pull down the lock lever.

3. Pull down the lock lever.

Removing EEPROM

222

Lift up the lock lever and detach the EEPROM.

Handling Section 10-3

10-3-2 PC Connections

!Caution

Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1-EMU01-V1 before connecting the CPM1-

EMU01-V1 to the PC.

!Caution

Do not disconnect the CPM1-EMU01-V1 from the PC when the indicator is blinking green.

CPM2C-S, CPM2C, and

CQM1H PCs

When connecting to a CPM2C-S, CPM2C, or CQM1H, connect to the peripheral port via the CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114 Connecting Cable. Also, set the pins on the CPU Unit’s DIP switch as follows:

CPM2C-S

CPM2C

CQM1H

Pin 3: ON (see note)

Pin 4: ON

Pin 1: ON (see note)

Pin 2: ON

Pin 5: ON (see note)

Pin 7: ON

CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A,

CQM1, and SRM1 (-V2)

PCs

Note If pin 3 on the CPM2C-S, pin 1 on the CPM2C, or pin 5 on the CQM1H is OFF, connection is still possible if the peripheral port settings in the PC Setup

(DM 6650 to DM 6654) are set to the standard communications settings.

When connecting to the CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CQM1 or SRM1 (-V2),insert the connector into the peripheral port making sure that the connector is oriented correctly.

• Insert the connector until it securely locks into place.

• Connections are not possible to the RS-232C port or any other port.

Peripheral Port

Communications Settings

Disconnecting

The peripheral port must be set to the default communications settings shown below.

Start bits:1

Data bits:7

Stop bits:2

Parity: Even

Baud rate: 9,600 bps

Press the levers on the top and bottom of the connector inwards to unlock the connector and pull out as shown in the following diagram.

Note Do not attempt to remove the connector by pulling the cable.

223

Handling Section 10-3

10-3-3 Uploading Programs

Ladder programs and the contents of data memory can be uploaded to the

EEPROM using the following procedure. The buttons used will determine whether the contents of data memory are uploaded or not.

CPM2C-S

CPM2C-CN111

Expansion Memory Unit

EEPROM

CS1W-CN114

CPM2C-S

Indicator

UPLOAD+DM Button UPLOAD Button

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

Button

Ladder program and expansion instructions

DM6144 to 6655

UPLOAD + DM

Read from PC to

EEPROM.

UPLOAD

Read from PC to

EEPROM.

Not affected.

Note Use a Phillips screwdriver or other tool with a diameter of 3.0 mm max. and a blade length of 10 mm min. to press the upload button.

3.0 dia. max.

10 mm min.

Uploading is possible even if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode.

224

Handling

Operation Procedure

Start

Mount the EEPROM to the

CPM1-EMU01-V1.

Section 10-3

Connect the CPM1-EMU01-V1 to the PC's communications port (peripheral port).

After 2 or 3 s, check if the indicator is lit green.

Yes

Select the memory area to be uploaded.

See the note on the right.

Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1-EMU01-V1 before connecting to the PC.

Check the orientation of the connector before connecting the CPM1-EMU01-V1.

Note If the indicator is not lit at all, lit red or blinks red, uploading will not be possible. In this case, check the following items.

•

Is the connector properly connected?

•

Is the EEPROM properly mounted?

•

Are the EEPROM specifications correct?

•

Are the peripheral port communications settings correct?

Upload both the ladder program and DM 6144 to

DM 6655.

Upload only the ladder program.

Press the UPLOAD+DM

Button.

Press the UPLOAD Button.

Check if the indicator is blinking green

(indicating that uploading has started).

Yes

Check if the indicator is lit green (indicating that uploading has been successfully completed).

See the note above.

Yes

Remove the Expansion Memory Unit from the PC.

End

225

Handling Section 10-3

10-3-4 Downloading Programs

Ladder programs and the contents of data memory can be downloaded from the EEPROM to the PC using the procedure given below. When downloading, note the following points.

!Caution

If the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode when downloading is started, it will automatically switch to PROGRAM mode and operation will stop. Confirm that no adverse effects will occur to the system before downloading. Not doing so may result in unexpected operation.

Note 1.

If the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode, switch the PC mode to PROGRAM mode.

Confirm that the program or other data to be downloaded to the PC is compatible with the PC before downloading.

For the CQM1 or CQM1H, when downloading programs that use user-assigned function codes for expansion instructions, be sure that pin 4 on the

CPU Unit’s DIP switch is ON. If these programs are downloaded while the pin is OFF, the assignments for the expansion instructions will return to their default settings.

After downloading has been completed, be sure to confirm the user program, data, and expansion instructions.

When the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button is pressed, all EEPROM data (ladder programs, data memory etc.) is written to the PC.

CPM2C-CIF01

CPM2C-S

CPM2C-CN111

Expansion Memory Unit

EEPROM

Indicator

CS1W-CN114

DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button

CPM2C-S

CPM2C-CIF01-V1

226

Handling

Operation Procedure

Start

Section 10-3

Mount the EEPROM to the

CPM1-EMU01-V1.

Mount the EEPROM to the

CPM1-EMU01-V1 before downloading.

Change the mode of the PC to PRO-

GRAM mode.

Confirm the safety of the system.

Connect the CPM1-EMU01-V1 to the

PC's peripheral port.

Confirm the orientation of the connector before connecting the CPM1-EMU01-V1.

After 2 or 3 s, check if the indicator is lit green.

Yes

Press the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button.

See the note on the right.

Check if the indicator is blinking green (indicating that downloading has started).

Note If the indicator is not lit at all, lit red or blinks red, downloading will not be possible. In this case, check the following items.

•

Is the connector properly connected?

•

Is the EEPROM properly mounted?

• Are the EEPROM specifications correct?

•

Are the peripheral port communications settings correct?

See the note above.

Yes

Check if the indicator is lit green

(indicating that downloading has been successfully completed).

See the note above.

Yes

Remove the Expansion Memory Unit from the PC.

Check the program.

End

Before actual operation, check the contents of the ladder program and the DM area, as well as the expansion instruction settings.

227

Appendix A

Standard Models

CPM2C-S CPU Units

Appearance

Standard CPU Units

Transistor outputs

Sinking

CPM2C-S100C

Sourcing

CPM2C-S110C

DeviceNet Slave functions

Input points

6 points

Output points

4 points

CPU Units with

DeviceNet Slave functions

CPM2C-S100C-DRT CPM2C-S110C-DRT Yes

Expansion I/O Units

Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual (W356) for descriptions of the specifications and wiring of Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units.

Inputs Outputs Model Classification and Appearance

Units with Terminal

Blocks

I/O capacity

10 I/O points 6 points (24 VDC) 4 relay outputs CPM2C-10EDR

20 I/O points 12 points (24 VDC) 8 relay outputs CPM2C-20EDR

8 output points --8 relay outputs CPM2C-8ER

Units with Fujitsucompatible Connectors

24 I/O points 16 points (24 VDC) 8 transistor outputs (sinking)

8 transistor outputs (sourcing)

32 I/O points 16 points (24 VDC) 16 transistor outputs (sinking) CPM2C-32EDTC

16 transistor outputs (sourcing) CPM2C-32EDT1C

8 input points 8 points (24 VDC) ---

16 input points 16 points (24 VDC) ---

CPM2C-8EDC

CPM2C-16EDC

8 output points ---

CPM2C-24EDTC

CPM2C-24EDT1C

16 output points ---

8 transistor outputs (sinking)

8 transistor outputs (sourcing)

CPM2C-8ETC

CPM2C-8ET1C

16 transistor outputs (sinking) CPM2C-16ETC

16 transistor outputs (sourcing) CPM2C-16ET1C

229

Standard Models Appendix A

Classification and Appearance

Units with MIL

Connectors

I/O capacity Inputs Outputs Model

24 I/O points

32 I/O points

16 outputs points

16 points (24 VDC) 8 transistor outputs (sinking)

8 transistor outputs (sourcing)

CPM2C-24EDTM

CPM2C-24EDT1M

16 points (24 VDC) 16 transistor outputs (sinking) CPM2C-32EDTM

16 transistor outputs (sourcing) CPM2C-32EDT1M

8 input points 8 points (24 VDC) ---

16 input points 16 points (24 VDC) ---

8 output points --8 transistor outputs (sinking)

8 transistor outputs (sourcing)

---

CPM2C-8EDM

CPM2C-16EDM

CPM2C-8ETM

CPM2C-8ET1M

16 transistor outputs (sinking) CPM2C-16ETM

16 transistor outputs (sourcing) CPM2C-16ET1M

I/O Connectors (OMRON Products)

Connector

C500-CE241

Description

24-pin soldered connector with cover

C500-CE242

C500-CE243

24-pin crimp connector with cover

24-pin pressure connector

Expansion Units

Analog I/O Unit

Model

CPM2C-MAD11

Name

Analog I/O Unit

Specifications

2 analog inputs, 1 analog output

Temperature Sensor Units

Model

CPM2C-TS001

CPM2C-TS101

Name

Temperature Sensor

Unit

Specifications

2 thermocouple inputs

2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs

CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit

Model

CPM2C-SRT21

Name

CompoBus/S I/O

Link Unit

Specifications

Allocates I/O (8 inputs and 8 outputs) to the CPM2C-

S for use as a CompoBus/S Slave.

230

Standard Models

AC Power Supply Unit

Model

CPM2C-PA201

Name

AC Power Supply

Unit

Specifications

Input: 100 to 240 VAC

Output: 24 VDC/600 mA

Appendix A

Communications Port Connecting Cables

Connector

CPM2C-CN111

Connecting Cable

Description

Converts the CPM2C-S CPU Unit’s communications port to a peripheral port and RS-232C port.

Cable length

0.15 m (about 4”)

CS1W-CN114

Connecting Cable

CS1W-CN118

Connecting Cable

Converts the CPM2C-S CPU Unit’s communications port to a peripheral port.

Converts the CPM2C-S CPU Unit’s communications port to an RS-232C port.

0.05 m (about 2”)

0.1 m (about 2”)

Peripheral Devices

Name

Programming Console

Appearance Model Number Specifications

CQM1H-PRO01-E 2-m Connecting Cable attached

The CQM1H-PRO01-E can be connected directly to the CPM2C-S.

CQM1-PRO01-E 2-m Connecting Cable attached

CX-Programmer

C200H-PRO27-E

C200H-CN222

C200H-CN422

Hand-held, w/backlight; requires one of the Connecting Cables listed below.

Connects the C200H-PRO27-E to a peripheral port.

2-m cable

4-m cable

CS1W-CN224

CS1W-CN624

Connects the C200H-PRO27-E directly to the CPM2C-S CPU Unit’s communications port.

2-m cable

6-m cable

WS02-CXPC1-EV3 For Windows 95, 98, Me, 2000, XP, or NT 4.0 (service pack 5 or higher) (CD-ROM)

231

Standard Models

Maintenance Accessories

Name

Backup Battery

Appearance Model Number

CPM2C-BAT01 ---

Expansion Memory Unit

Appendix A

Specifications

CPM1-EMU01-V1 Uploads the ladder program and DM 6144 to DM 6655 from the PC to the EEPROM and downloads the ladder program and

DM 6144 to DM 6655 from the EEPROM to the PC.

EEPROM EEROM-JD 256 Kbits

Adapters and Connecting Cables

Appearance Model number CPM2C-S communications port usage

Peripheral

Name

RS-232C

Adapter

Peripheral/

RS-232C

Adapter

Unit

Comments

CPM2C-CIF01-

Use for peripheral port to RS-

232C conversion.

Cable length

CQM1-CIF02 For a 9-pin computer serial port 3.3 m

---

RS-232C RS-232C

Cable

RS-232C Cables

(For use with the NT-AL001.)

XW2Z-200S

XW2Z-500S

For a 25-pin computer serial port 2 m

5 m

XW2Z-200S-V For a 9-pin computer serial port 2 m

XW2Z-500S-V 5 m

XW2Z-070T-1 Use for CPM2C-S RS-232C port to NT-AL001 connection. (70-cm cable)

XW2Z-070T-1 Use for CPM2C-S RS-232C port to NT-AL001 connection. (2-m cable)

232

Standard Models Appendix A

Adapters (1:N Connections)

Name

RS-422 Adapter

Appearance Model number

NT-AL001

Specifications

Use for CPM2C-S RS-232C port to RS-422A conversion.

Requires a 5-VDC, 150 mA power supply which is supplied through the CPM2C-S connection.

(Can also be connected to a personal computer, but this connection requires an external 5-VDC power supply.)

Link Adapter B500-AL004 Use for personal computer RS-232C port to RS-422A conversion.

(Can also be connected to a CPM2C-S.)

RS-422/RS-232C

Adapter Unit

CPM2C-CIF11 Use for CPM2C-S peripheral port to RS-422 conversion.

233

All dimensions are in millimeters.

CPU Units

All CPM2C-S CPU Units weigh 160 g max.

CPM2C-S100C

CPM2C-S110C

Appendix B

Dimensions

CPM2C-S100C-DRT

CPM2C-S110C-DRT

CPU Units with Connectors Attached

CPU Unit with Crimp Connectors CPU Unit with Soldered Connectors

Expansion I/O Units

Note Refer to the CPM2C Programmable Controller Operation Manual (W356) for the specifications and dimensions of Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units.

235

Appendix C

Support Software

CX-Programmer

CX-Programmer version 2.1 or later is compatible with the CPM2C-S. To use the CX-Programmer, select the

CPM2-S as the CPU type.

SYSMAC-CPT Support Software

All versions of SYSMAC-CPT Support Software can be used, but the CPM2-S cannot be selected as the CPU type and the CQM1 - CPU43 must be selected instead. For this reason, there will be CQM1 memory area addresses, instructions, and function settings available offline that are not supported by the CPM2-S. Errors will occur if a program containing anything not supported by the CPM2-S is transferred from the SYSMAC-CPT

Support Software.

SYSMAC Support Software

All versions of SYSMAC Support Software can be used, but the CPM2-S cannot be selected as the CPU type and the CQM1 must be selected instead. For this reason, there will be CQM1 memory area addresses, instructions, and function settings available offline that are not supported by the CPM2-S. Errors will occur if a program containing anything not supported by the CPM2-S is transferred from the SYSMAC Support Software.

237

Support Software Appendix C

238

Numerics

1:1 connections

1:1 PC Link communications

I/O response timing

156

1:N connections

AC Power Supply Unit

Index

check levels program checks

207

checking program syntax

Programming Console

178

circuit configuration inputs

outputs transistor

clearing memory areas

Programming Console

167

clock reading and setting the clock

192

communications capabilities

overview

Communications Errors

203

communications mode

CompoBus/S communications mode

112

communications speed

DeviceNet Communications

118

communications status

CompoBus/S

115

CompoBus/S communications

111

communications mode

112

communications status

compatible Slaves

flags

I/O allocation

CompoBus/S Communications Error

203

CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit available models

230

Revision History

A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat. No. W377-E1-04

Revision code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version.

Revision code

Date

November 2000 Original production

Revised content

December 2002 Page xvi: Information added on 3-tier communications with CX-Programmer.

Pages 6, 15, 46, 47, 75, 76, 78, 79, 166, 222, 226, 228, and 234: Version 1 of

CPM2C-CIF01 added (CPM2C-CIF01-V1).

Page 11: Tables of communications distances replaced.

Page 15: Illustration changed.

Page 32: Models added to table and maximum I/O capacity changed.

Page 67: Addresses corrected in illustration.

Page 74: Wire colors changed.

Page 101: Addresses corrected in description of peripheral port communications settings.

Page 130: Information added.

Pages 156 to 165: Information deleted or moved to an appendix.

October 2003 Page xiii: Caution added.

Page 4: Share Programming Devices rewritten.

Pages 15, 131, and 132: Catalog numbers added and manual names corrected.

Page 32: Reference to manual deleted.

Pages 113, 133, 134, and 159: Catalog number added.

Pages 128 and 129: “CS1” changed to “CS/CJ” or to “CS.”

Pages 128 and 129: Manual name corrected (two locations).

Page 166: Two operations added to table.

Page 168: Two sections added for new operations.

Page 229: Operating systems added for CX-Programmer and SYSMAC-CPT and SYSMAC Support Software rows removed from table.

Pages 235 to 239: Completely replaced with new material.

September 2009 Page xi: Added safety-related information.

Page xvii: Changed EMC standard numbers for EMI and Common Emission

Standard.

Page 12: Changed Unit configuration.

Page 34: Changed maximum I/O capacity specification.

Pages 46 and 60: Added a note.

Page 75: Changed table and the text above it.

Page 76: Added “2-core” in two locations.

Page 137: Changed portion of table for bits 12 and 13.

245

OMRON Corporation

Industrial Automation Company

Control Devices Division H.Q.

Automation & Drive Division

Network Department

Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,

Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan

Tel: (81) 75-344-7116/Fax: (81) 75-344-7149

OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC

One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,

IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.

Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787

OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.

No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),

Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967

Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711

Authorized Distributor:

Regional Headquarters

OMRON EUROPE B.V.

Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp

The Netherlands

Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388

OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.

Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,

200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,

PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China

Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200

OMRON Industrial Automation Global: www.ia.omron.com

In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.

Cat. No. W377-E1-04

Printed in Japan

0909

SYSMAC

Programmable Controller

OPERATION MANUAL

CPM2C-S Programmable Controller

Revised September 2009

Notice:

!DANGER

OMRON Product References

Visual Aids

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

About this Manual:

Read and Understand this Manual

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

WARRANTY

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

Application Considerations

SUITABILITY FOR USE

PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS

Disclaimers

CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

PERFORMANCE DATA

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

PRECAUTIONS

1

Intended Audience

2

3

General Precautions

Safety Precautions

4

5

Operating Environment Precautions

Application Precautions

6

6-1

6-2

EC Directives

Applicable Directives

Concepts

6-3

Conformance to EC Directives

7 3-tier Communications with CX-Programmer

CPM2C-S CPU Unit Limitation

Supported Communications

Reference

SECTION 1

Introduction

1-1 CPM2C-S Features and Functions

1-1-1 CPM2C-S Features

Example System Configuration

1-1-2 Overview of CPM2C-S Functions

1-2 System Configurations

1-2-1 CPU Units and AC Power Supply Units

1-2-2 CompoBus/S Interface

1-2-3 CPU Unit, Expansion Units, and Expansion I/O Units

1-2-4 DeviceNet Interface

1-2-5 Adapter Units

1-3 CPM2C-S Structure and Operation

1-3-1 CPM2C-S Structure

1-3-2 Operating Modes

1-3-3 Operating Mode at Startup

1-3-4 PC Operation at Startup

1-3-5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts

1-4 Functions Listed by Usage

1-5 Comparison with the CPM2C

1-6 Preparation for Operation

SECTION 2

Unit Components and Specifications

2-1 Specifications

2-1-1 General Specifications

2-1-2 Characteristics

2-1-3 I/O Specifications

2-1-4 AC Power Supply Unit Specifications

2-2 Unit Components

2-2-1 CPU Unit Components

Front View: CPM2C-S100C and CPM2C-S110C

Right Side View

Front View: CPM2C-S100C-DRT and CPM2C-S110C-DRT